JPH06317834A - Driving force transfer mechanism - Google Patents

Abstract

PURPOSE:To provide a driving force transfer mechanism capable of surely detecting an absolute position by a single sensor. CONSTITUTION:This mechanism is provided with a planetary gear 32 always engaged with a sun gear 31 driven by a single motor, a clutch cam 36 connecting the center shafts of respective gears and allowing the revolution of the planetary gear 32 made by the rotation of the sun gear 31 in one direction and controlling the revolution of the planetary gear 32 due to the rotation in the other direction and marking rotation possible at the specified position on the revolution locus of the planetary gear 32, and plural driven gears 33-35 obtaining driving force by engaging with the planetary gear 32 when the planetary gear 32 is reached to the specified position by the clutch cam 36; and the position of the clutch cam 36 to the sun gear 31 is changed at the first rotation position and the second rotation position of the planetary gear 32 and the rotation position of the planetary gear 32 is detected by detecting the change.

Description

Detailed Description of the Invention

[0001]

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a driving force transmitting mechanism, and more particularly to a driving force transmitting mechanism for a driving force transmitting mechanism motor for switching the power of a single driving source to three or more independent driving systems.

[0002]

2. Description of the Related Art Heretofore, various driving force switching mechanisms have been proposed for switching a single driving force to a plurality of driving systems for use in devices such as cameras.
Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 648 discloses a driving force switching mechanism that switches the driving force of a single motor to a plurality of transmission mechanisms by forward and reverse rotation operations.

This technical means uses the driving force of the single motor as a driving source for shutter charging, mirror driving, etc. by its forward rotation operation, and the driving force of the motor by the reverse rotation operation to wind up and rewind the film. It is designed to be switched so as to be used as a driving source of each.

Further, Japanese Patent Application No. 4-60548 proposes a technical means for performing a clutch switching operation by rotation in one direction by a rotary clutch and driving a non-driving mechanism by rotation in the other direction.

On the other hand, Japanese Patent Application No. 3-309336 proposes a drive mechanism which selects a plurality of driven gears using a single motor by combining a sun gear and a planetary gear.

Further, Japanese Patent Application No. 4-268878 proposes a switching mechanism for detecting the reset position from the pulse width of a signal being driven.

[0007]

However, in the technical means disclosed in JP-A-1-287648, the locking member of the planetary gear is switched by the section switching member, so that a complicated mechanism is required and a camera or the like is required. Makes it difficult to reduce the size of the device and causes an increase in cost.

Further, the technical means proposed in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application No. 4-60548 makes it difficult to detect the absolute position of the rotary clutch, while the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application No. 3-3.
In the technical means proposed in No. 09336, during the release operation, a series of release operations are performed after selecting the first-stage gear of the drive system that drives the autofocus lens, which causes a release time lag and deteriorates the operational feeling. Invited.

Further, since the technical means proposed in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application No. 4-268878 has no means for detecting the initial position, once the initial position is erroneously recognized due to a malfunction or the like, the operation continues in this state. There is a risk that it will end up.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to solve the above problems and to provide a driving force transmission mechanism capable of surely detecting an absolute position by a single sensor. And

[0011]

In order to achieve the above object, the driving force transmission mechanism according to the present invention constantly meshes with a sun gear which is driven by a single drive source and rotates in a forward and reverse direction. A planetary gear, a gear connecting member that connects the central axes of the sun gear and the planetary gear to each other, and a revolution of the planetary gear by allowing the sun gear to rotate in one direction and a revolution of the planetary gear in the other direction. A rotation control member that regulates the rotation of the planetary gear at a predetermined position on the revolution locus and a rotation position of the planetary gear defined by the rotation regulation member when the planetary gear is positioned at the rotation position. A plurality of driven gears that mesh with the planetary gears to obtain a driving force are provided, and the position of the revolution restricting member with respect to the sun operation is set to the first rotation position and the second rotation position of the planetary gears. Varied with position, and detecting the rotation position of the planetary gear by detecting said change.

[0012]

In the driving force transmission mechanism according to the present invention, the position of the revolution restricting member with respect to the sun operation is set to the first position of the planetary gear.
The rotation position of the planetary gear is detected by changing the rotation position of the planet gear and the second rotation position of the planet gear and detecting the change.

[0013]

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

1 to 6 show a camera to which a driving force transmission mechanism of a first embodiment of the present invention is applied. FIG. 1 is a top view of the camera, FIG. 2 is a front view, and FIG. 3 is a bottom view. Figure, Figure 4
5 is a right side view showing a state in which a strobe is housed in the camera, FIG. 5 is a rear view, and FIG. 6 is a right side view showing a state in which stroboscopic photography is performed in the camera. Further, FIG. 7 is an enlarged top view of an essential part showing a mode setting member in the camera. The camera is a so-called single-lens reflex camera with a built-in strobe, and is a lens fixed type camera that is downsized by integrating a taking lens in the body.

As shown in the right side views of FIGS. 4 and 6, the taking lens 1 (see FIG. 2) of this camera is a collapsible lens. It is configured to extend to the shooting state shown in FIG.

9 to 12 are side views showing a photographing optical system in the camera. FIG. 9 shows WIDE
At the end, that is, the focal length f = 28 mm, FIG. 10 shows the standard state, that is, the focal length f = 70.
FIG. 11 shows a TELE end, that is, a focal length f = 110 mm. Further, FIG. 12 shows a collapsed state.

As shown in these figures, the photographing optical system of this camera has a focal length of 28 mm from 11 elements in 5 groups.
It is a 4 × zoom of 110 mm.

As described above, FIG. 9 shows the WIDE end, that is, f = 28 mm, and FIG. 11 shows the TELE end f = 110 mm. Also, the standard f = 70
The state of mm is shown in FIG. 10, and the total length of the optical system is such that this state is shorter than both ends.

The above lens groups are divided into first to fifth groups, and the respective powers are distributed to be negative, negative, positive, negative, and positive, and one aspherical lens is used in the fifth group. This constitutes an extremely compact and high-performance optical system. Focusing is the front focus type,
This is done by moving the group. The aperture is the fourth
It is located in front of the group and moves together with the fourth group during zooming.

As described above, this camera is designed to be compact when stored by shortening the interval between the lens groups.
However, since the mirror and the shutter are arranged between the fifth group and the image plane in this embodiment, the fifth group is slightly retracted. Furthermore, in order to make the total length of the first and second groups shorter when retracted, in the state shown in FIG. 12, the first group is retracted in a state in which it is slightly extended to the near side rather than the infinity position (the most retracted state). Is configured.

Although the power system in the lens frame 11 will not be described in detail, the driving of the first group for controlling focusing and all groups for zooming are controlled by a focus motor and a zoom motor incorporated in the lens frame unit, respectively. It
The diaphragm integrated with the fourth group is controlled by a diaphragm motor (stepping motor) also built in the lens frame 11.

The camera is held by the photographer at the grip portion 7, and a series of photographing operations are performed by pressing the release button 2. Further, if the zoom button 5 is operated prior to the release operation, the photographic lens is moved by a zoom drive system (not shown), and it is possible to set an arbitrary focal length.

Here, the release button 2 is a so-called two-step switch, which is the first step (hereinafter referred to as 1st.
In the release, distance measurement and focusing operation are performed, and a series of shooting operations is performed in the second stage (hereinafter referred to as 2nd release).

A display unit 6 is provided on the upper surface of the camera body to notify the number of film frames and the photographing mode which can be set by the mode operating member.

Next, in order to further clarify the structure of the present camera, the overall structure will be described with reference to the central sectional top view shown in FIG.

As shown in the figure, a mirror unit 12 is arranged on the rear side (image plane side) of the lens frame 11 including the taking lens 1 (see FIG. 2). In this figure, the lens frame 11 is shown in a retracted state. In the mirror unit 12, a mirror that normally guides a light beam to the finder system and retracts from the optical path during shooting is arranged.

The shutter 13 is a so-called vertical traveling type focal plane shutter, and the exposure time is controlled by the timing of the front curtain and the rear curtain controlled by the magnet.

On both sides of the mirror unit 12 and the shutter 13, a cartridge 15 and a spool for winding the film, and a spool chamber 16 having a necessary space are arranged, and a connection (not shown) located behind the shutter 13 is provided. A motor 14 is disposed between the lens frame 11 and a partially convex magnet portion of the shutter 13 that moves the film on the image plane.

In the present camera, the motor 14 is a power source that controls all operations other than zooming, focusing, and diaphragm inside the lens frame 11, and specifically, shutter charge, mirror up / down, film winding, The film is rewound. In this camera, a DC motor having an outer diameter of 12 mm and a total length of 30 mm is used as the motor 14. The power of the motor 14 is switched to each drive system by the clutch mechanism which is a feature of this embodiment, which mechanism will be described in detail later. A battery 18 is used as an energy source for driving the motor 14 and the like, and in this camera, two lithium batteries are arranged in the grip portion 7.

Patrone chamber 15, motor 14, battery 1
A capacitor 17 for storing strobe energy is arranged in a space surrounded by 8 and is led to a light emitting portion via a strobe substrate (not shown).

Although the main configuration has been described with reference to FIG. 8, although not shown, a zoom motor for zooming, a focus motor for focusing, and an aperture motor for aperture setting are arranged inside the lens frame. It goes without saying that all of these actuators are appropriately controlled by the electrical equipment system described later.

Next, in order to clarify the relationship between the units of the camera, the internal perspective exploded view of FIG. 13 will be described. The units equivalent to those in FIG. 8 are designated by the same symbols.

First, the lens frame unit 11 is composed of a cylindrical portion enclosing an optical system and a flange-shaped connecting portion, and the connecting portion is the cartridge chamber 1 described with reference to FIG.
5. The main body unit 21 including the spool chamber 16 can be connected.

A shutter unit 13 is attached to the mirror unit 12, and the unit set is configured to be attached to the main body unit 21 before the lens frame is assembled.

Here, a shutter charge lever 2 for charging the shutter is provided on the lower surface of the shutter unit 13.
6, and a mirror drive lever 27 for moving the mirror up and down is arranged on the lower surface of the mirror unit 12.

In this camera, the motor 14 which is the main power source is used.
The power unit including is configured so that it can be coupled to the main body unit 21 and the mirror unit 12 described above from below, and the power from the motor 14 in FIG. 13 (here, has an output shaft (not shown) below). Through the clutch in the power unit 22, the fork gear 24, the spool 2
It can be transmitted to 5th grade.

The fork gear 24 is for rewinding the film by fitting it to the patrone shaft of the loaded film patrone, and the spool 25 holds the film by a claw member or a spring member (not shown) and winds it. Is designed to do.

Although not shown, a counterpart lever for operating the shutter charge lever 26 and the mirror drive lever 27 is also provided in the power unit 22.

Although it has been described that the mirror unit 12 is a unit having a mirror of a single-lens reflex camera, the finder unit 2 for guiding the light beam reflected by the mirror to the finder eyepiece is provided above the unit.
3 are combined. This finder unit 23 has
A screen is arranged at a position equivalent to the image plane (film surface) of the optical system at the time of shooting, and a so-called pentaprism and an eyepiece optical system are also included.

Next, the internal principle of the power unit 22 of the driving force transmission mechanism according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing power distribution in the power unit of the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

Although it has been described that the power source of the camera is a DC motor, the motor 14 used in this embodiment can drive each drive system directly from the viewpoint of downsizing the entire camera. The large motor with the power of cannot be used. Therefore, the reduction gear system 32A is arranged from the motor 14 as shown in FIG.
After decelerating, it is transmitted to the sequence clutch 36A, which is the main mechanism of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the sequence clutch 36A is constructed so that the power can be switched to three systems. The three systems are a shutter / mirror system 33A, a winding system 34A, and a rewinding system 35A. is there. Here, the charge lever 26 and the mirror drive lever 27 described with reference to FIG.
Are driven by the same system (shutter / mirror system 33A). The sequence clutch 36A selectively transmits power to these three systems, and the driving force from the motor 14 is not transmitted to the other two systems during driving.

Next, the principle of the sequence clutch 36A will be described with reference to the conceptual diagram of FIG.

FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing a sequence clutch in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

The sequence clutch 36A uses a so-called planetary gear, and will be described in detail at 360 °.
It uses a rotatable rotary planetary gear. Further, it has at least three or more drive systems in the rotation range, and the main constituent gears are a sun gear 31 which rotates by receiving the driving force of the motor and a planetary gear 32 which can revolve around the sun gear 31. And the first-stage gears 33, 34, and 35 of each drive system.

Power is transmitted from the motor 14 to the sun gear 31 via the reduction gear system 32A.
Depending on the direction of rotation of the motor 14, both directions (MA,
MB).

The planet gear 32 has a clutch cam 36.
The clutch cam 36 is rotatably supported on the upper surface and is rotatable with a slight load (hereinafter referred to as friction) on the clutch cam 36. The clutch cam 36 is axially supported by a member (not shown) coaxially with the sun gear 31, and the clutch cam alone can rotate without a load.

The planetary gear 32 is rotatably supported on one side upper surface of the clutch cam 36 with friction, and the distance between the rotation center axes of the planetary gear 32 and the sun gear 31 (hereinafter referred to as the shaft). The so-called gear is arranged such that the so-called gear has a size suitable for transmitting power and ensuring a backlash.

That is, since friction is added to the planetary gear 32, when the sun gear 31 rotates, the clutch cam 36 receives a force from the planetary gear 32,
The sun gear 31 is biased so as to revolve in the rotating direction.

By the way, since the purpose of the sequence clutch 36A is to switch the power to at least three or more systems, the clutch cam 36 does not function only when it is revolving at all times.

In the present embodiment, the clutch cam 36 is provided with the engaging surface 38 corresponding to the number of switching power systems, and the engaging surface 38 is engaged by the clutch lever 37 which is spring-biased toward the center of the clutch cam 36. When stopped, the clutch cam 36
The rotation in one direction can be restricted at a specific position.

In FIG. 15, when the rotation direction of the clutch cam is arrow MA, the clutch cam 36 is stopped by the clutch lever 37, and when it rotates in the direction MB, the clutch cam 36 lifts the clutch lever 37. While continuing to revolve around.

That is, in the figure, when rotating in the MB direction,
Considering that the operation is started from the locked state shown in 5,
A cam surface is formed at the end of the engaging surface 38 so as to gradually lift the clutch lever 37 against the spring biasing force. Therefore, as the clutch cam 36 rotates, the clutch lever 37 moves. When it is lifted and rotated by a predetermined amount (here, since it is switched to three systems, the predetermined amount is about 1
20 °), and the clutch lever 3 on the next locking surface 38.
7 falls, and the relative position of the clutch lever 37 becomes the same as in FIG.

That is, while the clutch cam 36 rotates, the clutch lever 37 performs the above-mentioned lift operation three times. When the rotation direction is switched from the MB direction to the MA direction, the clutch cam 36 revolves in the MA direction and first holds the locking surface 38 abutting on the clutch lever 37, and the revolution is prohibited. Needless to say.

In summary, the sequence clutch 36A is characterized in that the clutch is continuously switched when the motor rotates in one direction and the power is transmitted to the selected drive system when the motor rotates in the other direction. Can say

Returning to FIG. 15, the first stage gears of each drive system are arranged around the clutch cam 36. Figure 15
In this state, the winding system 34A is being driven, but the rotation of the sun gear 31 in the MA direction causes the first-stage gear 34 of the winding system 34A to rotate in the arrow MC direction, and transmits power to a spool (not shown). It is like this.

Although the position of the planetary gear 32 is restricted by the engaging surface 38, the sun gear 3 is in a power transmission state.
The rotation centers of the gears 1, 1, the planetary gear 32, and the first stage gear 34 of the winding system are aligned on a straight line.

Further, the planetary gear 32 and the first gear 3
Proper backlash is ensured in this state between the gears with 4 as well.

When the other locking surface 38 is locked by the clutch lever 37, the planetary gear 32 meshes with the first gear 35 of the rewinding system 35A or the first gear 33 of the shutter / mirror system 33A. .

Even in these states, the sun gear 31, the planetary gear 32, the first gear 35, or the sun gear 3
The relative relationship between each gear and the locking surface 38 is configured such that the rotation centers of the 1, planetary gear 32, and the first-stage gear 33 are aligned on a straight line. That is, the clutch cam 3
When 6 rotates in the MB direction in the drawing, the planetary gear 32 revolves while passing through the meshing position at the time of transmission of each drive system.

If the friction added to the planetary gear 32 is extremely small, the clutch cam 36
Tries to lift the clutch lever 37 against the spring force, it slips and cannot revolve, and the planetary gear 3
Only the rotation of 2 will be performed.

Further, if the friction is increased more than necessary, the above-mentioned slip is eliminated, but when driving each drive system, the friction is involved as a transmission loss, so that the energy loss with respect to the motor power becomes large. , The driving efficiency is significantly reduced.

FIG. 20 is an enlarged sectional view of the planetary gear 32.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, the planetary gear 32 fixed to the clutch cam 36 by adhesion or the like.
The planetary gear 32 is spring-biased by the coil spring 32b with respect to the shaft 32a to obtain stable friction.

FIG. 21 is an enlarged sectional view showing another example of the planetary gear 32.

As shown in FIG. 21, the planetary gear 32
As another example, instead of the coil spring 32b, a wave washer 32c having a bent washer or a disc spring can be used to obtain friction.

16 to 19 are model views of the upper surface of the clutch portion of this embodiment arranged in the power unit 22 described with reference to FIG.

Although the cam rotation direction (drive side and switching side) is opposite to that of FIG. 15 for explaining the principle, it has three drive systems as in FIG.

First, FIG. 16 shows a state in which the rewinding system is being driven. The sun gear 41 rotates in the direction of the arrow, and the planet gear 43 has the clutch cam 42 engaging surface with the clutch lever 4.
7 is in contact with the clutch cam 42 at the point PB.
Is restricted and the rewinding system 44 is driven in the direction of the arrow.

The clutch lever 47 is the clutch cam 4
It is spring-biased in two directions and contacts the clutch cam 42 at the point PA. That is, the position of the clutch lever 47 is determined by the cam shape of the clutch cam corresponding to the point PA.

Consider now the case where the rewinding is completed and the shutter / mirror system is driven next.

After the motor is stopped, it is rotated in reverse due to the switching of the clutch. As shown in FIG. 17, the sun gear also starts rotating in the direction of the arrow.

The planetary gear 43 has the above-mentioned structure shown in FIGS.
As shown in FIG. 1, the friction similar to that of the planetary gear 32 is built in, so that the clutch cam 42 revolves in the direction of the arrow. That is, the planetary gear 43 disengages from the first stage gear 44 of the rewind system and revolves toward the first stage gear 45 of the shutter / mirror system. At this time, the clutch lever 47 is lifted from the PA point side by the cam surface of the clutch cam 42 as shown in FIG.

Almost at the same time when the planetary gear 43 passes through the meshing position with the first stage gear 45 of the shutter / mirror system, the clutch lever 47 deviates from the top dead center and is pressed by the spring to the next cam surface (bottom dead center). It At this time, the state of these levers and the clutch is detected by a sensor described later, and the motor rotated to the clutch switching side is
Stop.

This state is shown in FIG. 18, and since there is some overrun in the characteristics of the motor, the engagement surface side of the clutch lever has not yet contacted the clutch cam.

Then, the motor rotates to the driving side. As a result, the overrun clutch cam 42 is shown in FIG.
At the point PD, the clutch lever 47 locks at the PD point. At this time, the clutch lever 4
7 is spring-pressed at the PC point corresponding to the bottom dead center of the clutch cam 42 and the position is restricted. Therefore, the rotation of the sun gear 41 is transmitted as the rotation in the arrow direction to the first stage gear 45 of the shutter / mirror system in FIG.
A series of clutch operations is established.

In this way, the same switching operation is performed when the shutter / mirror system first gear 45 moves to the hoisting system first gear 46. Further, the switching is not performed only to the adjacent drive system, and if necessary, for example, the shutter / mirror system can be switched to the rewinding system without stopping at the winding system.

The sensor (not shown) and the position detection method will be described in detail later, but only the concept will be described with reference to FIG.
3 will be described.

FIG. 43 is a developed view of the circumference including the cam surface of the clutch cam described above. As shown in this figure, the three locking positions are specified as the positions corresponding to the respective drive systems.

In this embodiment, the shutter / mirror system is set to the initial position of the normal standby of the camera. In the clutch cam, the top dead center, that is, the maximum lift position when switching from each locking surface to the next locking surface is set to the same radius. However, the lift amount up to the top dead center is divided into two types.

In FIG. 43, the lift amounts are indicated by h1 and h2. As is clear from this, when the shutter / mirror system corresponding to the initial position is locked, the clutch lever is h2 above the top dead center. Just in the down position,
When locked at other positions, it is stable at a position down by h1.

As a result, it is possible to determine the initial position from the three locking positions by the difference in the relative positions of the clutch levers.
Further, the outline of the position detection of the present embodiment is that it is possible to determine other locking positions by determining which locking position from the initial position.

Now, the power portion of this embodiment will be described in detail below. Mainly, the internal structure of the power unit 22 described in FIG. 13 will be described in detail.

FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the gear train from the motor to the above-mentioned clutch portion. In order to clarify the structure, this figure is expanded in the vertical direction and only the main parts are shown.
Actually, adjacent gears are meshed with each other.

The pinion gear 51 is a gear press-fitted into the shaft of the motor and is the power source of this embodiment. A gear train composed of gears 52, 53, 54 sequentially meshes with the pinion gear 51 to rotate the sun gear 41 which is the input side of the clutch portion. In the present embodiment, the object to be driven is a film, a shutter or the like with respect to the power of the motor, so that it cannot be driven directly and it is necessary to use it after decelerating appropriately.

Although the friction of the coil spring 32b and the wave washer 32c has been described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 as the one that controls the revolution of the clutch cam 42, the friction does not become a loss at the time of revolution, but at the time of rotation of the planetary gear. Since a loss occurs, unless the output shaft of the motor is decelerated to a certain extent, the ratio of the loss to the motor power becomes large and the efficiency of the entire mechanism is significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by engaging the four-stage gears from the pinion gear 51 to the sun gear 41 of FIG. 22 to ensure a reduction ratio of about 30, a clutch mechanism capable of high speed switching with very little loss. Has been realized (the loss is further reduced as the reduction ratio is increased, but the time required for switching increases).

Further, the three types of power systems described with reference to FIG. 16 and the like are laid out on the outer periphery of the clutch cam 42.

Next, each power system will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of a gear train in the shutter / mirror system. In this figure, a gear 55 is a partner with which the planetary gear 43 can mesh, and in FIG. 16, it corresponds to the gear shown as the first stage gear 45 of the shutter / mirror system. The gear 55 sequentially meshes with the gears 56 and 57, and the gear 57 meshes with a cam gear 58 for a shutter mirror (hereinafter referred to as an SM cam gear 58) which is a lever drive source of the main drive system.

The SM cam gear 58 has a mirror cam 58a for driving the mirror system on its upper side and a shutter charge cam 58 for charging the shutter system on its lower side.
b is integrally provided, and a mirror-up state and a shutter charge completion state are established depending on the stop positions of the cams 58a and 58b.

Therefore, in order to output a signal corresponding to the SM cam gear 58, the SM cam gear 58 is meshed with the timing gear 59 having the same number of teeth, and the sliding section fixed to the timing gear 59 has the sliding section fixed thereto.
By rotating on the pattern of SM cam gear 5
It is configured so that the relative position of 8 can be detected.

Next, the cam provided on the SM cam gear 58 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26.

FIG. 24 is a side view of the SM cam gear 58, and FIGS. 25 and 26 are sectional views taken along the lines AA 'and BB', respectively.

FIG. 25 (section AA ') is a sectional view showing a cam 58a for driving a mirror. About 2/3 of the circumference is formed by R1 having the same radius, and a part thereof is at top dead center. The part connecting R1 and R2 formed by R2 is R
1, R2 are connected smoothly. Here, the top dead center range of R2 corresponds to the state where the mirror is up as the state of the camera.

FIG. 26 (BB 'cross section) is a sectional view showing the shutter charging cam 58b, which is formed by a smooth cam between the top dead center range indicated by R4 and the minimum radius indicated by R3. Has been done.

The cam shown in FIGS. 24 to 26 is composed of a molded component coaxially integrally molded with the gear portion of the SM cam gear 58.

Next, a lever mechanism in which the SM cam gear 58 drives the mirror / shutter will be described.

FIG. 29 is a perspective view of an essential part of a mirror system in this embodiment.

The mirror lever 61 is a lever rotatable about the center of rotation, and one end portion 61A of the mirror lever 61 contacts the SM cam gear 58. Also, the other end 61B
Is in contact with the side plate lever 62. The side plate lever 62 is also a rotatable lever having a rotation center.

A side plate lever 63 is in contact with the other end of the side plate lever 62. The side plate lever 63 is also a rotatable lever. A rotation center shaft is provided on the upper end side of the mirror 64, and the rotation center is held by a mirror unit (not shown), so that the rotation can be made within a range of 45 °.
A mask frame pin 65 is fixed to the side surface (side plate lever side) of the mirror 64 so as to be integrated with the mirror 63, and the mask frame pin 65 contacts the other end of the side plate lever 63 with respect to the side plate lever 62. Touching.

With the above structure, the mirror 64 can be moved from the normal position (down position) to the up position by driving the mask frame pin 65 in the mirror up direction.

30 and 31 are explanatory views in which each lever is modeled for the above-mentioned mirror operation, and those having the same functions as those in FIG. 29 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

FIG. 30 shows the normal state (mirror down state).
The mirror 64 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown). As a result, the mask frame pin 65 comes into contact with the side plate lever 63, and the pressing force thereof is further increased.
It is transmitted to 2.

FIG. 31 shows the mirror-up state,
When the SM cam gear 58 rotates, the mirror lever 61 moves in the direction of the arrow so that the side plate levers 62 and 63 rotate, respectively. This causes the mask frame pin 65 to lift upward against the spring force. It is supposed to be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 31, the SM cam gear 58 is used.
Shows the mirror lever 6 at the top dead center position described in FIG.
1 is in the state of maximum lift. Needless to say, when the mirror 64 goes down, the lever of the mirror 64 returns to the state shown in FIG. 30 by the spring force of the mirror 64 if the mirror lever 61 is in the retractable position by the rotation of the SM cam gear 58. .

27 and 28 show the SM cam gear 5 described above.
8 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between 8 and the mirror lever 61,
The mirror driving cam lifts the mirror lever 61 that presses the side plate lever 62. And FIG.
7 shows a normal stop position (mirror down position), and FIG. 28 shows a mirror up position (equivalent to FIG. 31).

Next, the shutter charging operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. 32 corresponds to FIG.
FIG. 6 is a schematic view of the focal plane shutter used in the camera shown in FIG.

As shown in the figure, a magnet portion 72 is provided on one side of the mask portion 70, and the front and rear curtain magnets stroke the shutter lever 71 from the free state shown by the solid line to the charged state shown by the broken line. It is designed to be charged by moving L.

By energizing the magnet portion 72 in this charged state, the magnet is attracted and the time is formed at the timing of turning off the magnet. In this embodiment, the shutter lever 71 is charged by the SM cam gear 58. It has become.

FIGS. 33 and 34 are top views of the charge state, which are made clearer, as seen from the upper side of the camera in the vicinity of the BB ′ cross section of FIG. 24.

FIG. 33 shows the shutter lever 7 in the free state, that is, the state in which the shutter is not charged.
1 is biased in the direction of the arrow in the figure by the spring force attached to the magnet portion 72. The shutter charge lever 26 is rotatably provided while being pressed by a spring force at one end, and is in contact with the cam surface of the SM cam gear 58 at the other end. The state of FIG. 33 corresponds to immediately after the exposure is completed in this camera.

33, when the motor tries to charge the shutter, the SM cam gear 58 rotates clockwise. As a result, the shutter is gradually charged to reach the charging completed state shown in FIG.

Here, the shutter charge lever 26 is in contact with the range of the top dead center on the cam of the SM cam gear 58 described above. Therefore, even when the motor is stopped, the shutter charge lever 71 causes a spring force to cause the shutter charge lever to move. 26 does not rotate the SM cam gear 58.

In the above description of FIG. 23, the timing gear 59 and the timing board 60 secure the stop position of the SM cam gear 58, but the structure of the timing board 60 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 35 is a bottom view of the timing board in FIG. 23 as viewed from the bottom surface side.

In the figure, regions Wa, Wb and Wc are conductive pattern portions. The sliding contact piece integrally fixed to the timing gear 59 shown in FIG. 23 has a width that covers the minimum radius R1 to the maximum radius R2 of the pattern of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35, the pattern portion has
It is divided into three parts, a Wa part, a Wb part, and a Wc part, each of which is input to the detection part by a pattern (not shown). The sliding contact piece is provided with a contact end on the same line with respect to the center of rotation, and rotates on the pattern portion. Therefore, when the sliding contact piece is located in the area Wb range or the Wc range, respectively, the area Wa and the area Wb,
The area Wa and the area Wc are electrically connected, and the sliding contact piece is in the area Wb.
It is possible to detect that it exists in the range of or the range of the area Wc.

The area Wb range corresponds to the state where the shutter charging corresponding to FIG. 34 is completed, and the area Wc range corresponds to the state where the mirror corresponding to FIG. 28 is up.

In terms of motor control, the brake is applied when the area Wa and the area Wb are conducted when the shutter is charged, and the brake is applied when the area Wa and the Wc are conducted when the mirror is raised. Although a stable stop operation is obtained, details will be described later with reference to a timing chart.

Next, the gear train of the hoisting system in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing the gear train of the hoisting system.

Like the shutter / mirror gear train, the hoisting gear train is developed in the vertical direction, but the adjacent gears mesh with each other.

In the figure, a gear 81 is a first-stage gear with which the planetary gear meshes when the hoisting system is driven, and corresponds to the gear indicated by the first-stage gear 46 of the hoisting system in FIG. The unit configuration of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. 13 above. In the power unit, the hoisting system is
Since it has to be transmitted to the side facing the motor, a gear train for transmitting the lower side of the main body is required.

In FIG. 36, the two-stage gear 87 is rotated from the lower side of the main body through a series of idle gears 82 to 86 from the gear 81. The spool that holds and winds the film is provided with a claw portion and a gear portion that are integrally formed, and the spool is rotated by the engagement of a series of these gear trains. In addition,
The upper protruding portion of the spool is rotatably fitted to an upper portion of a spool chamber provided in the main body unit.

Next, the gear train of the rewinding system in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the gear train of the rewinding system.

In the figure, a gear 91 is a first stage gear with which the planetary gear meshes when the rewind system is driven, and corresponds to the gear indicated by the first stage gear 44 of the rewind system in FIG. The gear 91 meshes with the two-stage gear 92 and then meshes with the gear portion of the fork 93. In the fork 93, the fork portion at the tip corresponds to the patrone shaft portion of the loaded film patrone to transmit the rotation, and the fork portion is coaxial with the patrone chamber provided in the main unit, and The fork portion is spring-biased in the direction of the arrow in the figure so that it can be moved back and forth when the cartridge is inserted.

Here, in order to effectively use the power of the motor, the hoisting system is set to a total reduction ratio of about 240 from the motor, and the rewinding system is set to a total reduction ratio of about 150.

The internal structure of each drive system has been described above.
The mechanism that enables shutter charging, mirror driving, film winding, and film rewinding by means of one clutch provided in the power unit has been shown.

Next, as an example of application of the camera position detecting device, an example used for controlling a sequence motor of a camera will be described.

FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an application example of the position detecting device in the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment.

In FIG. 45, the CPU 120 sequentially executes programs stored in the internal ROM to control peripheral ICs and the like. AFIC
Reference numeral 134 is an autofocus IC. In this camera, the TTL phase difference detection method is adopted as the autofocus method.

First, the AFIC 134 has a CPU.
AFIC reset signal (AFRES) Si from 120
g101 is sent and reset. The light from the subject passes through the taking lens and reaches the photo sensor array arranged on the upper surface of the AFIC 134. Then, within the AFIC 34, processing such as light quantity integration and quantization is performed. Then, the amount of focus shift is calculated as the distance measurement information.

When the light amount integration is completed, the signal (AFEND) Sig102 indicating that the light amount integration is completed is sent to the CPU.
Sent to 120. AFIC134 and CPU for distance measurement information
Signal indicating that communication between 120 (AFCEN)
Sig103, data signal (DATA) Sig104,
CP in the synchronization clock signal (CLK) Sig105
Transferred to U120.

By the way, if the characteristics of the respective elements of the photosensor array vary, accurate distance measurement information cannot be obtained as it is. Therefore, the variation information of the photo sensor array is stored in advance in the EEPROM 135, which is a non-volatile storage element, and the CPU 120 performs the correction calculation of the distance measurement information obtained from the AFIC 134. In addition, the EEPROM 135 stores various adjustment values such as mechanical variations and variations in electrical characteristics of various elements. These adjustment values are stored in the EEPROM 1 if necessary.
35, that is, a signal (EPCEN) Sig107 that activates 35, that is, a data signal (DA).
TA) Sig108, synchronous clock signal (CLK) Si
Reading can be performed by g109. In addition, CPU1
Data is exchanged between 20, the AFIC 134, and the EEPROM 135 by serial communication.

The date module 137 imprints the date on the film by the imprint signal Sig110 from the CPU 120. The light emission time of the projection lamp changes stepwise depending on the film ISO speed. The interface IC (hereinafter referred to as IFIC) 138 is activated by the IFIC activation signal (IFCENb) Sig111 from the CPU 120, and the CPU 120 and the latch signal (LATC).
H) Sig112, 4-bit bus line signal (D0b-
D3b) Sig113 to Sig116, D / Ab signal S
Perform parallel communication using the ig117 to measure the subject brightness, measure the temperature inside the camera, shape the output signal waveform of the photo interrupter, etc., control the constant voltage drive of the motor, stabilize temperature voltage, temperature proportional voltage, and other constant voltage Generation, battery remaining amount check, reception of infrared remote control, control of motor driver IC, control of various LEDs, low voltage monitoring of power supply voltage, control of booster circuit, etc. are performed.

The latch signal Sig112 is a signal for timing the reading of the signal on the bus line. The D / Ab signal is a 4-bit bus line signal Sig1.
13 to Sig116 is a signal indicating whether it indicates an address or data. D / Ab
4-bit bus line signal Sig1 when the signal is "H"
13 to Sig116 represent addresses, and when the D / Ab signal is "L", a 4-bit bus line signal Sig113 to.
Sig116 represents data.

The brightness of the subject is measured using the two-divided silicon photodiode 170. The light receiving surface of the sensor is divided into two parts, that is, the central part of the screen and the peripheral part thereof, and the SPOT for performing photometry only in a part of the central part of the screen.
It is possible to perform photometry, average photometry using the entire screen, and two types of photometry. The photometric sensor outputs a current corresponding to the subject brightness to the IFIC 138. I
The FIC 138 converts the output from the photometric sensor into a voltage and transfers it to the CPU 120. The CPU 120 performs exposure calculation, backlight judgment, etc. based on the voltage information.

For the measurement of the temperature inside the camera, a voltage proportional to the absolute temperature is output by the circuit built in the IFIC 138, and the signal is A / D converted by the CPU 120 to obtain a value. The obtained temperature measurement value is used for correction of mechanical members and electric signals whose state changes with temperature. In the waveform shaping of the photo interrupter or the like, the photocurrent of the output of the photo interrupter or the photo reflector is compared with the reference current, and output from the IFIC 138 as a rectangular wave. At this time, noise is removed by giving a hysteresis to the reference current. Further, the reference current and the hysteresis characteristic can be changed by communicating with the CPU 120.

To check the remaining capacity of the battery, connect a low resistance to both ends of the battery and divide the voltage across the battery when a current is applied inside the IFIC138 to determine the CPU
Output to 120, and the CPU 120 performs A / D conversion to obtain a voltage value. In the reception of the infrared light remote controller, the modulated infrared light is emitted from the light projecting LED 141 of the remote controller transmitting unit 140, and the infrared light is received by the light receiving silicon photodiode 142. The output of the silicon photodiode 142 is subjected to processing such as waveform shaping inside the IFIC 138 and transferred to the CPU 120.

For low-voltage monitoring of the power supply voltage, the IFIC is provided with a dedicated terminal. When the voltage input to the IFIC falls below a specified value, the IFIC 138 sends a reset signal to the CP.
It is output to U120 to prevent runaway or the like of the CPU 120. The control of the booster circuit is to operate the booster circuit when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. Further, the IFIC 138 is connected with an LED 143 for displaying in the finder for the end of AF distance measurement, a flash light emission warning, or an LED used for a photo interrupter or the like.

The on / off control of these LEDs and the control of the amount of emitted light are controlled by the CPU 120 and the EEPROM 135, I.
Communication is performed between the FICs 138, and the IFIC 138 directly controls. What is controlled is the LED current Sig131 of SCPI147 and the LED current Sig1 of LDPI148.
32, LED current Sig133 of ZMPR172, ZM
LED current Sig134 and AVPI152 of PI173
LED current Sig135, WPR178 LED current Sig146 and finder display LED 143
Is on and off.

In the constant voltage drive control of the motor, the CPU
By communicating with 120, the drive voltage can be set stepwise. The motor driver IC 139 performs film feeding, shutter charging, and mirror driving, and is a motor 144 corresponding to the motor 14 in FIG. 8 (hereinafter referred to as a sequence motor to distinguish from other motors) and a lens for focus adjustment. Driving LD motor 145,
Driving three motors of the ZM motor 146 for zooming the lens frame, driving the booster circuit, driving the LED 171 for displaying the self-timer operation, and a front curtain magnet (MGF) for attracting and holding the front curtain of the focal plane shutter.
176, a rear curtain magnet (MGS) 177 that attracts and holds the rear curtain of the focal plane shutter is controlled.

These operation controls, for example, which device is driven, whether the motor is normally or reversely rotated,
Apply the signal of CPU120 to IFIC1
38, and the IFIC 138 controls the transistors of the motor driver 139 by a signal Sig 118 that turns on and off. Whether the sequence motor 144 is in the shutter charge, film winding, or film rewinding state is a photo interrupter for detection, SCPI1.
The signal Sig119 is detected at 47 and is output to the CPU 120.

The amount of extension of the lens is detected by the photo interrupter LDPI 148 attached to the LD motor 145, and the output Sig 120 is sent to the CPU 120 after being waveform-shaped by the IFIC 138. The zooming state of the lens frame is based on the photo interrupter ZMPI1 built in the lens frame.
73 and photo reflector ZMPR172. When the lens frame is between TELE and WIDE, the high reflection portion provided on the lens frame is configured to face the ZMPR 172, and the non-reflection portion is configured to face in the other range.

Accordingly, the output Sig1 of the ZMPR 172 is obtained.
By inputting 21 to the CPU 120, the TELE end, W
It becomes possible to detect the IDE end. ZMPI173 is ZM
It is attached to the motor 146, and its output Sig122 is waveform-shaped by the IFIC 138 and then input to the CPU 120 to detect the amount of zooming from the TELE end or the WIDE end.

The motor driver IC 150 includes a stepping motor and an AV motor for driving the aperture adjusting unit as CP.
ON / OFF signal (ENA) Sig136 from U120
It is driven by a normal rotation and reverse rotation signal (IN) Sig123. The AVPI 152 outputs its output S
ig124 is wave-shaped by IFIC138 and CPU12
0 is input to detect the aperture open position.

The liquid crystal display panel 136 uses the segment signal (SEG) Sig125 and the common signal (COM) Sig126 sent from the CPU 120 to display the number of film frames, photographing mode, strobe mode, aperture value, remaining battery level, etc. It has become.

The strobe unit 174 is for giving a necessary brightness to the subject by causing the arc tube to emit light when the brightness of the subject is insufficient at the time of photographing or at the time of autofocus distance measurement. At IFIC
138 strobe charge signal (STCHG) Sig12
7, strobe light emission start signal (STON) Sig128,
It is controlled by each signal of the signal Sig129 for stopping the stroboscopic light emission. Also, the charging voltage of the strobe is sent to the CPU 120 as a VST signal Sig130.

The WPR 178 is a photoreflector for detecting the amount of film fed. This WPR178
Are arranged to face the perforation of the film. Since the light reflectance differs between the film surface and the perforation portion, the output of the WPR 178 differs when corresponding to each. Since the WP 178 and the perforation alternately face each other during film feeding, the output Sig 147 of the WPR 178 has a pulse shape, and the amount of movement for one frame of the film can be detected by counting the number.

Key signals 0 to 5 (KEY0 to KEY5) S
ig137 to Sig142 and key common 0 to 2 (K
EYCOM0 to 2) Sig143 to Sig145 are used to detect which of the switches 121 to 133 is on.

The above KEY0 to KEY5 are normally the CPU1.
The signal level is in the "H" state because it is pulled up inside 20. Here, for example, KEYCOM0Si
It is assumed that g143 is "L", KEYCOM1Sig144 is "H", and KEYCOMSig145 is "H". If R1SW121 is turned on at this point, KEY0
Sig137 changes from "H" to "L". Therefore, the signal levels of KEYCOM0 to 2Sig143 to Sig145, and KEY0 to 5Sig137 to Sig142.
If the signal level of
You can see which of the 33 is on. In addition, KEYCOM0 to 2Sig143 to Sig
Two or more 145 cannot be set to "L" at the same time.

First release switch (R1SW)
Reference numeral 121 turns on when the release button is half-pushed to perform a distance measuring operation. The second release switch (R2SW) 122 is turned on when the release button is fully pressed, and a shooting operation is performed based on various measured values. Zoom up switch (ZUSW) 12
3 and a zoom down switch (ZDSW) 124 are switches for zooming the lens frame, and when ZUSW 123 is turned on, zooming is performed in the long focus direction, and when ZDSW 124 is turned on, zooming is performed in the short focus direction.

When the self-switch (SELFSW) 125 is turned on, the self-timer photographing mode or the remote control standby state is set. In this state, R2SW12
If 2 is turned on, self-timer shooting is performed, and if a shooting operation is performed with the remote control transmitter, shooting is performed with the remote control. When the spot switch (SPOTSW) 126 is turned on, the spot metering mode is set in which metering is performed only in a part of the center of the photographing screen. Note that the SPOTSW126
Normal photometry when is off is performed using the entire shooting screen.

Pict 1 switch (PCT1SW) 127
A pictogram 4SW (PCT4SW) 130 and a program switch (PSW) 131 are program photographing mode changeover switches, and a photographer selects a mode according to photographing conditions. When the PCT1SW127 is turned on, the portrait mode is set, and the aperture and the shutter speed are determined so that the depth of field becomes shallow within the proper exposure range. When the PCT2SW128 is turned on, the night view mode is set, and the value is set one step lower than the value of the proper exposure at the time of normal shooting. When the PCT3SW129 is turned on, the landscape mode is set, and the aperture and shutter speed values are determined so that the depth of field is as deep as possible within the proper exposure range.

When the PCT4SW 130 is turned on, the stop motion mode is set, and the shutter speed is set to be as high as possible. At this time, the red-eye prevention mode of the flash mode cannot be used.

The above PCT1SW127 to PCT4SW
No more than one 130 can be selected at the same time.

The PSW 131 is a normal program photographing mode switch. By pressing this PSW131,
The PCT1SW127 to PCT4SW130 are reset and the AV priority program mode described later is reset. In the AV priority switch (AVSW) 133
When is turned on, the shooting mode becomes the aperture priority program mode. In this mode, the AV value is determined by the photographer, and A
The shutter speed is determined by the program according to the V value. In this mode, PCT2SW128 and PCT
The 4SW 130 has no function as described above and serves as an AV value setting switch. The PCT2SW128 is a switch for increasing the AV value, and the PCT4SW130 is a switch for decreasing the AV value.

A strobe switch (STSW) 132 is a strobe light emission mode changeover switch. It is a normal automatic light emission mode (AUTO) or a red-eye reduction automatic light emission mode (AUTO).
-S), forced light emission mode (FILL-IN), strobe off mode.

The power switch (PWSW) 153 is the main switch of this camera.

The panorama switch (PANSW) 154 is a switch for detecting whether the photographing state is the panoramic photographing or the normal photographing and is turned on during the panoramic photographing.

The back cover switch (BKSW) 155 is a switch for detecting the state of the back cover and is in the off state when the back cover is closed. When the BKSW 155 shifts from the ON state to the OFF state, film loading starts.

Shutter charge switch (SCSW)
156 is a switch for detecting the shutter charge.

Mirror up switch (MUSW) 157
Is a switch for detecting mirror up, which is turned on by mirror up.

The DX switch (DXSW) 158 is a D indicating the sensitivity of the film printed on the film cartridge.
A switch for reading the X code and for detecting the presence / absence of film loading, which is composed of five switch groups (not shown). Pop-up switch (P
The UPSW) 159 is a switch for controlling the flash. The PUPSW 159 is interlocked with the movement of the strobe light emitting portion, and when the light emitting portion is raised, the PUPSW 159 is turned on to perform strobe charging. If the PUP SW 159 is on when the subject has low brightness and the strobe mode is Auto, the strobe emission is permitted.

The rewinding switch (RWMSW) 160 is a switch for forcibly rewinding the film. R
WMSW160 is on to force film rewind.

The XSW 174 is a switch for adjusting the timing of strobe light emission, and is turned on when the front curtain of the shutter has finished traveling, and turned off when the shutter charge is completed.

The piezoelectric buzzer (PCV) 175 emits a sound at the time of focusing at the time of autofocus and at the time of operating the switch.

Next, a method of detecting the clutch portion used in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 44.

As described above, since the clutch portion is composed of a plurality of cams and locking surfaces, the relationship between the clutch lever and the clutch cam that locks the clutches becomes a problem.
That is, it is necessary to surely and instantaneously determine to which drive system the power is transmitted when the motor rotation direction on the driving side is switched from the motor rotation in the clutch switching direction. Therefore, in this embodiment, the position of the clutch cam can be detected by the following method.

Although the development view of the clutch cam has been described with reference to FIG. 43, the lift amount is different from h2 and h1 on the locking surface at the shutter / mirror driving position and the winding / rewinding locking surface. That is, when the shutter / mirror drive position can be locked, when the lift amount h2 is down from the top dead center when the clutch cam is rotating in the switching direction,
Until the next top dead center is over and down. Therefore, since there is only one h2 down during one rotation of the clutch cam, it is possible to grasp the absolute position by detecting the state of the cam surface or the lever at this location. In this embodiment, a method of detecting the absolute position by detecting the position of the clutch lever that is in contact with the cam will be described in detail below.

FIG. 38 shows the relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever. The lever is spring-biased in the direction of the arrow.

The difference from the conceptual diagram described with reference to FIG. 16 and the like is that the detection unit (upper side in the drawing) is integrally configured. The sensor monitoring position (SE point) indicated by the arrow is the detection point of the only photoelectric sensor in this clutch,
In this embodiment, it is a place where the state of the clutch lever 47 can be detected by a photo interrupter (SCPI).

FIG. 44 is an enlarged perspective view showing the relationship between the SCPI and the clutch lever 47.

Now, FIG. 38 shows the state where the shutter / mirror position is locked. That is, the clutch lever 47 is located at a position h2 lower than the outermost circumference of the clutch cam 42. At SE point, the clutch lever 47
The Xd section in the inside corresponds, but here, in order to explain what the Xd section is, a cross section CC ′ is shown in FIG. 42.

The wall thickness of the detection portion is L, but the wall thickness of the Xd portion corresponding to the SE point is L1. Then, as is apparent from FIG. 38, when the clutch lever 47 is lifted by the clutch cam 42, the detection surface corresponding to the SE point moves to Xe and Xf. The Xe portion has a wall thickness L2, and the Xf portion has a hole formed therein, and there is nothing for blocking the photo interrupter. Here, the clutch lever 47 is a molding member in which the locking portion and the detection portion are integrally molded.

Since the photo interrupter SCPI receives the projected infrared light, even the integrally molded clutch lever 47 has different thicknesses Xd and Xd.
Different outputs can be obtained if the transmittance of the e portion is different. Specifically, in this embodiment, the transmittance of the Xd portion is set to about 0, the transmittance of the Xe portion is set to about 25%, and the Xf portion is set to 100% because it is a hole. Therefore, the thickness of the clutch lever 47 is L1: 0.
The width L is set to 7 mm and L2 is 0.2 mm, and the total width L is set to 0.8 mm from the package interval of the photo interrupter SCPI.

In order to clarify the positional relationship of the clutch lever 47 with respect to the switch portion of the SCPI, FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the clutch lever and the SCPI. The SCPI signal is guided to the detection unit by a flexible substrate (not shown).

With these configurations, the SCPI can always grasp the lift amount of the clutch lever 47 in three states of maximum, h1 down, and h2 down.
Although it has been described here that the material for the clutch lever is a mold, it goes without saying that the characteristic of the clutch lever is that the plate has a color of approximately 0.7 mm that can shield light almost completely. In addition, in the present embodiment, the thickness is 0.2 mm and 2
Although a material of 5% transmission is used, the thickness is not particularly limited to this, and there is no problem in terms of mechanism even if appropriately changed.

By the way, it has been stated that the absolute position can be detected because there is only one range where h2 is down in the entire circumference of the cam.
The behavior of the clutch lever 47 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

FIG. 38 shows a state where the shutter / mirror position is locked, that is, a normal standby position.
Now, considering the actual shooting operation, the camera winds after exposure and drives the drive system in the order of shutter charge.

Therefore, the clutch section must also be switched promptly after the end of exposure (including the mirror down) to transmit power to the hoisting drive system. After the mirror down is completed in the state of FIG. 38, the motor starts reverse rotation. Since the reverse rotation here means the rotation in the clutch switching direction, the clutch cam 42 is disengaged from the engagement surface, and in the figure,
Rotate clockwise.

This is the state of FIG. 39, and the clutch lever is lifted against the spring biasing force. FIG. 39 shows a state in which the lift has finished and the rotation of the cam has progressed to the top dead center.
The Xf portion, which is a hole, corresponds to the sensor surface, that is, the SE point.

Now, set the output level of the sensor in this state to H
ig (hereinafter, H level). In addition, the output level of the light shielding unit corresponding to FIG. 38 is set to Low (hereinafter, L level). Furthermore, the output level corresponding to the intermediate Xe section is set to Mi.
d (hereinafter M level). However, the output here is S
Consider a waveform output from a single CPI that does not include a stable output, that is, a value that is output momentarily during switching. Therefore, when the clutch lever 47 moves, for example, from Xd to Xf during switching, Xe is briefly
Output is obtained, but that part is omitted for convenience in the description here.

After the state shown in FIG. 39, the motor continues to rotate further, so the cam continues to rotate to the right, and when the top dead center range ends, h1 is lowered. As a result, the clutch lever 47 also rotates following the clutch cam 42, and S
The detection unit corresponding to the point E is the Xe unit. The motor is stopped by judging the Xe portion. That is, the rotation of the motor in the mechanical system driving direction drives the hoisting system.
Guaranteed by the discretion of the department.

FIG. 40 shows the state at the moment when the motor stops.

Since the motor braked by the M level judgment slightly overruns, the engagement surface of the clutch cam 42 is not in contact with the clutch lever 47 in this state. In this camera, since exposure to winding is a series of operations, the state of FIG. 40 is momentary, and the motor switches to rotation in the drive direction. Then, the clutch cam 42 is locked,
FIG. 41 shows a state in which the hoisting system is being driven.

The switching from the shutter / mirror system to the hoisting system has been described above. Here, the M-level determination is performed to detect the Xe portion. However, as a feature of this embodiment, there are two ranges in which the M-level output is output, and absolute position detection cannot be performed. Therefore, it is actually necessary to determine the level and the level count (how many times the M level is). In this camera, it is judged that the first M level is the winding upper part and the second M level is the rewinding part with respect to the initial position.
The place is judged. Therefore, if you want to forcibly rewind during shooting, set the initial position (shutter,
The clutch rotated from the mirror position) passes through the hoisting system,
By stopping at the second M-level judgment, any rewinding from any state is possible.

Prior to the description of the entire operation, the clutch mechanism during a series of photographing operations will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. Although it has been described that the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of this embodiment is applied has a zoom mechanism and an autofocus mechanism built in the lens frame unit, the timing chart has no direct relation to the power system of the camera body. The behavior of these actuators is omitted.

This camera has a two-step stroke release function. Distance measurement and lens extension are performed with the release. This operation is performed between timings T01 and T02, and normally when a focus evaluation cannot be obtained, a warning is issued and the operation does not proceed to T02 and thereafter. 2nd at T02. When the release is permitted, the motor is first applied with a voltage in the CW direction. The CW direction is a rotation direction that can drive any power system in the conceptual diagrams described above.

Since the initial position of the clutch part is the shutter / mirror system, the motor rotation from T02 is transmitted to the SM cam gear 58 and the shutter charge cam part 58b (charge cam) and the mirror drive cam part 58a which are integral with the cam gear. (Mirror cam) and change respectively. T
At the moment when the motor is turned on in 02, the camera is on standby with the shutter charging completed. Therefore, the timing gear 59 and the timing board 60 meshing with the SM cam gear 58 are detected to detect the phase of the SM cam gear 58. The states of the two switches formed by are changed as follows.

First, at T02, the timing SW charge (hereinafter SCSW) is on and the timing SW mirror (hereinafter MUSW) is off. The SM cam gear 58 rotates, and the charge cam moves down to the bottom dead center (T04).
Here, since SCSW is a SW that determines that the cam is surely present at the top dead center, it shifts to OFF at the timing of T03 before the charge cam goes down. The mirror cam starts to lift almost at the same time as the charge cam goes down. Miller continues to climb and reaches top dead center at T05.

That is, at this point, the mirror is retracted from the optical path of the image pickup and exposure becomes possible. Immediately after T05 when the actual raising of the mirror is completed, the MUSW is turned on (T06), and it is possible to determine the end of the mirror drive. T0
Upon receiving 6, the motor stops. Actually, in order to stop the motor at high speed and accurately, a control that combines a reverse brake and a short brake is performed at the time of stopping, but here it is considered that the motor stopped at a slight overrun after T06. . Of course, this overrun is sufficiently narrow for the top dead center range of the mirror cam. Exposure is performed when the motor is stopped.

In the timing chart, since T07 is the motor start for mirror down, the exposure is T06.
However, the description is omitted here. However, the method of controlling the off-timing of the magnets of the front curtain and the rear curtain attracted by the shutter part to form the necessary exposure time is not different from the known method. Now, when the exposure is completed, the mirror down operation is started at T07, which corresponds to the start thereof, and the SM cam gear that is the same as the power system driven at the time of the mirror up is rotated.
It is sufficient to perform W rotation.

When the cam starts to rotate, the MUSW turns off at T22. Since the MUSW reliably detects the up state of the mirror, T05 of the mirror cam top dead center is detected.
To T23 are included in the range from T06 to T22. The mirror cam starts to descend from T23 and returns to the normal 45 ° down position at T09. Here, in this embodiment, the timing of the mirror down completion is not detected in order to minimize the number of sensors. Therefore, in terms of control, a constant timer is started from T22, and the motor is stopped at T08 at the set time to perform mirror down.

Although the timing of T08 is set slightly before T09, the timer is set so that the state of T09 is surely ensured when the motor is stopped due to the overrun of the motor.

With the above description, a series of operations from release to mirror up, exposure, and mirror down are completed.

In this embodiment, next, winding is performed. Since winding has a different drive system, clutch switching is started at T10 at which clutch switching is started, and CCW rotation of the motor starts. As a result, the clutch cam 42, which has been locked at the charging position until now, rotates to the winding position. The clutch lever 47 is also lifted by the cam 42, but since the shutter mirror system was locked at the start timing of T10, the output of the clutch photo interrupter is Low. When the clutch lever 47 is lifted by the rotation of the motor, the photo interrupter output passes from the L level to the M level and becomes the H level. The fall timing after the H level range means the transition to the next locking surface.

Since the output level of the hoisting system is the M level, the clutch lever 47 following the cam down causes the photo interrupter to output the M level at T11. As a result, the motor stops, but there is a slight overrun, so the clutch cam 42 is rotated slightly to the rewinding side, and the clutch lever 47 is not in contact with the locking surface. T11
After that, at T12, the motor starts CW rotation. This C
The W rotation is a rotation in which the clutch cam 42 is first applied to the locking surface of the winding and the winding system is driven as it is.

That is, the spool starts to rotate in the winding direction from T13. In this embodiment, a photoreflector (feed PR) is used to detect the film feed amount (feed detection), and a method of directly counting the perforation of the film is used. Therefore, the perforation for one frame, that is, the output of 8 pulses is output from the feeding photo reflector. The first pulse from T12 is T14, and the rise of the photoreflector output is counted sequentially. When the eighth pulse is determined at T15, the motor immediately stops.

Incidentally, in order to actually stabilize the stopping accuracy of the film, the drive system is controlled before counting the 8th pulse, but the details are omitted here. The film side completed the preparation for the next shooting by winding one frame.

Finally, the shutter is charged to complete the series of operations. First, the motor is CC again by T16.
Perform W rotation. This time, it is a switching operation from winding to shutter / mirror system.

Similar to the above-mentioned case, the stop timing is determined by the output of the SCPI, but when the clutch is rotated from the winding, first the M is temporarily returned at the rewinding position.
The level is output. Of course, if the motor is rotated CW here, the film will be rewound. Therefore, the determination unit passes the M level and continues the CW rotation.
As a result, the clutch lever lifts for the second time, and outputs the L level from SCPI at the timing of T18. However, the clutch cam 42 does not come into contact with the locking surface because the clutch cam 42 is rotated upward by the amount of overrun.

The motor starts CW rotation from T19. This rotation causes the clutch cam 42 to
The SM cam gear 58 is rotated by contacting the mirror position. The SM cam gear 58 is rotated to the mirror down in the operation before hoisting, and the cam shifts to the charge area of the charge cam. The shutter is charged by the charge cam, and the shutter charging is completed at the timing of the top dead center T20.

Since it is the charge SW that determines the completion of charging of the shutter, the SW shifts to ON at T21, which is slightly delayed from T20. Upon receiving this determination, the motor immediately stops. Of course, the amount of overrun at this time is narrow enough for the top dead center range of the charge cam to be SCS.
It is also configured to be sufficiently narrow with respect to the ON range of W.

By the above sequence, the preparation for the next photographing is completed, and the normal photographing sequence is completed.

Now, in the timing chart of FIG. 46, S
The principle of detecting the absolute position by utilizing the fact that the direct output of the CPI changes from the Low level to the High level has been described. However, the output of the SCPI is actually judged by the CPU via a processing circuit or the like. The circuit configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 47 is an electric circuit diagram showing a structure of an electric circuit of the position detecting mechanism in the camera.

In FIG. 47, reference numeral 191 is a clutch lever,
Reference numeral 192 is a detection photo interrupter SCPI, and reference numeral 194 is L built in the photo interrupter 192.
A current source for switching the current flowing through the ED 195 to change the brightness of the LED 195, and a reference numeral 193 is a resistor for changing the photocurrent of the phototransistor 196 into a voltage.

Next, the position detecting method will be described.

As described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41, when the motor performs the switching operation, the clutch lever 47 moves. At this time, the moving portion of the clutch lever 47 moves at the concave-shaped detecting portion of the photo interrupter 192. At this time, in the moving portion of the clutch lever 47, the Xd, Xe, and Xf portions shown in FIG. 42 reciprocate.

Xd, Xe, X of the clutch lever 47
Since the portions f have different transmittances, an output signal corresponding to the transmittances can be obtained. That is, as shown in FIG. 48, when the photo interrupter 192 (SCPI) corresponds to the light shielding portion Xd of the clutch lever 47, the level of the output signal becomes V1.

Further, the semi-transparent portion Xe of the clutch lever 47
If the photo interrupter 192 (SCPI) corresponds to the above, the level of the output signal is V2, and if the SCPI corresponds to all the transmission portions Xf of the clutch lever 47, the level of the output signal is equal to V2. It becomes V3.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the movement of the clutch lever 47 is caused by the photo interrupter 192 (SCP
To explain which part of the clutch lever 47 I) corresponds to, Xd → Xf → Xe → Xf → Xe → Xd is 1
It works as a cycle. Therefore, the clutch lever 47
The waveform of the output signal when the is operated is as shown in FIG.

If the initial position is detected here, L
When the current flowing through the ED 195 is adjusted to an appropriate value, the output signal waveform as shown in FIG. 50 is obtained. At this time, by detecting the rising portion from the output level V'3 to V'1, it is detected that the clutch lever 47 is in the initial position.

Next, when detecting the states 2 and 3,
The LED current is adjusted again so that the output signal waveform as shown in FIG. 51 is obtained. V3 of this signal waveform
The position of the clutch lever can be detected by counting the fall from "" to V2 ".

The driving force transmission mechanism of this embodiment and the structure and position detecting mechanism of the camera to which the embodiment is applied have been described above in detail. Next, the sequence of the entire camera will be described with reference to the flowchart.

For the description, refer to FIG. 45 described above for the flowchart and circuit blocks of FIG.

First, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 52 to 76 will be described.

The flow charts shown in FIGS. 52 to 76 show the main flow. Hereinafter, they will be sequentially described.

Steps S1 to S38 show the power-on reset process. The power-on reset operation when the battery is turned on is sequentially executed from step S1. First, in steps S1 and S2, the CPU 1
Set the permission level of 20 interrupts. Next, in step S3, interrupts are prohibited so as not to be interrupted by noise, and in step S4, the stack pointer of the CPU 120 is set. Next, in step S5, the CPU 120
Set the machine cycle of.

Next, in steps S7 to S12, the RAM area inside the CPU 120 is cleared to "0", and in step S13, the input / output of the port and the output state are set. Next, in step S14, the iFi-ON activates the interface IC 138. Further, in step S15, the CPU 120 reads out the data with the adjuster and performs the processing according to each version.
The program version of is set in RAM.

In steps S16 to S17, L
Initialize the CD136 port, step S1
In 8, it is judged whether the regulator (not shown) is connected,
If connected, communication processing with the adjuster is performed in step S19.

In steps S20 to S23, the operation SW state is read, and in step S24,
The communication check with the EEPROM 135 is performed, and if the data is abnormal, the camera operation is locked. Then, in step S25, the data in the EEPROM 135 is transferred to the CPU.
It is read into the RAM inside 120 and expanded, and step S26
Now, measure the temperature.

In steps S27 and S28, it is determined whether or not the strobe light emitting unit 174 is raised, and if the strobe light emitting unit 174 is raised, the flag F_ST is set.
Set CHRG to “1” to request strobe charging. In addition, in steps S29 to S32, the power SW
When (PWSW) 153 is turned on, the power-on state is set. Flags F_TSYS1, F_TSY
The meaning of S0 is as shown in Table 1 shown in FIG.

When the camera is in the power off state,
When the flag F_TSYS1,0 is 00, the LCD display of the camera disappears, 0 and 1 are respectively displayed during low power consumption, and the LCD display is 1 and 0 when the camera is in a standby state in which the remote control signal can be received. During LCD display, the numbers are 1 and 1, respectively.

In steps S33 and S34, when the back cover is in the open state from the opened / closed state of the back cover, F_BK
The OPN flag is set to "1", and in step S35, the abnormal state is changed to a normal state in preparation for the case where the battery is removed during mechanical operation by the mechanical process (certified by the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 133 to 137). Return once. In step S36, the flash mode of the camera is returned to the initial state. In auto strobe (AUTO) and red-eye reduction strobe mode (AUTO-S), the strobe mode is left as it is, and in other strobe modes, all,
Set to auto strobe mode (AUTO).

At step S38, the LCD display time is set. After step S39, a main sequence is configured while the battery is inserted.

Steps S39 to S87 show the transition processing of the CPU 120.

In step S39, if the power is off, the process jumps to step S81 to perform the power off process. If the power is on, in step S40, L
It is determined whether or not the CD display is on, and if the LCD display is off, the process jumps to step S57, and if it is being displayed, the port set being displayed is set at step S41.

In step S42, data for LCD display is set, and in step S43, step S42.
The LCD 136 is displayed based on the data set in. In step S44, the back cover switch (B
If the KSW) 155 is in the open / closed state or open, step S48.
Jump to.

At step S45, interruption is prohibited once,
In step S46, the interrupt permission during the LCD display and the prohibition level are set. Further, in step S47, interruption is permitted, and in step S48, during strobe charging, the process proceeds to step S88, and steps S49 and S50.
Is in the standby mode for the remote controller, the process proceeds to step S88 during the remote control release, and the CPU 120 causes SLE in step S51.
The common-side ports (Sig143 to Sig145) are output at the "L" level so that they can be raised by the operation SW during EP.

In step S52, the interrupt is prohibited once, and in step S53, the SLE of the CPU 120 with the back cover opened.
The interrupt permission prohibition level in EP is set, and the interrupt is permitted in step S54. And step S
With the 55, when cleaning the film cartridge while opening the back cover, static electricity is generated through the DX contact piece 158 (DXSW).
SLEEP to prevent the CPU 120 from running out of control
Put in a state.

In step S56, the key reading common port (Si) set to the "L" level in step S51.
g143 to Sig145) are returned to the "H" level output.
Further, in step S58, the LCD display is turned off, and in step S59, the port of the CPU 120 is set for low power consumption during SLEEP. Next, in step S60,
Interrupt branching is prohibited, and in step S61, the permission / prohibition level of the interrupt during display off is set.

In step S62, the machine cycle is delayed to reduce the power consumption of CPU 120. And
In step S63, the CPU 120 is put in the SLEEP state, and in step S65, the machine cycle of the CPU 120 is set to the maximum speed. Next, in step S66, SLE
When the power SW 153 is rising from the EP, and in step S67, the back cover SW 155 (BKSW).
And the rewind button 160 in step S68.
(RWMSW) and the switch 121 on the key matrix
If it is ~ 133, the process jumps to step S70.

In step S69, if it is a timer for timekeeping, the process jumps to step S87, and if not, the process jumps to step S88. In step S70, the mode display switching prohibition flag is set to "1". And
In step S71, the operated flag for updating the display time is set to "1" by operating the button, and step S7 is performed.
In 2, the port is set.

At step S73, the interface i
The c138 is activated, and in step S75, display data is set. In step S76, LC
The D display is turned on, and in steps S78 to S79, when the strobe light emitting unit 174 is in the pop-up state, a charging request is made.

In step S81, the LCD display is turned off. In step S82, the port setting is turned off. In step S83, interrupt branching is prohibited.
In step S84, permission / prohibition of the interrupt level in the power-off state is set. In step S85, the CPU
120 is put in the STOP state. In step S87, C
A rising flag indicating that the PU 120 has risen from SLEEP and STOP is set to "1".

In steps S88 to S93, it is determined whether the switches SW have been operated. If they have been operated, the operated flag is set to "0" and the LCD display timer is updated. Further, in the self-timer mode of step S94, while the remote controller is on standby, the interface ic 138 is set to the mode for remote control reception in step S95, and the remote control circuit is turned on in step S96.

If the regulator is connected in step S97, communication with the regulator is performed in step S98. In step S99, the display timer counts. If the counter overflows in step S100, the process proceeds to step S101. If not, step S11.
Jump to 3.

At step S101, if the counter overflows while the LCD display is off (approximately 4 hours), CP
Step S110 to set U120 to the STOP state
And F_PWP on flag, F_TS in step S111
YS0, all F_TSYS1 flags are set to "0" in step S112.

If the counter overflows during standby for the remote controller (about 18 minutes) in step S102 or the counter overflows during standby for the remote controller (approximately 30 seconds) in step S103, the LCD display time is terminated. That is, in step S106, a timer is set for counting the timer while the LCD display is off, and in steps S107 and S108, F-TSYS1 is set to "0" to indicate that the display is off, and F_TSY is set.
Set S0 to "1".

In step S109, the flag F-MODDSL is set to "0" in order to cancel the self mode, and the process jumps to step S39.

In step S113, the change and the state of the key are detected, the power SW 153 (PWSW), the panorama S
W154 (PANSW), case back SW155 (BKS
W), pop-up SW 159 (PUPSW), and rewind SW 160 (RWMSW) are detected. Step S11
If the button is not pressed in step 4, the process jumps to step S217.

Steps S115 to S132 show the processing when the rewind button RWMSW160 is pressed.

In steps S115 and S116, if the rewind button 160 has not been pressed, step S115 is performed.
Jump to 133. Step S117, Step S
At 118, if rewinding has already been completed, the process jumps to step S133. F_CNDI0, 1 are flags indicating the state of the film, and their meanings are shown in Table 2 in FIG.

Now, Table 2 will be described.

[0250] A function of automatically feeding the film when the camera is loaded with the cartridge and the back cover is closed. When the film is not correctly wound up, the auto-load fails.
Both F_CNDT0 and 1 are “0”.

When the film is properly wound up and ready for shooting, the autoloading is completed, and F_CNDT0 is set to "1", F
_CNDT1 becomes "0". It indicates that the film is wound one frame at a time for each shutter release. The film end is detected during the winding of one frame, and when the film is in the rewinding state, the rewind is in progress. F_CNDT0 is “0”, F_
CNDTI becomes "1". Rewinding is completed when it is detected that all the film has been wound into the cartridge during rewinding. F_CNDT0 is "1", F_CNDT
1 becomes "1".

In step S120, the button operated flag is set to "1". In step S121, rewinding is not performed when the case back is opened, so the process jumps to step S133. In step S122, initial settings for mechanical drive are performed. The contents prohibit interrupt branch, set port, interrupt strobe charge, battery check, DC
/ DC is on. In step S123, the initial positioning of the clutch is performed. In step S124, the clutch is switched to the rewind position.

In steps S125 and S126, F-CNDEs 0 and 1 are set during rewind. In step S127, F-CNDT0, 1 is set to EEPRO.
Store in M135. In step S128, the motor is driven to rewind the film. In step S129, the result of rewinding is set to F-CNDT0, 1 in the subroutine of step S128 rewinding, and the result is stored in the EEPROM.

At step S130, since the lens barrel is retracted during power off, the mirror does not carelessly move up and down to collide with the lens frame. Therefore, the process jumps to step S133. In step S131, the sequence clutch is moved to the mirror position (that is, the initial position) during power-on, and in step S132, the shutter charging operation is performed to drive and stop the clutch lever to the clutch cam locking position (from FIG. 18). 19).

Steps S133 to S164 are
The processing of the back cover SW155 (BKSW) is shown.

At step S133, if the back cover SW155 has not changed, the process jumps to step S165.
If the back cover SW 155 has changed, step S1
At 34, the operated flag is set to "1". Step S
In 135, if the state of the back lid SW155 (BKSW) is "1", it indicates that the back lid has changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, the process jumps to step S154 to perform auto loading. When it is "0", it indicates that the back cover has changed from the closed to the open state, and the operation for removing the winding and rewinding drive system so that the film may be pulled out is performed as follows. To do.

In step S136, mechanical drive initialization is performed. In step S137, the film state flag is set to "0", and in step S138, the EEPROM is set.
Store in 135. Steps S139 and S14
At 0, the state of the back cover opened is stored in the EEPROM 135. In step S150, the back cover open state flag is set to "1".
To

In step S151, the sequence clutch is set to the mirror position (initial position), and the sequence clutch is taken up and unwound. In steps S152 and S153, during power-on, shutter charging is performed and driving is stopped at the clutch cam locking position. Jump to step S165. Does nothing during power off.

In step S154, mechanical drive initialization is performed.

In steps S155 and S156, the state of the back cover closed is stored in the EEPROM 135. In step S157, the back cover open state flag is set to "0". After the clutch is set to the initial position in step S158, the sequence clutch is set to the winding position in step S159. In step S160, the film is idly fed to prepare for shooting. The result of the success or failure of the blank feeding is output to F_CNDT0,1. The result is stored in the EEPROM 135 in step S161.

In step S162, the sequence clutch is moved to the mirror position in step S163 while the power is on, and shutter charging is performed in step S164 to set the clutch cam to the locked position.

Steps S165 to S172 show the pop-up processing of the flash light emission unit.

In step S165, the pop-up SW
If there is no change in 159, jump to step S173. If there is a change, the flag operated in step S166 is set to "1". In step S167, if the pop-up SW 159 (PUPSW) state is "0", it means that the light emitting portion of the strobe has been moved up, and the process jumps to step S170. If the value is "1", it means that the light emitting section of the strobe has been lowered.
At 168, the strobe charge request flag is set to "0" to prohibit charging.

In step S169, the flash mode is turned off, and the process jumps to step S173. In step S170, the strobe charge request flag is set to "1".
And allow charging. In step S171, the off mode of the flash mode is released. In step S172, the spot metering mode is canceled, and the process jumps to step S173. Steps S173 to S206 show a process of turning off the power SW 153 (PWSW).

In step S173, the power SW 153
If there is no change in (PWSW), the process jumps to step S113. In step S174, the power SW 153
When the (PWSW) status is "1", the power SW 153
Indicates that the switch has been turned on → off, the process jumps to step S207. In step S175, mechanical drive initial setting is performed, and in step S176, the EEPROM 135 is set.
Check the data of.

In step S177, the EEPROM 13
The contents of No. 5 are expanded in the RAM of the CPU 120. In step S179, the initial positioning of the clutch is performed. In step S180, the zoom retracting flag is set to "0", and it is stored in the EEPROM 135 in step S181. In step S182, the zoom is driven to the wide position. In step S183, the number of zoom drive pulses is converted into a zoom encoder value, and in step S184, an open aperture value is calculated from the zoom encoder value. In step S185, the lens collapse flag F-LNSSNK is set.
Is set to "0", and in step S186, the EEPROM1
35. In step S187, the number of lens extension pulses from the optical infinite position is obtained. Step S1
88, in step S189, the lens is driven to the ∞ position. In step S190, all the operation SWs 121 to 133 are pseudo-read once to initialize the internal RAM.
In step S192, the strobe mode is reset. Use AUTO except for AUTO and AUTO-S. In steps S193 and S194, the AE mode is initialized to the program mode. Step S19
In 5, the spot metering mode is cleared. Step S
At 196, the self mode is cleared. Step S1
At 97, the remote control release flag is cleared. In step S198, the release lock flag is cleared. In steps S200 and S201, the flash charging time counter is reset.

In step S202, the charging voltage monitor data is cleared. In step S203, the power-on flag is set, and in steps S204 and S205, the LCD display flag F-TSYS0, 1 is set. In step S206, a display time timer (about 30 seconds) is set, and the process jumps to step S113.

Steps S207 to S216 are
A process of turning on / off the power SW 153 (PWSW) is shown.

In step S207, the mechanical drive is initialized. In step S208, one lens group is extended from the optical infinity position to the near side of the predetermined pulse number so that the one lens group and the two lens groups of the lens groups do not interfere with each other when the respective mirrors are retracted. In step S209, the lens retracting flag F-LNSSNK is set to "1", and step S2 is performed.
At 10, the data is stored in the EEPROM 135.

In step S211, the zoom motor 146 retracts each mirror to the retracted position (FIG. 1).
In step S212, the zoom retracted position flag F-ZM
SNK is set to "1", and in step S213, EEPR
Store in OM135. In step S214, the power-on flag is set to "0", and in steps S215 and S216, the F-TSYS 0 and 1 are set to the power-off state, and the process jumps to step S113.

In steps S217 to S226, the battery is removed during rewinding or the power SW 153 (PW
(SW) is turned off → on or turned on → off, and rewinding resuming processing is performed when the rewinding is temporarily interrupted.

At steps S217 and S218, if F_CNDT0, 1 is not being rewound, the process jumps to step S227. In step S219, mechanical drive initialization is performed. In step S220, the initial position of the sequence clutch is set. In step S221, the sequence clutch is switched to the rewinding drive system.

At step S222, the film is rewound. In step S223, the result of rewinding is F.
-Store CNDT0, 1 in EEPROM 135. If power is on at step S224, step S224
At 225, switch the sequence clutch to the mirror position,
In step S226, shutter charging is performed and the clutch cam is driven to the locking position.

Steps S227 to S232 are processings for locking the operation of the camera by the button operation, and are processings when the film has failed in idling, when rewinding is completed, or during power-off.

If F_TSYS1 is "0" in step S227, the power is off or the LCD display is off, so it is not necessary to proceed any further, so the routine jumps to step S39. If F_CNDT1 is "1" in step S228, the process is not rewinding because rewinding is in progress or rewinding is completed. Therefore, the process jumps to step S39 to form a loop of the main routine. In step S229, F_CN
If DT0 and DT are "0" and the autoloading fails, and the back cover is closed in step S230, the DX in step S231 and step S232 is performed.
The presence / absence of a cartridge is detected from the contact piece 158 (DXSW) to confirm the presence / absence of the cartridge. If there is a patrone, the button operation is locked, and the process jumps to step S39.

If the strobe charge request flag is "1" in step S233, strobe charge is performed in step S234. In step S235, switch group 0 (121 to 126) is detected. SWs to detect are release SWs 121 and 122 (R1SW, R2SW),
Zoom up SW123 (ZUSW), zoom down S
W124 (ZDSW), Self SW125 (SELFS
W) and spot SW126 (SPOTSW).

[0277] Steps S239 to S252 are 1
This is processing when the 26 spot button (SPOTSW) is pressed.

In step S239, the switch group 0
If there is no change in any of the switches, step S253
Jump to. In step S240, the spot SW1
If 26 does not change, the process jumps to step S253. In step S241, the operated flag is set to "1".
To

In step S242, the spot mode is not accepted in the night view mode, so the process jumps to step S251. In step S243, since the spot mode is not accepted during the flash pop-up, the process jumps to step S251. If the spot mode has already been set, the spot is released, and the process jumps to step S251. In step S245, interrupt branching is prohibited. In step S246, strobe charging is suspended. Step S2
At 48, the spot mode flag is set to "1" to set the spot mode, and at step S249, F_SPLOCK is set.
The flag is set to "0", spot photometry is performed by the autofocus sensor in step S250, and the process jumps to step S252.

In step S251, the spot mode flag is set to "0". In step S252, the LED 143 indicating the spot mode in F is turned on / off in the spot mode. In step S253, the process jumps to step S264 during the remote control release, and to step S264 during the step S254 release half-press (only the RISW 121 is on).

Steps S255 to S260 show the processing when the release button 121 is not pressed.

In step S255, flags related to the autofocus calculation are initialized. Step S2
In 57, when the completion of integration of the AFIC 134 is detected, the data is read from the AFIC 134, the defocus amount is calculated, and the number of drive pulses of the lens is calculated. Step S2
At 59, F-RELEND becomes "1" after the shutter release, and the 121 release button is cleared by a flag which detects that the release button is still pressed after the shutter release. In step S260, the F-AECMPL clears this with a flag for detecting the end of photometry, and in step S2
Jump to 64. In step S264, when it is detected that the release button 121 is pressed even after the shutter release, the process jumps to step S355 to lock the release.

Steps S266 to S281 show photometric processing.

[0284] In step S266, if the measurement is once completed (F-AECMPL flag is "1"), AE is performed.
In order to lock, the process jumps to step S282 and the photometry is not performed again. In step S267, interrupt branching is prohibited. In step S268, strobe charging is suspended. In step S271, the DX code of the cartridge is read, and in step S272, the DX code is converted into an SV value.

In step S273, the photometric SPD 17
Divided photometry by 0 is performed. In step S274, the BV value is calculated from the photometric A / D value. In step S275, average photometry calculation is performed. In step S276, evaluation photometry calculation is performed. In step S277, backlight determination is performed. In step S278, the EV value is calculated from the BV value and the SV value, and the AV value, TV value,
The guide number value for strobe emission is calculated, and the strobe emission request flag is set.

In step S281, F_AECMPL is set.
Is set to "1" to indicate the end of photometry. Step S282
The first remote control release in step S283,
At the first time when the release 121 is half-pressed in step S284, the operated flag is set to "1" in step S285.

Further, step S286 and step S27.
If there is a calculation result light emission request in step 8, step S28
In step 7, the strobe charging voltage is checked, and if the strobe charging voltage is reached as a result, the strobe firing possible flag F is set.
Set FLSEN to "1". In step S288,
If light emission is possible, the process jumps to step S290, and if light emission is not possible, the strobe charge request flag is set to "1".

[0288] In steps S290 and S291,
When there is a strobe light emission request and the light emission is impossible, the strobe charge is prioritized, the autofocus operation is not performed, and the process jumps to step S296. Step S29
In step 3, the strobe charge request flag is set to "0", in step S294 strobe charge is interrupted, and in step S295, autofocus calculation and lens driving are performed. At the time of focusing, the focusing flag F_iNFOCUS flag is set to "1". When out of focus, out of focus display flag F_A
The FNGDSP flag is set to "1". When the integration of AFIC134 is not completed, nothing is done and the process returns from the subroutine.

[0289] In step S296, when strobe light is emitted,
Alternatively, the state of the flash being charged and the result of focusing / non-focusing after the autofocus operation are displayed on the LED 14 in the viewfinder.
3 is lit or blinked to display. Step S2
In step 98, the process jumps to step S300 when the remote control is released, and to step S355 when the release buttons 121 and 122 are not fully pressed in step S299.

Steps S300 to S306 are processes for determining whether or not shutter release is possible.

In step S300, F_AFCMPL is set.
When is “0”, the photometry has not been completed, and therefore the shutter release is not performed and the process jumps to step S355. In step S302, when F_iNFOCUS is "0", the focus is not yet achieved, so the process jumps to step S355. In step S303 and step S304, when there is a strobe light emission request and the strobe charging voltage has not reached the light emission enable voltage, the release timing is missed. Therefore, in step S305, the remote control release flag is set to "0" so as not to release. To do. In step S306, the F-RELEND flag is set to "1" so that the release lock is performed until the release button is once released.
Jump to 355.

At step S307, since the shutter release is proceeded to, the LED 143 in the finder is turned off.
In step S308, interrupt branching is prohibited. In step S309, a battery check is performed. In step S310, the DC / DC converter is driven, and the process jumps to step S311.

Steps S311 to S339 show the delay time processing at the time of the self-timer or the remote control release. When the self-timer is set, the shutter release is performed 12 seconds after focusing, and when the remote control is used, the shutter release is performed 2 seconds after focusing. To do. In step S311, if the self mode is not set, the process jumps to step S340. In step S312, in order to create a delay time of 2 seconds during remote control release, the process jumps to step S332. In step S313, the power SW on state data is put into the XR6 register in order to detect the power SW off.

At step S314, the rewind SW 160
Rewind SW to XR5 register to detect ON of
Enter the off state data for 160. Step S315
Then, in order to keep the self-LED 170 lit for 10 seconds, data for 10 seconds is set in the timer and the blinking flag F_2Hz is set to "0". Step S
In 316, a switching flag F-UTY of 10 seconds / 2 seconds is used.
0 is set to “0”. In step S317, FU
When TY0 is "0", self-L
To turn on the ED 170, the process jumps to step S319. When F_UTY0 is “1”, the remaining 2 seconds are indicated, and the self LED 170 blinks at a cycle of 2 Hz.

In step S318, the blinking flag F-
If 2 Hz is "1", in step S319, self LE
D170 is turned on, and if "0", step S319b
Then, the self LED 170 is turned off. Step S32
For 0, read the 0 group of switches, step S
If the self-SW 125 is turned on at 321, it is determined that the self-timer is stopped, and the process jumps to step S338.

In step S322, the power SW 153
Is read, and the result of step S323 is power S
If W153 is off, jump to step S338.
In step S324, the rewinding SW 160 is read, and if the result of step S325 is that the rewinding button 160 is on, the process jumps to step S338. Step S32
In step 6, one group of switches 127 to 132 is read, and if there is no change in any of the switches in step S327, the process jumps to step S329 to continue the process.

In step S328, the program SW1
If it is determined that 31 (PSW) is pressed, the process jumps to step S336 to suspend the process. Step S329
Then, monitor the preset timer value and set the F_TiMCNT flag to "1" if an overflow occurs.
To Further, in order to generate a blinking cycle of 2 Hz, the timer value is read and the processing of inverting the flag of F-2 Hz is performed every 250 ms.

In step S330, F_TiMCNT is used.
If is "0", the process jumps to step S317. F_T
If iMCNT is "1", the timer has overflowed, and the set time has ended. Step S3
If F_UTY0 is "0" at 31, it means that the time measurement for 10 seconds is completed, and the process jumps to step S332 to perform the time measurement for 2 seconds. If F_UTYD is “0”,
Since this means the end of time measurement for 2 seconds, the process jumps to step S334 to shift to shutter release.

[0299] In step S332, data of 2 seconds is set as the timer value. The F_2Hz flag is reset to "0". In step S333, F_UTY0 is set to "1" to indicate that the time is being measured for 2 seconds, and the process jumps to step S317.

In steps S334 and S335, the shutter release by the shutter release button in the self mode releases the self mode, but the shutter release by the remote controller in the self mode does not release the self mode. In step S336,
The self LED 171 is turned off, and in step S337, the camera is reset. It clears the self mode, releases the remote control release, initializes the AE mode, initializes the flash mode, and drives the lens to an infinite optical position.

In step S338, the operated flag is set to "1", and in step S339, the self-LED 171 is set.
Off and jump to step S345. In step S340, the self LED 171 is turned off.

In step S341, shutter release processing (explained with the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 80 to 83) is performed.

In step S342, F_RELEND
Set the flag to "1" and release lock until you release your finger from the release button. In step S343, F_
The MODSPT is set to "0" to reset the spot mode. In step S344, the operated flag is set to "1". In step S345, F_RMC2R
Set the flag to "0" and clear the remote control release flag.

[0304] In step S352, F_STCHRG
Set the flag to "1". Set the strobe charge request flag to "1". In step S353, AFic134
Reset and start integration of auto focus.
In step S354, 2 Hz is displayed in order to display the LCD 136 or blink the LED 143 in the viewfinder.
Set the timer to measure the time.

In steps S355 to S357, the first-time flag of the remote control signal is set to "0" after passing through the main loop twice so that the interrupt of the remote control signal may enter anywhere in the main loop.

Steps S358 to S376 show the processing of the zoom buttons (ZUSW) and (ZDSW).

At step S358, input of the zoom buttons 123 and 124 is not accepted while the release button 121 is half-pushed, and the process jumps to step S437. Step S3
At 59, F-ZMUP is set to "1" to set the zoom drive direction flag to the tele direction. Step S360
Then, if the zoom-up button 123 (ZUSW) is pressed, the process jumps to step S363. Step S3
At 61, F_ZMUP is set to "0" in order to set the zoom drive direction flag to the wide direction. Step S3
At 62, if the zoom down button 124 (ZDSW) is pressed, the process jumps to step S363, and if not, the process jumps to step S377.

In step S363, the operated flag is set to "1". In step S364, during remote control release (when the F_RMC2R flag is "1"), the process jumps to step S437. In step S365,
Perform mechanical drive initial settings. In step S366, zoom driving is performed while the zoom buttons 123 and 124 are being pressed. In step S367, F_AECMPL is set to "0" to reset photometry. In step S368, F_RELEND is set to "0" to prohibit release when 1R is still pressed.

[0309] In step S370, the zoom pulse is converted into a zoom encoder value. In step S371,
Open FNo. Is calculated. In steps S372 to S375, the aperture value set in advance in the aperture priority mode and the open FNo. And the open FNo.
Is greater than the set value, the FNo. Put in. In step S376, the number of lens drive pulses from the mechanical contact position to the optical infinity position is calculated, and the process jumps to step S437.

At step S377, the switches 121-
If the group 0 of 126 has not changed, step S38.
Jump to 7.

Steps S378 to S386 show the processing of the self-switch 125. Step S378
Then, if there is no change in the state of the self SW 125, the process jumps to step S437. In step S379, the operated flag is set to "1". In step S380, if already in the self mode, the process jumps to step S384. If not, in step S381,
Set F_MODDSL to "1".

[0312] In step S382, the mode of the interface ic138 is set. In step S383, the remote control circuit inside the interface ic138 is turned on, and the process jumps to step S437. In step S384, the self mode is released. Step S3
At 85, the remote control release flag is cleared. In step S386, the remote control circuit inside the interface ic138 is turned off, and the process jumps to step S437.

In step S387, the switch groups 127 to 132 are read and the fall of the switches is detected. The switch to read is Picto Switch 12
7 to 130, a program SW131 (PSW) and a strobe mode SW132 (STSW).

At step S388, if there is no change in the states of the switch groups 127 to 132, step S4.
Jump to 21. In step S389, the operated flag is set to "1". In step S390, the process jumps to step S403 during remote control release. If there is no fall of the pictograph SW127 in step S391, the process jumps to step S394. Pict S
If W127 is falling, PC is set in step S392.
V175 is sounded at 2 KHz for 33 msec (see FIG. 166).

[0315] In step S393, the AE mode is set to the pictogram 1 mode, and the process jumps to step S437. Steps S394 to S402 are settings of the pictogram 2, pictogram 3, and pictogram 4 AE modes.

In step S403, the program SW13
When 1 is pressed, a sound is generated by the PCV 175 in step S404, and then the mode is reset in step S405.
AE mode is program mode, strobe is AUTO or AUTO-s mode, self release, remote control release release, spot mode release, lens is in optical infinite position. Then, the process jumps to step S437. If the program SW131 is not pressed, step S406
Jump to.

In step S406, the process jumps to step S437 during remote control release. If the remote control release is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S407. Step S407
Then, if the strobe light emitting unit is not popped up, the process jumps to step S437. In step S408, if the flash mode switch 132 is not pressed, the process jumps to step S437.

In step S409, if the LCD display is restarted by the strobe mode switch 132 while the LCD display is off, the strobe mode is not updated, and the process jumps to step S437. In steps S410 to S412, if the strobe mode is AUTO, the strobe mode is set to AUTO-S. Step S41
In 3 to step S415, the flash mode is AUTO-.
When S, the strobe mode is set to FiLL-iN. In steps S416 to S418, if the strobe mode is FiLL-iN, the strobe mode is set to AUTO. In step S419, the strobe mode is set to EEPR.
Store in OM135.

In step S420, the spot metering mode is set to "0", and the process jumps to step S437. In step S421, the fall of the switch group 133 is detected. The group 133 is an aperture priority mode switch (AVSW). In step S422, if there is no fall of the group 133, the process jumps to step S437.

In step S423, the operated flag is set to "1". In step S424, during remote control release, the process jumps to step S437. Step S4
If there is no trailing edge of the aperture priority mode switch 133 (AVSW) at 25, the process jumps to step S437. If the aperture priority mode is not set in step S426, the process jumps to step S431. In step S427, when the LCD display is restarted with the aperture priority mode button (AVSW), only the display is performed and the aperture value is not updated. Therefore, the process jumps to step S437.

At step S428, the PCV 175 is set to 2
Sound is generated for 33 msec at kHz (see FIG. 166).

[0322] In step S429, the aperture value is increased by 1 EV to obtain the minimum aperture value, for example, FNo. When the number of frames exceeds the limit, set the maximum aperture value. In step S430, EEPRO
It jumps to step S437 which stores in M135.
In step S431, the AE mode is set to the aperture priority mode. In step S432, PCV175 is sounded.

At steps S433 to S435,
The aperture value that was set is the open FNo. If it is smaller than the set aperture value, the F-number is open to the set aperture value. Put in. Step S4
At 36, it is stored in the EEPROM 135.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 will be described.

The flow charts of FIGS. 77 to 79 are subroutines that constitute a series of shutter release sequences of mirror-up, aperture release, shutter-release mirror-down, aperture-open film winding, and shutter charge.

First, in step S500, if there is no flash light emission request as a result of the photometry calculation (F_FLSRQ flag is "0"), the process jumps to step S508. Also,
In step S501 and step S502, when the strobe mode is not AUTO-S (red-eye reduction mode) or in stop motion mode (AE mode for fast-moving subject) in picto mode, the red-eye reduction emission is not performed in step S504. To jump.

In step S503, the red-eye reduction pre-emission is performed. In step S504, the power SW 153 may be turned off during the red-eye pre-emission.
When W153 is turned off, the process jumps to step S550.

In step S505, the emission GNo. To calculate. In step S506, it is checked whether the charging voltage is a charging voltage capable of emitting light. In step S507, the charging voltage and the light emission GNo. Calculate the flash firing time from and. In step S508, the sequence clutch is switched to the mirror position. Step S5
In 09, the imprinting time of the date module 137 is calculated from the ISO value of the film. In step S510, the number of drive pulses of the stepping motor 151 from the initial position of the diaphragm is calculated from the diaphragm value and the zoom encoder value. In step S511, the excitation of the magnet that attracts and holds the front and rear curtains of the shutter is turned on.

Next, steps S512 to S52.
Before explaining 0, according to Table 3 shown in FIG.
The relationship between the Y3 and 4 flags and the MiUP and MiRDN subroutines will be described.

Each subroutine is F_UTY3,
The processing contents can be switched by the flag of 4. When F_UTY3 is set to "1" and the subroutine is CALL, mirror up or mirror down processing is performed. F_U
When the flag of TY4 is set to "1" and the subroutine is called, the operation of narrowing down or opening up is performed. In the above, if both the flags of F_UTY3 and F_UTY4 are set to "1" and a subroutine call is made, two processes can be performed simultaneously with the aperture being opened while the aperture is being narrowed down or the mirror being being down while the mirror is being raised.

At steps S512 and 513, the F-UT
Set both Y3 and 4 to "1". Next, step S514.
If the sequential drive flag is "1", step S51 is performed in order to perform mirror up and narrowing down separately.
In step 5, F_UTY3 is set to "0".

Here, in consideration of minimizing the image disappearance time, the aperture is narrowed down first, and then the mirror is raised. Further, the sequential drive flag is set to the above-mentioned step S309.
It is set by the battery check of. That is, when the power supply cannot supply the energy necessary for driving the mirror and the diaphragm at the same time, it is judged by the battery check based on the power supply voltage data written in the EEPROM 135 by the adjuster in advance, and the diaphragm and the mirror are driven separately. This is a flag for instructing switching.

In step S516, F_UTY3,4
Mirror up or narrow down according to the contents of. In step S517, if the sequential drive flag is "1", the MiRUP in step S516 has already been used for narrowing down. Therefore, in steps S518 and S519, F_UTY3, 4 is set so that only the mirror up is performed.
Is set according to Table 3.

In step S520, MiRUP is called. Next, in step S521, shutter release processing is performed. Next, in step S278, the shutter time obtained by the photometric calculation is reproduced by a timer, the timing at which the front curtain and the rear curtain start to travel is calculated, and the shutter is released.

In steps S522 to S530, the mirror is down and the aperture is opened. When driving sequentially, the mirror is lowered first, and then the aperture is opened.

In steps S531 to S535, the total release count is stored in the EEPROM 135.
That is, by reading the data stored in advance,
Is stored in the EEPROM 135.

In steps S536 to S538, it is determined whether or not to wind one frame of film. That is, since F-CNDT0 and F-CNDT1 are assigned to the 0th and 1st bits of the 8-bit RAM called D-CNDT, the determination is made according to Table 2 shown in FIG. 219. Only when the autoloading is completed, the film is wound up by one frame.

In step S539, the sequence clutch is switched to the winding drive system. Next, step S540.
Then, a flag F-OWiND indicating that winding is being performed
Is set to "1", and in step S541, 35EEPRO is set.
Store in M.

In step S542, one frame of film is wound up. In this one-frame winding subroutine, when one film is wound, one is added to the number of film frames. F_C if the film is not wound within one frame
NDT0 is set to "0" and F-CNDT1 is set to "1" so that rewinding is performed.

In step S543, the sequence clutch is returned to the initial position. Next, in step S544, F
_OWiND is set to "0" to end the winding. Then, in step S545, F_OWInD, film count, F-CNDT0, and F-CNDT1 are EEPR.
Store in OM135.

Next, in step S546, shutter charging is performed. Then, in steps S547 to S549, after 100 msec, the excitation of the mirror motor and the stepping motor of the diaphragm is turned off, and then step S55.
Return 0.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 80 to 83 will be described. Note that this flowchart shows the shutter release processing.

First, in step S551, interrupt branch prohibition is performed. Then, steps S552 to S558.
Then, from the shutter speed, high speed seconds, medium speed seconds, and low speed seconds are determined, and if high speed seconds, F-UTYA is set to "1". If the speed is constant, the F-UTY9 is set to "1" and the data of the power SW 153 being turned on is stored in the XR6 register.

In step S559, the TV value is converted into a timer value convenient for reproducing the shutter speed. Then, in steps S560 to S562, the timers 1, 2 and 3, 4 are initialized.

Next, step S563 and step S56.
In 4, the shutter time is added to the above timers 1 and 2,
In steps S565 to S567, the timer values obtained by adding the trailing curtain running time to the shutter seconds are set in the timers 3 and 4. The timers 1 and 2 are timers for measuring the start of the trailing curtain running, and the timers 3 and 4 are timers for measuring the start of the mirror down.

Next, steps S575 to S57.
7, the adjustment value for correcting the shutter speed is EEPRO
It is read from M135 and stored in the R3 register and the R4 register.

In steps S578 and S579, the timers 1 and 2 and the timers 3 and 4 are started. If the R3 register is "0" in steps S580 to S583, the process jumps to step S584. If not, the R3 register is decremented and the shutter speed is shortened by repeating the process until it becomes 0.

In step S584, the front curtain running is started. That is, the magnet holding the front curtain 176 by suction is turned off and the front curtain 176 is caused to run. Also, trailing curtain 1
The magnet attracting and holding 77 remains on. Next, in step S588, the timers 1 and 2 are
Is overflowed, it means that the trailing curtain has started, and therefore the process jumps to step S609.

In step S592, the XSW 174 is not looked at during high-speed seconds, and the flow jumps to step S588 in order to perform accurate seconds reproduction. In addition, step S59
6 is interface ic at medium speed and low speed.
A signal for turning on the magnet for attracting and holding the rear curtain is output in consideration of the fact that the register inside 138 falls due to noise.

Next, in step S597, if there is a light emission request, the light emission is not completed in step S598, and if the XSW 174 is turned on in step S599, in order to remove the chattering of the switch, in step S600. , NOP. After this, again
If the XSW 174 is turned on in step S601, strobe light emission is performed in step S602.

In step S603, the light emission completion flag is set to "1". Further, in step S604, F_UTY
When 9 is “0”, since it is a medium speed second time, step S588.
Jump to.

Then, in step S605, a 1 ms software timer is executed, and in step S606, S
The imprint signal of ig110 is output. Next, in step S607, the state of the power SW 153 is input, and when it is detected that the power SW 153 is off in step S608, the process jumps to step S609. If the power SW 153 (PWSW) is on, the process jumps to step S588.

In steps S609 to S612,
By a process similar to that of steps S580 to S583 described above, correction is performed to extend the shutter open time by delaying the timing of starting the trailing curtain.

In step S613, the magnet holding the rear curtain 177 by suction is turned off to start the rear curtain traveling. Then, in step S614, when the speed is high speed, the process jumps to step S622. Also,
In steps S615 to S621, medium speed,
Since it is possible that the XSW 174 is turned on while the rear curtain is running at the low speed second, the strobe light is emitted as in steps S597 to S603.

In step S622, the timer 3,
The completion of the trailing curtain running is predicted by step 4, and the process jumps to step S614 until the timers 3 and 4 overflow. In steps S626 to S628, the timers 1 and 2 and the timers 3 and 4 are stopped, and the process returns in step S629.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 84 to 93 will be described. This flowchart is a flowchart showing the autofocus operation.

First, steps S630 to S63.
In No. 2, when the AE mode is landscape or night view mode, the lens is set to infinity and then the autofocus operation is performed.
If the mode is set to infinity once or the mode other than landscape and night view mode is selected, the process jumps to step S637.

After the lens is driven to the infinite position in step S633, the operated flag is set to "1" in step S634, the once-infinite flag is set to "1" in step S635, and further, in step S636, Set the lens infinity flag to "1". Then, the process jumps to step S740.

In step S637, once autofocus is completed, the process immediately returns to lock the autofocus. Then, the process jumps to step S744. In step S638, when the contrast is low, the fill light flag is set to "1" based on the result of the autofocus calculation. Moreover, step S
If the strobe mode is not off at 639, the auxiliary light is emitted. Otherwise, jump to step S659.

In steps S644 to S645, when the auxiliary light emission count reaches a predetermined number, in steps S646 to S651 the strobe capacitor is once charged. Then, during flash charging, release the shutter button halfway to stop charging and return. Then, the process jumps to step S744.

In step S652, the light emission count of auxiliary light is incremented by 1, and in step S653, the charging voltage is checked. Also, step S654, step S
At 655, if the charging voltage has not reached the light emission enable voltage, charging for auxiliary light is performed. Then, in step S65
6. In step S657, if the F_SEK flag is set to "0" and the AFALG subroutine is called, integration of the autofocus sensor is started.

In step S658, auxiliary light is emitted by strobe light. Then, in step S659,
If the lens scan request flag is "0", step S
Jump to 675. Next, in step S660, a lens scan operation is performed in which the lens is once moved to the closest position and further moved to infinity. In step S661, the lens scan request flag is set to "0" so that the lens scan is not repeated. Further, in step S662, the lens scan completion flag is set to "1".

[0363] In step S663, if the remote control release is selected and the result of the autofocus calculation is out of focus, the process proceeds to step S665. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S663.
Jump to 740.

In step S665, the lens is set to the infinite position, and in steps S666 to S670, EE is set.
The lens is extended to the data position according to the adjustment value of the PROM 135. Then, in step S671, the operated flag is set to "1". Next, in steps S672 to S674, the focus flag is forcibly set to "1" and the autofocus completion flag is set to "1", and the process jumps to step S744.

In step S675, the data from the AFIC 134 is read, the defocus amount is calculated, and the in-focus or out-of-focus is determined. When it is dark, the auxiliary light request is made. Further, the number of driving pulses and the driving direction of the lens are calculated. Next, in step S676,
Since the F-SEK flag remains "1" during the integration, the process jumps to step S744.

In step S681, if the fill light flag is 1, the process jumps to step S689. If in step S682 the fill light request flag is "0" as a result of the autofocus calculation, the process jumps to step S689.

In step S683, the auxiliary light flag is set to "1" to emit the auxiliary light when the next subroutine is called. Next, in step S684,
The lens scan flag is set to "0".

In steps S685 to S687, if the AE mode is the night view mode and the lens has already been scanned, the auxiliary light flag is set to "0". Then, in step S688, if out of focus, step S7
44, otherwise jump to step S713.

In step S689, when the auxiliary light is not necessary and the subject is out of focus, the process jumps to step S691. If the auxiliary light is not being emitted in step S690, the process jumps to step S713.
If the strobe mode is the off mode in step S690b due to non-focus during the emission of the auxiliary light, the process jumps to step S691. If it is not in the strobe off mode, the process jumps to step S744.

If the AE mode is the night view mode in step S691, the process jumps to step S694. If the AE mode is the landscape mode in step S692, the process jumps to step S693, and if not, the process jumps to step S707.

[0371] In step S693, if autofocus cannot be performed even if the focus is infinite, step S696-
In step S698, focusing is forcibly performed. Also,
If it is not set to infinity, the out-of-focus display is performed in steps S699 to S701, the F_SiNE flag is set to "0", the autofocus operation is continued, and the process jumps to step S702.

In step S702, F_LSC
The AN flag is set to "0" and lens scanning is not performed.
Further, in step S703, the F_SLMP ON flag is set to "0", and auxiliary light emission is not performed.

In step S704, the lens scan end is set to "1" so that the lens scan is not performed. Next, in steps S705 and S706, in the case of focusing, the PCV 175 is operated at a frequency of 2 kHz for 33 ms.
ec oscillate, stop for 33msec, then 33mse
It vibrates for c (see FIG. 164) and sounds. Then, the process jumps to step S744.

Next, in step S707, the auxiliary light flag is set to "0", and in step S708, the lens scan request flag is set to "1". Then, step S7
If the lens scan has been completed in steps 09 to S712, the out-of-focus display flag is set to "1". Also,
The lens scan request flag is set to "0", the auxiliary light flag is set to "0", and the process jumps to step S744.

In step S713, the out-of-focus display flag is turned off. In step S714, when in focus, the PCV 175 is sounded in step S719, and then step S7.
At 20, the F-SiNE flag is set to "1" and the process jumps to step S744. When the object is out of focus, the F_SEK flag is set to "0" in step S715 to prepare to start integration at the next subroutine call.

In step S716, the lens infinity flag is set to "0", and in step S717, the lens is driven based on the number of lens driving pulses and the driving direction calculated as a result of the autofocus calculation. Next, step S72.
In 1, the flag indicates whether or not the lens is actually driven. When the flag is "0", the lens is driven.
Jump to 726.

In steps S722 to S725, since the application state at the mechanical stopper position is shown, the lens scan and the non-focus display flag which sets the lens scan end flag to "1" to prohibit the auxiliary light are set to "1". 1 "and set the lens scan flag request flag to" 0 "
Then, the auxiliary light flag is set to "0". Next, in steps S731 to S739, when the closest end flag is "1" by the remote control release, the lens is forcibly focused, the lens is extended to the closest position, and the process jumps to step S744.

[0378] In step S726, the operated flag is set to "1", and if the focus is set in step S727, in step S728, the F-SiNE flag is set to "1" to end the autofocus. Further, in step S729, the F_AFNGDSP flag is set to "0".
To Then, in step S730, PCV175
Is sounded about twice, similar to step S706, and the process jumps to step S744.

In steps S740 to 743, processing for resetting the autofocus sensor and starting integration is performed, and the focus flag is set to "0". By calling AFALG as a subroutine, integration reset of the autofocus sensor is started, and the process returns at step S744.

In step S745, the flags related to the autofocus operation are cleared. That is, a lens scan request flag, a lens scan end flag,
Infinite drive end flag, once autofocus complete flag, out-of-focus display flag, lens infinite position flag, PCV
Clear the pronunciation end flag.

In step S746, the auxiliary light flag is set to "0", and in step S748, the focusing flag is set to "0". The auxiliary light count is set to "0" in step S750, and the process returns in step S751.

Next, interrupt permission prohibition and interrupt branch processing will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

First, the flow chart of FIG. 94 will be described. This FIG. 94 shows a prohibition process for all interrupts.

In steps S752 to S754, the register D_iLR1 for setting the interrupt permission level is set.
The lowest interrupt level is set in 3 to 3, and the branching process is prohibited even if an interrupt occurs, and the process returns in step S744.

Next, the flowcharts of FIGS. 95 to 100 will be described. These flowcharts show the process of switching the interrupt function depending on the state of the camera.

First, INTRUN is a state in which the back cover is closed while the LCD of the camera is being displayed, and INTBKSLP is a state in which the back cover is open while the LCD of the camera is being displayed, INTS.
LP indicates a state in which the power SW 153 is on, the display time has elapsed and the display is turned off, and INTSETP indicates a state in which permission / prohibition of interruption is set when the power SW 153 is off.

Tables 4, 4, 5 and 6 respectively shown in FIGS. 221, 222, and 223 show specific setting contents in each of the above states. Note that Tables 5 and 6 above are bit maps showing the interrupt factors in Table 4. “Key-on wake-up” in Table 4 above means CPU1 by key input.
20 indicates a transition from the SLEEP or STOP state to the RUN state, and does not branch to a predetermined branch destination by an interrupt. "Wake-up" is interrupted at a predetermined cycle due to overflow of the timebase timer, and CPU is RU same as key-on wake-up.
"Permit" for N state is SLEEP, S
The state changes from TOP to RUN and further branches to an interrupt branch destination designated in advance. "X" disables interrupts.

First, in step S756, all interrupts are prohibited. Next, in steps S757 to S765, the integration completion interrupt level is set, and the interrupt level of the remote control signal is set and enabled in the enable / self mode and the remote controller standby state, and in step S806.
Jump to.

In steps S766 to S772, a key-on wakeup interrupt level is set, an autofocus integration interrupt level is set, and an interrupt level of the remote control signal in the remote control standby mode in the self mode is set.

In steps S773 to S778, the states of the case back SW 155, the power SW 153, and the flash pop-up SW 159 are detected, and the edge detection direction of the interrupt is switched to either rising or falling.

In step S779, a key-on wakeup interrupt permission flag is set. Step S780
In step S782, the interrupt permission flag of the remote control signal in the remote control standby mode in the self mode is set. In step S783, the time base timer interrupt is permitted, and the process jumps to step S806.

In steps S784 to S787, the key-on wakeup interrupt level and interrupt enable flag are set. In steps S788 to S791, the states of the back cover SW 155 and the flash pop-up SW 159 are detected to determine the edge of the interrupt. Switch the detection direction.

In steps S792 to S794, the interrupt enable flag of the key-on wakeup SW is set, and in step S795, the interrupt enable flag of the time-base timer is set. Also, step S7
In steps 96 to S798, the key-on wakeup interrupt level is set, and in step S799, the interrupt permission flag is set.

In steps S800 to S803, the states of the back cover switch 155 and the power switch 153 are detected and the interrupt edge detection direction is switched. In step S804, the interruption permission flag of the rewind switch 160 is set, and in step S805, interruption of the time base timer is prohibited.

In steps S806 and S807, the interrupt flag is cleared, in step S809 the serial communication interrupt flag is cleared, in step S810, the AD completion interrupt flag is cleared, and the process returns in step S811. .

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 101 will be described. This flowchart shows the remote control signal processing at the destination where the interrupt branch is performed by the remote control signal.

First, in step S812, multiple interrupts are prohibited. Then, in step S813, it is confirmed whether or not it is an interrupt by a remote control signal. Here, if they are different, the process jumps to step S826.

In step S814, it is determined whether the port to which the remote control signal is input is at "L" level.
If it is not at the "L" level, the process jumps to step S815. Then, in step S815, if the remote control signal has already been received and the remote control release state is set, the process jumps to step S826. Next, in step S816, if it is not in the self mode, the process jumps to step S826.

Step S817 is a subroutine for judging whether or not it is a remote control signal. If it is determined that the signal is a remote control signal, the F_RMCOK flag is set to "1". next,
If the F_RMCOK flag is "0" in step S818, the process jumps to step S826.

In step S819, the F_RMCOK flag is set to "0", and in step S820, the remote control release signal is set to "1". Further, in step S821, the remote control 2R1st processing flag is set to "1", and in step S822, the counter flag for executing the main routine one or more times is set to "0". In step S823, the photometry end flag is set to "0". Then, in step S824, the integration start signal of the autofocus sensor is output, and in step S825, the operated flag is set to "1". Also, step S825b
Then, PCV is pronounced.

At step S826, interruption of the remote control signal is prohibited. In step S827, the interrupt permission level of the remote control signal is lowered to prohibit interrupt branching. The interrupt flag is cleared in step S829, and the process returns in step S830.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 102 will be described. This flow chart shows the integration time detection processing at the point where the interrupt branch is made by the integration completion signal of the AFCI134.

First, in step S831, interrupts are prohibited. Next, in step S832, it is confirmed that the interrupt is the integration completion signal of the autofocus sensor. If not, the process jumps to step S843.

In steps S833 to S835, the contents of the register are saved in the stack area. In step S836, the timer measuring the integration time is temporarily stopped. In step S837, the timer value is stored in the accumulator. In step S838, the timer is restarted. In step S839, the data saved in the accumulator is stored in the predetermined RAM area.

At steps S840 to S842, the contents of the registers saved in the stack area are restored. The interrupt flag is cleared in step S843, and the process returns in step S844.

Next, FIGS. 167 and 168 will be described. FIG. 167 shows that when the LED current of the SCPi 147 is about 10 mA, and FIG.
When each of the 47 LED currents flows about 1 mA, C
FIG. 6 is a diagram in which the vertical axis represents the result of A / D conversion by PU and the horizontal axis represents the rotational position of the sequence clutch cam. In the case of driving the sequence clutch to the initial position, that is, the position of the mirror drive system, in L of SCPi 147 as shown in FIG.
An ED current of about 10 mA is applied to make a determination based on a threshold level 1 when the mirror position is detected, a fall is detected, and the motor is braked and stopped.

Threshold level 1 in this case is data to be adjusted. When driving the sequence clutch to the winding position or the rewinding position, as shown in FIG. 168,
The LED current of SCPi147 is made to flow about 1 mA, it is judged by the threshold level 2 at the time of detecting the winding position, the falling is detected, and the winding is performed by the number of falling from the initial position.
Drive to the rewind position. Threshold level 2 in this case
Is data that is adjusted similarly to the initial position.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the adjustment of the threshold level.

First, in step S850, appropriate data is set in advance for threshold 1 and threshold 2. Next, in step S851, mirror position driving is performed. If the trailing edge position cannot be detected by the threshold 1 in step S852, the damage flag is "1". Therefore, in step S583, the threshold 1 is moved up and down again and the operation of step S851 is repeated.

If the mirror position can be driven correctly in step S854, the AD value of the light-shielding portion of the lever is set to AD1.
To store as. Next, in step S855, the winding position drive is performed. Next, in step S856, the LED current of the SCPi 147 is switched to the current value for driving the mirror position.

If the AD value is close to AD1 in step S857, it indicates that the determination threshold value is low. Therefore, in step S858, threshold 2 is reset and the process jumps to step S855.

[0412] If the winding position can be detected in step S859, the AD value of the LED current of the SCPi 147 of 10 mA is stored as AD2. In step S860, the threshold 1 is calculated based on the following calculation formula (1).

Threshold 1 = (AD1 + AD2) / 2 (1) Next, in step S861, the maximum AD value is obtained when the winding position is driven. Further, the AD value at the time of detecting the winding position is stored as AD3. Then, the threshold 2 is calculated based on the following calculation formula (2).

Threshold 2 = (ADMAX + AD3) / 2 (2) Next, in step S862, thresholds 1 and 2 are written in the EEPROM. Then, in step S863,
The adjustment is completed.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 104 to 115 will be described.

First, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 104 to 108 will be described. These flowcharts show the initial drive of the sequence clutch, the drive of the sequence clutch to the mirror drive system position, the drive to the winding drive system position, and the drive to the rewind drive system position.

First, steps S871 to S88.
Reference numeral 7 is an initial setting for causing the flag to identify the sequence clutch switching operation. The settings are shown in Table 7 shown in FIG. 224. That is, F_UTY0 and 1 identify each drive of the initial drive system, the mirror drive system position, the winding drive system position, and the rewind drive system position. Further, the processing branches at the time of adjustment are made to correspond to the above four types of drive by F_UTY2.

In step S888, the motor drive,
Initialization necessary for detecting the Pi signal is performed. Step S
889, in step S890, when the sequence clutch initial drive is performed, the process branches to step S906. If the current position data is the mirror position (data is “1”) in steps S891 to S893, the process branches to step S901.

In steps S894 to S895, the identification data is saved in the stack area, and in step S896 the sequence clutch initial drive is performed. In steps S897 and S898,
The identification data is returned from the stack area.

If the damage flag is "1" in step S899, the process branches to step S934 and the ending process is performed. In step S900, initialization is performed again. In steps S901 and S902, when the mirror position is driven, the process branches to step S934, and the process proceeds to the end process.

In steps S903 to S905, the number of drive pulses from the mirror position when driving the winding position and the rewinding position is set. The pulse number is set to "1" when the winding position is driven, and the pulse number is set to "2" when the rewinding position is driven. In steps S906 to S907, a timer that measures the period for A / D converting the Pi signal is set to 1 ms.

In step S908, the sequence clutch switching motor 144 (SCM) is normally rotated to rotate the sequence clutch cam in the switching direction. Step S
At 909, the time measurement of the 1 ms timer is started. In step S910, the process continues waiting until the time measurement of 1 ms ends. 1 when the F-T2iF flag becomes "1"
ms time measurement ends.

In step S911, the FT2iF flag is cleared, and in step S912, SCPi
The output signal of 147 is A / D converted to detect the falling edge of the signal. In step S913, F_GPSDN
If the flag is "1", it indicates that the signal of SCPi 147 has fallen. If there is no fall, jump to step S917.

In step S914, F_GPSD
The N flag is set to "0". In step S915,
Decrease the number of drive pulses by "1". In step S916, when the number of drive pulses becomes “0”, the process jumps to step S926 to end the drive. If it is not "0", the process jumps to step S917.

In steps S917 to S920, drive time limiter processing is performed. If the processing is not completed within one second after the motor is driven, the output signal of the SCPi 147 may be abnormal or the mechanism may be abnormal. Therefore, damage processing is performed and release lock is performed. If not, the process branches to step S908.

[0426] Steps S921 to S925 are processing for branching to damage.

First, in step S921, the timer is stopped. In step S922, sequence motor 144 that performs sequence clutch switching is turned off.
In step S923, the damage flag indicating the trouble of the sequence clutch mechanism is set to "1".

In step S924, during the adjustment, the process branches to step S934 to branch to the damage process and not release lock. In step S926, termination processing is performed when a predetermined number of falling edges are counted,
The sequence motor 144 is braked. The braking method includes short brake in which both ends of the sequence motor 144 are electrically short-circuited to perform braking, and reverse braking in which a voltage is applied for a predetermined time in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the motor that has been conventionally rotated to perform braking. Use together.

[0429] In step S927, the winding position,
When the rewinding position is driven, the process branches to step S932.
When the mirror position is driven in step S928, the process branches to step S934.

In steps S929 to S931,
It shows a process at the time of initial drive.

First, the flag F_GPSiNi flag indicating that the initial process has been executed once is set to "1". In step S930, in order to set the position data of the sequence clutch in the process described later, F_U
The TY0 flag is set to "1" and used as mirror position data.

At steps S932 and S933, ADMAX is calculated at the time of adjustment. Step S934
In step S936, the sequence clutch position data is "1", the winding position data is "2", and the rewinding position data is "3". Step S937, Step S
At 938, the timer is stopped and step S939
Return with.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 109 and 110 will be described. This flowchart shows initial settings for driving the sequence clutch mechanism. First, in step S940, an interrupt prohibition level is set, and in step S941, a port is set. In step S942, the interface ic1
38 is initialized, and in step S943,
Since the other motor may be turned on, the motor drive circuit is turned off.

In steps S944 and S945, data is read from the EEPROM 135. In steps S946 to S955, EEPRO
The data of M135 is expanded in the RAM inside the CPU 120. The threshold judgment level at the time of winding and rewinding position drive in the XR1 register. Initial to the XR0 register,
A threshold drive level for driving the mirror position and a motor drive voltage for switching the clutch are set in the XR2 register.

In steps S956 and S957, the count value is set in the PR0 register for 1 second.
In steps S958 to S964, the adjustment RAM area is cleared to "0". Step S965,
In step S966, the motor drive voltage of the XR2 register is set in the interface ic138.

[0436] In step S967, the damage flag for the sequence clutch drive is cleared. Step S
At 968, the previous data for the SCPi147 signal falling edge determination is cleared to "0". In steps S963 to S976, the determination threshold value for each drive position is set in the R3 register. PiLED for each drive position
The current value is set in the interface ic138.

[0437] In step S977, SCPi14
7 is emitted. In step S978, the SCP
Wait for the light emission stabilization time of the i147LED. Step S979
In step S98, the A / D conversion port is set.
Return with 0.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 111 to 113 will be described. This flow chart is
The SCPi 147 when the sequence clutch switching drive is performed.
A subroutine for A / D converting the signal and detecting the falling edge of the signal is shown.

First, in step S981, A / D conversion is performed at a preset port. The A / D conversion result is set in the accumulator. Step S982
At, the A / D conversion result is stored in the R5 register.
In step S983, after a delay of 100 μsec,
In step S984 again, A / D conversion is performed.

In steps S985 to S990, the absolute value of the difference between the two A / D conversion results is calculated. In steps S991 and S992, it is determined whether the absolute value is less than or equal to a predetermined value. Considering the voltage value, a difference of 0.06 V or less is detected within 100 μsec. If this difference is greater than 0.06V, it means that the SCPi147 signal is being switched,
Ignore this sampling result.

In steps S993 to S997, it is determined whether the A / D value is greater than or less than the threshold level preset in the R3 register, and if the A / D value is greater than the threshold level, the "H" level is set. Judge F_
The GPi flag is set to "1" and the process branches to step S1001. When the A / D value is less than the threshold level, it is determined to be "L" level, the F_GPi flag is set to "0", and the process branches to step S998.

In steps S998 to S1000, if the previous SCPi 147 output is "L", the process proceeds to step S1002, and if "H", the current output is "L".
Therefore, the fall has been detected. The fall flag F_GPiDN is set to "1". The F-GPiOLD flag, which means the previous output level, is set to "0", and the process branches to step S1002.

In step S1001, since the A / D converted value is at "H" level, no fall detection is performed. The F-GPiOLD flag indicating the previous A / D value is set to "1". In step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003 while the adjustment is in progress, and the step S1003 when the adjustment is not in progress.
It branches to 1025 and returns.

In step S1003, if the initial mirror position is being driven during adjustment, step S102.
Branch to 5 and return.

[0445] Steps S1004 to S1024
Is a process performed during the winding and the rewinding position drive during the adjustment. That is, A / D value sort processing is performed,
This is a process of rearranging eight sampled A / D values in descending order.

First, in step S1004, EP
The area start address is set in the register, and step S10
In 03 to step S1007, the data in the area is compared with the A / D value, and when the data is larger than the data in the area, steps S1008 to S1016 and the subsequent data are sequentially shifted.

Steps S1017 to S1018
Then, the A / D value is stored in an empty place as a result of the shift, and the process branches to step S1025. In steps S1020 to S1024, it is determined whether the search has been performed up to the end of the area.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 114 will be described. This flowchart shows the brake processing of the sequence clutch drive motor.

First, in step S1026, the short brake is applied to the sequence motor 144. Next, in steps S1027 and S128,
After 200 μsec, steps S1029 to S1
At 033, reverse brake is applied for 10 msec.

Steps S1034 to S1038
In, the short brake is applied for 50 msec, then, in step S1039, the sequence motor 144 is turned off, and in step S1040, the process returns.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 115 will be described. This flow chart is sorted A /
This is a process of averaging D values.

First, steps S1041 to S1.
At 044, initial setting is performed. Step S1045
In step S1052, the total sum of the data in the area is calculated. In steps S1053 to S1055, the sum is divided by 8 to obtain an average value, the ADMAX value is stored in a predetermined RAM area, and in step S1056,
To return.

Next, FIGS. 169, 170 and 116.
The zoom drive will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

FIG. 169 shows a lens frame cam rotation angle driven by the zoom motor 146, ZMPR output signals and ZMPi output signals output in accordance with the rotation of the lens frame, and further retracted position, wide position, tele position and the like. It is a figure showing the relationship of.

As for the ZMPR signal, a black and silver sticker attached to the outer periphery of the lens frame is caused to output a reflection signal by a PR (photo reflector) 172, and the output is A / D of the CPU 120.
This signal is read by the port. In the figure, the "L" level signal of the ZMPR signal is a black seal portion where there is no reflection. In, the "H" level portion is the portion reflected by the silver seal portion. When it is extended from the lens frame, it is slightly before the optical WIDE and goes from "L" level to "H".
"WIDE-1", a point where the level changes, is provided. When it is further extended, it passes the optical WIDE position, and when it is further extended, "TELE-1" is provided at a point just before the optical TELE, at which the "H" level is switched to the "L" level. When it is further extended, there is a TELE position, and when it is further extended, there is a stopper position that contacts the mechanical stopper.

ZMPi is the rise of the output signal of Pi,
Count falling edges. WID from collapsed position
220 edges from E-1 to WIDE-1 to WI
4 to DE, 22 from WIDE to TELE-1
6, from TELE-1 to TELE is 12, and from TELE, the stopper position is 3 edges.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 116 to 118 will be described. This flow chart is
Zoom up button 123 (ZUSW), zoom down button 1
This is a zoom drive process performed when a zoom operation is performed by the 24 (ZDSW).

Step S1060 is initial data setting necessary for zoom driving. Interrupt disabled, port set E
The data of the EPROM 135 is expanded in the RAM. The drive voltage setting of the zoom motor, the light emission of the zoom PiLED, the current of the zoom PRLED, and the light emission are controlled.

In step S1061, if the zoom direction flag F_ZMUP is "1", the zoom is driven in the feeding direction and if it is "0", the zoom is driven in the feeding direction. Step S
In step 1062 to step S1066, the brake start position is calculated for when the zoom buttons 123 and 124 are continuously pressed.

Target position = (TELE position) − (number of stop edges during feeding) (3) The number of stop edges during feeding is the number of edges from the start of applying the short brake during feeding to complete stop. Is.

Steps S1067 to S1071
Then, the brake start position in the zoom-down direction is calculated.

Brake start position = (WIDE position) + (number of stop edges in the take-in direction) (4) In step S1072, the start position obtained by the above formula (3) or formula (4) is set in the WR2 and 3 registers. To store. In step S1075, a timer for detecting the edge width of the Pi signal is started. In step S1074, the zoom button is detected. Step S1075 to Step S107
In step 6, if another key is pressed, the zoom is interrupted, the process branches to step S1093, and the brake is applied.

Steps S1077 to S1080
In, when it is detected that the zoom-up button is released during zoom-up, the process branches to step S1093, and when it is detected that the zoom-down button is released only while ZMPR is at the “H” level during zoom-down, the process branches to step S193. . In the range of TELE to TELE-1, even if the user starts to zoom down, and tries to stop the zoom by releasing his finger from the zoom button, it cannot be stopped unless it is moved from TELE-1.

At step S1081, the zoom edge count during driving according to the zoom driving direction is compared with the brake start position, and if it exceeds the position, Cy = 0.
It branches to step S1083. In step S1083, the ZMPi signal is counted and the output signal of the ZMPR 172 is used to refresh the counter of the ZMPi 173 output signal. By adjusting the output signal of the ZMPR172, the total of the count error that appears when the zoom is repeatedly driven to the wide-telephoto is an adjustment value that is adjusted at the time of factory shipment.
It is solved by rewriting the value of the counter of the output signal of ZMPi173.

In step S1084, if the output signal of ZMPi 173 does not change even after the lapse of a predetermined time, the damage flag F_DMGZM becomes "1", and the flow branches to step S1086.

[0466] In step S1085, the zoom motor 146 is driven by the zoom drive voltage in the normal direction and the reverse direction according to the drive direction. In step S1093, the zoom motor 146 is braked. Since the zoom motor 146 does not stop immediately after the brake is applied, the edge count ZMPR1 of the output signal of the ZMPi 173 is also applied during the braking.
The edge counter is reset by the output signal of 72. If the ZMPi signal has not changed for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the zoom motor has stopped, and in step S1094,
The motor is turned off, and the process returns at step S1095.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 119 to 120 will be described. This flowchart shows a subroutine for driving the zoom from an arbitrary position to the optical wide position.

First, in step S1096, the zoom drive is initialized. Step S1097 to Step S
At 1102, it is determined whether the current position or the wide position is on the side. If the carry becomes "0" by subtracting the number of pulses at the current position from the number of pulses at the wide position, it is judged to be on the collapsed side of the wide side and to the tele side of the wide side if the carry is "1". On the retracted side, in steps S1103 to S1105, the driving direction is calculated as the feeding direction, and the brake start position is calculated as (wide-stop pulse number). On the tele side, steps S1106 to S1109
The drive direction and the stop start position (wide +
Calculate with the number of stop pulses).

In step S1110, the calculated brake start position is stored in the WR0, 1 registers. In step S1111, a timer that detects the edge width of the output signal of the ZMPi 173 is started. Step S1112
In step S1114, if the ZMPR signal is “L”, if the wide position is detected when the zoom pulse is extended to the wide side only by counting the zoom pulse, and if the count is incorrect, the wide range is not reached, so the PR signal is Wide detection is not performed until it becomes "H". Instead, in consideration of the failure of the zoom PR circuit, the edge counter is provided with a limiter and stopped.

In step S1115, the brake start pulse is set to either the wide position or the limiter value. In step S1116, the current position pulse and the brake start pulse are compared. In step S1117, if the start position is exceeded, braking is started, so the process branches to step S1121. In step S1118, the zoom PR signal and the zoom Pi signal are processed.

[0471] If the zoom damage flag is "1" in step S1119, the process branches to step S1122. In step S1120, the drive direction of the motor is set based on the zoom drive voltage and the drive direction in step S1112.
Branch to. The zoom brake is applied in step S1121, and the process returns in step S1122.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 121 will be described. This flowchart is used for adjustment in the process of driving the zoom to an arbitrary position.

First, in step S1123, the zoom drive is initialized. Step S1124 to Step S1
At 129, the drive target position is set in the WR6 and 7 registers. Check if the drive target position is smaller than tele. If it is larger than the tele, put the tele at the target position.

[0474] Steps S1130 to S1133
Now, compare the current position with the target position. Step S113
In 4 to step S1137, setting in the feeding direction is performed. In steps S1138 to S1140,
Make settings for the take-up direction. In step S1141, the brake start position is set. Step S1142
Now, call the zoom drive subroutine. The process returns in step S1143.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 122 will be described. This flowchart is a subroutine for zoom driving to the brake start position.

First, in step S1144, the zoom pulse time width limiter is set. Step S1145
If the braking start position is exceeded in step S1146, the process branches to step S1150. In step S1147,
The signal processing of ZMPi173 and ZMPR172 is performed.

If the zoom damage flag is "1" in step S1148, the process branches to step S1151. In step S1149, the motor drive voltage setting motor is driven, and the process jumps to step S1145.
The zoom motor 146 is braked in step S1150, and the process returns in step S1151.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 123 will be described. This flowchart is a process for driving the zoom from an arbitrary position to the retracted position.

First, in step S1152, the zoom drive is initialized. In steps S1153 to S1158, the brake start target position is calculated.
In steps S1159 to S1160, if the current position is on the retracted side further than the retracted position, step S
In 1161 to step S1162, zoom drive is not performed. In step S1163, the process returns.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 124 to 125 will be described. This flowchart shows the brake processing of the zoom motor 146.

First, in step S1164, ZMPi1
The pulse width limiter clock timer 73 is started. In step S1165, a flag F-ZMBOV (overflow flag) indicating a process for continuously outputting the ZMPi signal due to vibration of the blades (not shown) of the ZMPi 173 is set to "0".

[0482] Steps S1166 to S1167
Then, the zoom pulse before braking is retracted to XR0, 1 in advance. In steps S1168 to S1169,
The limiter timer value when the ZMPi 173 output signal continues to be output is set in the R1 register.

[0483] In step S1170, the zoom motor 14
Brake on 6. In steps S1171 to S1172, the brake determination limiter value for confirming that the output signal of the ZMPi 173 has not been detected for a predetermined time and stopped, is set in the R0 register.

In step S1173, a timer overflow is detected. In step S1174, the overflow flag of the timer is cleared to "0". In step S1175, the R0 register is decremented. If the value of the R0 register becomes "0" in step S1176, it means that the output signal of ZMPi173 has not been output for a predetermined time, and the process branches to step S1192.

[0485] Steps S1178 and S1179
Then, the R1 register is decremented. When the R1 register becomes “0”, it means that the output signal of the ZMPi 173 continues to be output for a predetermined time or longer, and therefore the process branches to step S1181 to forcibly stop the process.

[0486] In step S1179, the ZMPR 172,
The change of each output signal of ZMPi173 is examined.
In step S1180, as a result of the processing in step S1179, “0” is set to ZMPi1 by the F-ZMPi flag.
“1” for which no change in 73 was detected is the ZMPi1
This means that a change in the output signal of 73 can be detected. Here, in the case of “0”, the process branches to step S1173.
If it is “1”, the process branches to step S1170, and R
Reset the 0 register.

Steps S1181 to S1189
If the output signal of the ZMPi173 keeps changing even after a lapse of a predetermined time, the zoom pulse counter is making an incorrect count, so the current number of pulses before braking and the number of stop pulses It is necessary to assume the position. The zoom pulse saved before braking and the number of brake stop pulses are added or subtracted according to the driving direction.

In step S1190, the result of the calculation is stored in the RAM counting the zoom pulse. In step S1191, the flag F-ZMBOV overflowing the brake is set to "1". Step S119
At 2, the zoom motor 146 is turned off. Step S1
At 193, it returns.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 126 to 127 will be described. This flowchart shows the processing for initializing the zoom drive.

First, in step S1194, interruption is prohibited. In step S1195, port setting is performed. In step S1196, the interface ic138
Set the operation mode of. In step S1197,
All the motors 144, 145, 146 are turned off.

[0491] Steps S1198 to S1206
At the adjustment value retracted position of the EEPROM 135, Wi
DE-1, WiDE, TELE-1, TELE, TEL
The zoom pulse at the E end is expanded in the RAM.

[0492] Steps S1207 to S1228
At, the adjustment value of the EEPROM 135 and the determination threshold value of the motor drive voltage value zoom Pi are expanded in the RAM. In steps S1229 to S1242, the adjustment value of the EEPROM 135, the determination value of the ZMPR172, and the LED current value of the ZMPR172 are expanded in the RAM. In step S1243, the interface i
The LED current value of the ZMPR 172 is set in c138.

In step S1244, ZMPR1
Turn on the 72 LED. In steps S1245 and S1246, the LED of the ZMPi 173 is turned on. In steps S1246b-d, the determination threshold level of the PTR output signal of ZMPi173 is set in the interface IC 138.

[0494] In step S1247, the number of return pulses when the zoom driving direction is reversed is set in the RAM, and in steps S1248 to S1251, the zoom stop pulse number (extending direction, advancing direction). In step S1252, the limiter value for determining the end of braking is set in the ZR5 register.

[0495] In step S1253, a limiter value for determining that the ZMPi signal is not output due to zooming is set in the ZR6 register. Step S12
At 54, a limiter value forcibly ending when the zoom Pi continues to output during braking is set to ZR7.
In step S1255, ZMPR172, ZMP
The software timer has the time from when the LED of i173 is emitted until the output is stabilized. Step S12
At 56, the overflow flag during braking is cleared.

In step S1257, ZMPR1
The detection flags 72 are initialized. Step S1258
At, the detection flags of ZMPi173 are initialized. In step S1259, the zoom damage flag is cleared to "0". In step S1260,
To return.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 128 to 130 will be described. This flowchart is Z
Processing of the output signal of MPi173 and the output signal of ZMPR172 is shown.

As shown in Table 8 of FIG. 225, the output signal of ZMPR 172 rises and falls, and
Depending on the zoom driving direction at that time, the processing for changing the content of the counter counting the zoom pulse to a predetermined value is switched. When the rising of the signal of the ZMPR 172 is detected and the zoom is the continuous drive, (WIDE-1) data is set to the count value of the zoom pulse. It is not set when the zoom is drive-in.

When the trailing edge of the ZMPR 172 signal is detected and the zoom is in the extended drive, (TELE-1)
Set the data of. When the zoom is driven forward (W
Set the data of IDE-1).

The output signal of ZMPi173 counts the rising and falling edges of the output signal of ZMPi173 as shown in Table 9 of FIG. 226. It counts up by "1" at the time of feeding, and counts down by "1" at the time of feeding.

[0501] In step S1261, ZMPR1
The change of the 72 signal is detected. When the ZMPR172 signal has changed, the F_ZMPR flag is set to "1". If the F_ZMPR flag is "0" in step S1262, the process branches to step S1274. In steps S1263 to S1264, the zoom pulse at the time of switching is stored in the WR4 register.

Steps S1266 to S1273
In the above, when the F_PROLD flag is “1”, the rising means a rising. When zooming down, step S1274 is executed. When zooming up, step S1269 is executed.
Then, WIDE-1 is set to the zoom pulse. When zooming down, (WIDE-1) is set.

In step S1274, ZMPi1
The change in the output signal of 73 is detected. When a signal change is detected, the F-ZMPi flag is set to "1". If the output signal of the ZMPi 173 does not change in step S1275, the process branches to step S1284. In steps S1276 to 1280, the zoom pulse is incremented when zooming up, but not incremented when the result of the increment is an overflow.

Step S1281 to step S1283
In, the zoom pulse is decremented at the time of zooming down, but if it is "0" before decrementing, it is not decremented. Jump to step S1295. In step S1284, if the ZMPi173 pulse width timer does not overflow, the process branches to step S1296.

In step S1285, the overflow flag is cleared. In step S1286, the R0 register that counts the pulse width of Pi is decremented. When R0 becomes "0" in step S1287, it is determined whether the mechanical signal has been applied to the mechanical stopper or the ZMPi173 circuit has more than it, because the Pi signal has not changed for a predetermined time, and the damage process is performed. In the damage process, the motor is turned off in step S1288.

In step S1289, the damage flag is set to "1". Step S1290 to Step S
In 1294, the zoom pulse is set to “0” because the sinking end contact may be considered as damage during zooming down. When zooming up, it is possible to use a stopper contact, so use the zoom pulse as stopper position data.
Jump to step S1296. Step S129
In 5, when the output signal of the ZMPi 173 changes, the clock timer is reset. Step S12
Return at 96.

Next, FIG. 170 will be described. In FIG. 170, the output signal of the ZMPR 172 is A / D converted and "H" threshold and "L" threshold stored in the R6 and R7 registers are given a hysteresis to make "H" and "L" judgments. It indicates that

For example, the previous determination result is “H” (F_PR
When the OLD flag is "1") and the current AD result is smaller than R7 and is "L" (F_PROLD is set to "0"), it is determined to be a fall. The change flag (F_ZMPR) is set to "1".

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 131 will be described. This flowchart is based on the above ZMPR17
2 shows a determination process of 2.

First, in step S1297, F-
The ZMPR flag is cleared to "0". Step S129
At 8, the signal of ZMPR 172 is A / D converted.
The A / D result enters the accumulator. Step S129
At 9, the accumulator is compared with the R7 register containing the "L" level value. If it is smaller than the R7 register, the process branches to step S1305. When the R7 register is exceeded, the accumulator is compared with the R6 register containing the "H" level value. If it is less than the R6 register, it is an intermediate level, so nothing is done, and the process jumps to step S1310.

[0511] In step S1301, if the previous determination result is "H", it is determined that there is no change, and the process branches to step S1310. If the last time is "L", there is a possibility of noise, so in step S1302, A / D conversion is performed again, and in step S1303, it is confirmed whether it is R6 or more by comparing with the R6 register. If less than R6, try again. Jump to step S1298. R6
Since the rising has been detected in the above cases, the previous determination result F-PROLD is determined in step S1304.
To "1". It branches to step S139.

[0512] In step S1305, if the previous determination is "L", the process branches to step S1310. Step S1306 A / D is performed again for confirmation. If it is smaller than R7 in step S1307, it means that the falling edge has been detected. If larger than R7, step S1
Branch to 298. In step S1308, the previous determination (F-DOLD) is set to "0". Step S
Since the signal of the ZMPR 172 has changed in 1309, the F-ZMPR flag 9 is set to "1". The process returns in step S1310.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 132 will be described. This flowchart is based on the above ZMPi1.
This shows the processing for detecting the rise and fall of the signal 73.

[0514] In step S1311, the change flag is cleared to "0". If the output signal of the ZMPi 173 is "L" in step S1312, step S13.
Branch to 1317. Here, if “H”, step S
1313, the previous 173ZHPi signal (FP
If iOLD) is "H", go to step S1322 and "L"
If so, in step S1314, after waiting for 50 μsec to prevent noise (software timer), if the output signal of ZMPi 173 is “L” in step S1315, the process branches to step S1312 to try again. If the output signal of ZMPi 173 is “H”, then 173
This means that the rising edge of the Pi signal has been detected. Step S
At 1316, the previous Pi signal (F_PiOLD)
To "1". It jumps to step S1321.

[0515] In step S1317, the previous Pi
If the signal is "L", the process branches to step S1322 and "H".
If so, after 50 μsec in step S1318, if the Pi signal is “H” in step S1319, the process branches to step S1312 to redo. Step S1
If the ZMPi signal is "L" at 319, the fall of the ZMPi signal has been detected.

[0516] In step S1320, the last ZM
The Pi signal is set to "0". In step S1321, F-ZM is used to indicate that the ZMPi signal has changed.
The Pi flag is set to "1". The process returns in step S1322.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 133 to 137 will be described. This flow chart shows the processing relating to the mechanical that is returned to the normal state when the mechanism is not in a normal state when the battery is inserted into the camera, for example, when the battery is removed during the photographing operation.

First, in step S1323, the zoom drive is initialized. In step S1324, the zoom initial position drive is performed. When the zoom position is unknown, the ZMPi173 pulse count value is reset by switching the ZMPR172 signal once by widening. After performing mirror up / down and shutter charge initials, set the zoom to the retracted position.

[0519] If the power is off in step S1325, the process branches to step S1338. If the power is on, the zoom will be wide and the lens will be infinite. In step S1326, the initial position of the sequence clutch is driven. Step S1327,
In step S1328, the lens retracting flag is set to "1" and the zoom retracting flag is set to "0" to indicate that the zoom is not in the retracted position.

[0520] In step S1329, the EEPRO
Write to M135. In step S1330, the zoom is driven to the wide position. In step S1331, the zoom encoder value is calculated from the zoom pulse. In step S1332, the maximum aperture value is calculated from the zoom encoder value. In step S1333, the optical infinity position is calculated from the mechanical stopper position of the lens from the zoom encoder value.

[0521] In step S1334, the lens retracting flag is set to "0" to indicate that the lens is not in the retractable position. In step S1335, the EEPROM
Write to 135. Step S1336, Step S1
In 337, the lens of the first group is moved to the position where the first and second groups of the lenses do not interfere with each other when retracted (the position where the predetermined pulse is moved from the optical infinite position), so that the lens is driven to the optical infinite position.

[0522] In step S1338, mirror and diaphragm driving are initialized. Turn on the diaphragm Pi 152. In step S1339, the aperture Pi 152
If the output of is "H", the diaphragm is in the initial position,
The process branches to step S1346 where initials are not performed.

[0523] Steps S1340 and S1341
At, the maximum value is put in the diaphragm drive pulse. In steps S1342 and S1343, F_UTY
3 is set to "0" and F_UTY4 is set to "1", and the mirror driving subroutine is set to perform only diaphragm driving. In step S1344, the F_DPRN flag is set to "0" to prevent the imprint signal (S110) from being output to the 137 date module by mistake during mirror driving.

In step S1345, the mirror down process is called to open the aperture. In step S1346, after the software timer of 100 msec, in step S1347, the aperture stepping motor 15
The chip enable of the first driver circuit 150 is turned off, and the excitation of the stepping motor 151 is cut off.

[0525] Steps S1348 to S1367
Is a mechanical mechanical related to film drive.

In step S1348, according to Table 2 shown in FIG. 219, if F-CNDT1 is "0", the autoloading failure has been completed, and the flow branches to step S1357. If F_CNDT0 is "1" in step S1349, rewinding is completed, and nothing is done, so the process branches to step S1366. Step S135
At 0, if the initial position drive of the sequence clutch is completed, the process branches to step S1352. If not completed, the initial position of the sequence clutch is driven in step S1351.

[0527] In step S1352, the sequence clutch is switched to the rewinding position. Step S1353
In, rewind. If the power is on in step S1354, the lens frame and the rear lens are not in positions where they interfere with the mirror. Therefore, in step S1355, the sequence clutch is driven to the mirror position, and step S1
At 356, shutter charging is performed. If the power is not on, the process branches to step S1366.

In step S1357, F_CND
When T0 is "0", autoloading has failed, so nothing is done and the process branches to step S1366. When F_CNDT0 is "1", in step S1358, it is checked whether winding is in progress. When the F-OWiND flag is "1", it means that the film is being wound up. Therefore, it is necessary to wind up one frame in order to prevent overlapping of photographed frames in the next shooting.

[0529] In step S1359, if the initial position drive of the sequence clutch is completed, the process branches to step S1361, and if not completed, the sequence clutch initial position drive is performed in step S1360. In step S1361, the sequence clutch is driven to the winding position. Step S1
At 362, one frame is wound. Step S136
In step 3, if the power is on, the zoom and the rear lens do not interfere with the mirror. Therefore, in step S1364,
The sequence clutch is switched to the mirror position, and shutter charge is performed in step S1365.

[0530] In step S1366, the winding midway flag F_OWiND is set to "0", and in step S136.
7, the result of other processing F_CNDT0, F_C
Since there is a possibility that NDT1 has changed, EEPROM135
Write in. In step S1368, the process returns.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 135 to 136 will be described. This flowchart shows the mechanical mechanical of the zoom when the battery is removed during the zoom operation.

When the zoom lens is in the retracted position on the way, in this state, in order to avoid interference between the rear lens of the lens and the mirror when the mirror is moved up and down, only when the zoom is in the wide position, the mirror Make initials.

First, in step S1369, if the zoom collapsing flag F-ZMSNK is "1", the zoom is in the correct collapsing position, so the zoom is not initialized and the process branches to step S1391. In step S1371, if the ZMPR 172 signal is "H", it is found that it is in the range of (WiDE-1) to (TELE-1), so the zoom position searching process is not performed. It branches to step S1394. If the ZMPR172 signal is "0", (collapsed position) to (WIDE-1)
And (TELE-1) to (stopper position).

[0534] Steps S1372 to S1383
In (Collapse position) ~ (WiDE-1) or (TEL
In order to determine which of E-1) to (TELE end), the pulse number of (stopper position)-(TELE-1) is once moved in the collapsing direction and the change in the ZMPR172 signal is checked to determine which. However, when it is in the vicinity of the retracted position, it is moved to a position deeper than the retracted position, and there is a risk of hitting the lowered mirror. Therefore, processing for lowering the drive voltage of the motor and slowly moving it is performed.

[0535] Steps S1372 to S1384
At, the (stopper position) data is put in the zoom pulse. In steps S1375 to S1376, the brake start target position is set to (TELE-1).
In steps S1377 to S1380, the motor drive voltage is set to a voltage applied to the collapse. In step S1381, the zoom is driven to the target position. Steps S1382 to S1383 The changed voltage data is restored to the original data.

[0536] In step S1384, ZMPR1
If the 72 signal is "H", the zoom pulse is (TE
It is set to the data of LE-1), and the position is known. It branches to step S1394. If the zoom PR is "L", the zoom position is the retracted position (WiDE-
Since it is in the position range of 1), the zoom is extended and the rising signal of the zoom PR is detected. Step S138
5. In step S1386, the zoom pulse is set to "0".

[0537] In step S1387, the zoom is set to W.
Drive towards IDE. In step S1388, the zoom pulse is converted into a zoom encoder value. In step S1389, the maximum aperture value is calculated from the zoom encoder value. In step S1390, the number of lens drive pulses from the infinite mechanical stopper position of the lens to the optical infinite position is obtained from the zoom pulse. Jump to step S1394.

If the lens retracted position flag F-LNSSNK is "1" in step S1391, it means that the battery is removed in the power-off state of the camera, and the process branches to step S1404.

[0539] In step S1392, the combination of the zoom collapsing flag F-ZMSNK being "1" and the lens collapsing flag F-LNSSNK being "0" is not possible in the sequence (see Table 10 and Fig. 227 in Fig. 227).
(See Table 11 shown in FIG. 28) The zoom damage flag is set to "1", and in step S1393, damage processing is performed and release lock is performed.

[0540] In step S1394, the mechanical processing of the mirror and shutter is performed. Step S139
In 5a to 5c, the first group lens is once attached to the infinite mechanical stopper, and the first group lens is extended to a position where the first group lens and the second group lens do not interfere with each other when retracted. Step S1
396a, b The lens retractable flag is set to "1", the zoom retract position flag is set to "0", and step S139 is performed.
At 7, the data is written in the EEPROM 135.

Steps S1398 to S1400
In, data of (TELE end) is put in the zoom pulse, and in step S1401, the zoom is driven toward the retracted position. In step S1402, the zoom retracted position flag is set to "1" and step S1403E.
Write data to EPROM. Step S1404
And return.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 137 will be described. This flow chart is a mechanical of a mirror and a shutter.

First, in step S1405, if the mirror up switch 157 is "0", it means that the mirror is up, and therefore the process branches to step S1407. If the shutter charge switch 156 (SCSW) is "0" in step S1406, it means that the shutter charge state is normal, and thus step S14
Jump to 17. Shutter charge switch 15
When 6 is "1", the mirror is down, but since the shutter charge is still in a state, the process branches to step S1414 to perform the shutter charge.

In step S1407, if the shutter charge switch 156 is "1", the mirror is still in the mirror-up state, so the flow branches to step S1409 to perform the mirror-down. Shutter charge switch 156
Is "0", the mirror up switch 157 (MUS
W) and the shutter charge switch 156 are not possible combinations due to the configuration, so the mirror damage flag FD
Set MGMiR to "1" to go to damage processing and lock the operation of the camera.

If it is determined in step S1409 that the initial position of the sequence clutch has not been driven,
In step S1410, the initial position of the sequence clutch is driven.

[0546] Steps S1411 to S1413
In step S1413, the F-UTY3 and F-UTY4 flags are set to "1" and "0", respectively, so that only the mirror-down operation is performed. In step S1414, if the initial position drive operation of the sequence clutch is not performed,
In step S1415, the initial position of the sequence clutch is driven. In step S1416, shutter charging is performed. Step S1417
And return.

As described above, if the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is used, in the single-lens reflex camera, the mechanical drive inside the body, which normally uses two motors and a complicated clutch mechanism, is performed. This is possible with a small clutch that uses only the motor and the single sensor. This can greatly contribute to downsizing and cost reduction of the entire camera.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment of the present invention will be described.

171 to 173 are timing charts for explaining the operation of the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment, and FIGS. 138 to 156 are flow charts showing the same operation. Further, Table 1 shown in FIG.
2 is a table showing the drive processing of the second embodiment.

In the first embodiment, LE of SCPi147 is used.
The position detection is performed by changing the D current to change the initial position drive, the mirror drive system, the winding drive system, and the rewind drive system and the output signal of the SCPi 147, but in the second embodiment, the LED of the SCPi 147 is used. This is a method in which the position is detected only by changing the output signal while keeping the current constant.

First, the timing chart shown in FIG. 171 will be described.

FIG. 171 shows a series of signal output after the LED current of the SCPi 147 is adjusted so that the output signal of the SCPi 147 becomes ideal, and the sequence clutch initial drive, hoisting drive system position drive, and initial position drive. 6 is a time chart when the drive of the sequence clutch is switched.

In the figure, GPSiNi is the power SW (PWR
This is a process that is always performed once when the switch (SW) is turned on, and after the sequence motor 144 is started to rotate in the drive system switching direction,
After about 100 msec to stabilize the motor rotation, SCP
The output signal of i147 is A / D converted in a cycle of about 300 to 500 μsec to obtain a low signal level (“L” level),
Three types of thresholds, an intermediate level (“M” level) and a high level (“H” level), are detected and stored in the memory.

Thereafter, the change in the output signal of the SCPi 147 to the "L" level is detected, the sequence motor 144 is braked, and the initial position drive is ended.

In GPSWD, driving is started from the initial position, and the first extension from "H" level to "M" level is detected, and the position extension of the hoisting drive system is completed.

The driving to the rewinding drive system is called GPSRW, and the driving is started from the initial position of the sequence clutch similarly to the position drive of the hoisting drive system, and the second fall from the "H" level to the "M" level. When the sequence motor 144 is detected, the sequence motor 144 is braked, and the rewinding drive system position drive is completed.

GPSMiR is the initial position drive of the sequence clutch, GPSWD, or the initial position drive after executing GPSRW, the number of falling pulses to the initial position is known in advance (for example, after GPSWD, The pulse number becomes "2" and becomes "1" after GPSRW), and the driving is performed by the falling pulse number. Of course, the sequence motor 144 may be braked and stopped only by the fall from the “M” level to the “L” level.

Next, the timing chart shown in FIG. 172 will be described.

This timing chart shows that the initial drive GPSiN of the sequence clutch is at "L" level,
It is a figure explaining the process at the time of detecting the threshold level of "M" level and "H" level, and storing it in memory.

The EEPROM 135 is provided in advance with the judgment level and the judgment level θ, 1 for allocating the A / D converted value to “L”, “M”, “H”.

When the sequence motor 144 is driven, and about 100 msec after the start of driving, and after the motor becomes stable, the output signal of the SCPi 147 is A / D converted, and if it is lower than the judgment level θ, the "L" level is judged. If it is higher than level 0 and lower than judgment level 1, it is classified as "M" level, and if higher than judgment level 1, it is classified as "H" level. The distributed A / D values are sequentially stored in the memory, and when the respective A / D values are sampled 8 times, the respective average values AVE0, AVE1, AVE2 are obtained.

Next, based on the following equation, the threshold level 0
Ask for ~ 3.

Threshold level 0 = AVE0 + His width 0 (5) Threshold level 1 = AVE1-His width 1 (6) Threshold level 2 = AVE2 + His width 2 (7) Threshold level 3 = AVE3-His width 3 (8) His Width 0 to 3 is about 0.17V, and AD value is 1 in hexadecimal.
It is 0H.

The threshold levels 0 to 3 are stored in the memory. After that, the GPSWD, GPSRW, and GPSMiR are driven by SCPi using these threshold levels 0 to 3.
The output signal of 147 is determined.

As a judgment method, the change from the "L" level to the "M" level is judged at the threshold level 1. The change from the “M” level to the “H” level is judged by the threshold level 3. The change from the “H” level to the “M” level is judged at the threshold level 0. The threshold level 0 is used for the determination from the "M" level to the "L" level. In order to select each judgment level, remember which level it was in before. "0" when at "L" level,
When it is at the "M" level, "1" is stored, and when it is at the "H" level, "2" is stored.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 138 to 142 will be described. This flow chart is
It shows the initial position drive of the sequence clutch.

First, in step S1418, the flags F_UTY0 to 7 used in the program are cleared to "0". In step S1419, initialization necessary for driving the sequence clutch is performed (see the flowchart shown in FIG. 156).

Next, steps S1420 to S1
At 424, the work area required for driving the initial position is cleared to "0". In Step S1425, A /
Set the channel for D conversion. Step S1426
At, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the clutch switching direction.

Steps S1427 to S1430
At, the process waits for 100 msec during which the rotation of the sequence motor 144 stabilizes. In step S1431, the start address of the area for sequentially storing A / D values is set to 1
× Store in register. In steps S1432 to S1436, a timer for detecting an abnormality is set and started. This timer value is about 1 second.

[0570] Next, in step S1437, it is checked if the abnormality processing detection timer has overflowed. If it overflows, it is abnormal and the process branches to step S1500. In step S1438, the output signal of SCPi 147 is A / D converted.
In step S1439, the result of the A / D conversion is never "0", so when it is "0", the process returns to step S1437 to redo.

In step S1440, the result of A / D conversion is compared with the judgment level 0. If the judgment level is higher than 0, the level is either "M" or "H".
Processing will be performed later.

[0572] In step S1441, if eight "L" level A / D values are sampled, step S1
It branches to 462. In Step S1442, A /
The address of the area to which the D value is added is set in the EP register. In step S1443, the A / D values are stored in order. Processing for adding A / D values is performed (see FIG. 143).
Refer to the flowchart shown in.).

In step S1444, the R0 register for counting the "L" level A / D value is incremented. Step S1445 When the R0 register is less than 8, the process branches to step S1462. If the R0 register becomes 8 or more, the sampling of the "L" level is completed in step S1446, so the F-UTY0 flag is set to "1".

[0574] Steps S1447 to S1448
In, if the AD value is the determination level 0 or more and less than the determination level 1, to step S1449, otherwise,
It branches to step S1455. If the “M” level sampling is completed in step S1449, the address of the area to which the AD value of step S1450 is added is set in step S1462.

At step S1451 the AD value is stored and added. In step S1452,
The R1 register that counts the "M" level A / D value is incremented. In step S1453,
When the A / D value is counted 8 or more, step S1454
, The "M" level sample end flag F-UT
Set Y1 to "1". In Step S1455, A
If the / D value is less than the determination level 1, step S146
Branch to 2.

[0576] If the sampling at the "H" level is completed in step S1456, the process branches to step S1462. In step S1457, an address to which the A / D value is added is set. In step S1458, the A / D values are stored and added. In step S1459, the R2 register that counts the “H” level is incremented. Step S1460: The count value is 8
When the above is reached, in step S1461 "H"
The level end sample flag F_UTY2 is set to "1". In step S1462 to step S1464, if all the sample end flags of "L", M ", and" H "are" 1 ", step S1465.
If at least one is "0", the sample has not been completed, and the process branches to step S1437.

[0577] Steps S1465-S1467
In, the average of the "L" level A / D values is calculated.
The result of adding the "L" level A / D values is divided by 8 to obtain the average. In step S1468, the average value is ZR
Store in 0 register. In step S1470,
The threshold level is calculated by adding the hysteresis width to the average value.
In step S1471, the obtained threshold level 0 is stored in the RAM area D-GPSTH0.

[0578] Step S1472 to Step S1475
In, the average value of the “M” level is calculated. The obtained result is stored in the ZR1 register. In steps S1476 to S1478, the hysteresis width is subtracted from the average value of the "M" levels to obtain threshold level 1, and D_GPS
Store in TH1. Step S1479 to Step S1
In 482, the threshold value 2 is obtained by adding the hysteresis width to the average value of the “M” levels to determine the RAM area D.D. GPST
Store in H2.

[0579] Steps S1483 to S1489
At, the average value of "H" level is calculated and the result is stored in the ZR2 register. The hysteresis level is added to the obtained average value to obtain a threshold level 3, and the threshold level 3 is stored in the RAM area D-GPSTH3. In step S1490, SCPi14
The output signal of 7 is read once. Previous data is created to avoid erroneous determination (see the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 151 to 154).

[0580] In step S1491, an overflow of the timer for detecting an abnormality is detected, and if it is an overflow, the process branches to step S1500. Step S149
2, the A / D conversion cycle is about 250 μs
The software timer of ec is executed (see FIG. 165).

[0581] In step S1493, SCPi1
The change in the output signal of 47 is detected, and if the change is the fall,
The fall flag F-GPi is set to "1". Further, set level data. Step S1494, Step S
At 1495, the falling flag F-GPi is "1".
Then, if the level at that time is “0”, it means the reset position, so to apply the brake, the process branches to step S1496. Otherwise, the reset position is not detected.
The process branches to step S1491 to form a processing loop.

[0582] In step S1496, the brake is applied. The brake is short brake for 200μsec, then reverse reverse brake for 10msec, then 5
0msec Short brake is applied to finish.

[0583] Steps S1497 and S1498
In, the position data of the sequence clutch is set in the RAM area D-GPS. In step S1499, the flag F-GPSiNi indicating that the initial drive of the sequence clutch is finished is set to "1". It branches to step S1502.

At step S1500, abnormality processing is performed. Turn off the sequence motor. Step S1
At 501, the sequence clutch abnormality flag F-
Set DMGGPS to "1" and branch to the damage processing,
Lock camera operation. The process returns in step S1502.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 143 will be described. This flowchart is a subroutine for sequentially storing A / D values in the work area and further adding A / D values.

First, in step S1503, ix
The A / D value is stored in the area indirectly addressed by the register. In step S1504, the ix register is incremented by "1". In steps S1505 to S1510, the data in the area indirectly addressed by the EP register is read, the A / D value is added, and the data is stored in the area indirectly addressed by the EP register. In step S1511, the process returns.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 144 to 147 will be described. This flow chart is
Sequence clutch, mirror drive system drive position (also reset position) GPSMiR, hoist system drive position GPS
7 is a flowchart of a subroutine for driving to WD and rewind system drive position GPSRW.

First, steps S1512 to S1.
At 514, data is stored in the R0 register in order to distinguish the driving target position by the R0 register. The mirror drive system position drive is "1", the winding drive system position drive is "2", and the rewind system drive position drive is "3".

Next, in step S1515, initialization necessary for driving the sequence clutch is performed (see FIG. 1).
56).

[0590] In step S1516, SCPi1
The output of 47 is A / D converted and the current position is confirmed. If the R0 register is "1" in step S1517, the reset position confirmation process is not performed, and the process branches to step S1521. In step S1518,
As a result of the A / D conversion, it is judged whether it is at "L" level, and "L"
If it is in the level, the process branches to step S1521, and if it is not, the reset position drive is performed in step S1519 (see the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 148 to 149). When abnormal, the F-UTY0 flag is set to "1".

[0591] In step S1520, the F-UTY
If the 0 flag is "1", it is abnormal, so step S1.
It branches to 547. Step S1521 to Step S1
At 523, the target position data (R0 register) and the current position data (D-GPS) are compared. If the target position data and the current position data are the same, the process does not move and the process branches to step S1549. If the target position data is larger than the current position data, in order to subtract the current position data from the target position data in a later process, step S1524
In step S1527, “3” is added to the target position data in advance. If the target position data is smaller than the current position data, the process branches to step S1528.

[0592] Steps S1528 to S1529
In, the current position data (D-GPS) is subtracted from the target position data (R0 register) to obtain the driving pulse number. The calculated driving pulse number is stored in the R1 register. In step S1530, the output signal of SCPi 147 is read once in advance. In step S1531, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the clutch switching direction.

[0593] Step S1532 to Step S1536
At, a timer for about 1 second for detecting an abnormality is set and the timer is started. Step S1537
When the overflow of the abnormality detection timer is detected, the process branches to step S1547 because it is abnormal. In step S1538, a software timer of about 250 μsec is executed.

[0594] In step S1539, SCPi1
A change in the output signal of 47 is detected. Step S1540
Flag F_GP with change in SCPi 147
If i is “0”, branch to step S1537, F_GPi
Is "1", the rising flag F-GPSUP flag is checked in step S1541, and if "1" is rising, branch to step S1537. If "0" is falling, the driving pulse number (R1 register) is determined in step S1542. Reduce the content by "1".

[0595] In step S1543, the number of drive pulses (R1 register) is reduced to "0" in step S15.
The process branches to 37 to form a processing loop. Step S1
At 544, the target position is reached, so the sequence motor 144 is braked.

[0596] Steps S1545 to S1546
In, the target position data (R0 register) is stored in the current position data (D-GPS). Step S1549
Branch to. In step S1547, the sequence motor 144 is turned off in the abnormal process. Step S1
At 548, the flag F-DMGGPS indicating the abnormality of the sequence clutch is set to "1" and the processing branches to the abnormality processing to lock the camera operation. The process returns in step S1549.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 148 to 149 will be described. This flow chart is
6 is a flowchart of a process of driving the sequence clutch to the initial position when the sequence clutch is not initially at the initial position when driven to the winding / rewinding drive system position.

First, in step S1550, the flag F-UTY0 indicating an error is cleared to "0".
In step S1551, the output signal of SCPi is read and the previous data is initialized. In step S1552, sequence motor 144 is driven in the clutch switching direction. Steps S1553 to S1557
Set a timer for about 1 second to detect an abnormality and start it.

If an abnormality detection timer overflow is detected in step S1558, the flow is abnormal, so the flow branches to step S1564 to set a flag F-UTY0 indicating an error in step S1564 to "1", and then step S1564.
Branch to 1564. In Step S1559, A
A software timer of about 250 μsec is executed in order to create the cycle of D / D conversion.

In step S1560, SCPi1
A change in the output signal of 47 is detected. Step S1561
In Step S1563, a change in the output signal of the SCPi 147 is detected, and it is still falling, and
If it is at "L" level, it is determined that the reset position is reached, and in step S1564, the sequence motor is braked. Otherwise, the process branches to step S1558 to form a processing loop.

[0601] Steps S1565 and S1566
Now, because it is the mirror drive system position, the current position data (D-
"1" which is mirror position data is set in GPS).
In step S1567 the process returns.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 150 will be described. This flowchart is a flowchart of a subroutine for A / D converting the output signal of SCPi.

First, in step S1568, the signal of the preset A / D conversion channel is A / D converted. Next, in step S1569, the first A / D result is saved in the R3 register. Step S15
At 70, a software timer of about 100 μsec is executed to remove noise. Step S1571
In, the second A / D conversion is performed. Step S1
At 572, the second A / D result is saved in the R4 register.

[0604] Steps S1573 to S1577
In, the absolute value of the difference between the first and second A / D conversion results is obtained. Steps S1578 to S1581
In, if the absolute value of the difference between the A / D conversion results is within a predetermined value, the first A / D value is set in the accumulator. If it is larger than the predetermined value, "0" is set in the accumulator. In step S1582, the process returns.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 151 to 154 will be described. This flow chart is
7 is a flowchart showing a process of detecting a signal change from the result of A / D conversion of the output signal of SCPi147.

First, steps S1583 and S1.
At 584, the flag F_GPi indicating that the SCPi 147 signal has changed is cleared to "0", and the rising flag F_GPSUP indicating the rising change is set to "0".
clear. Next, step S1585 and step S1
At 586, D_GPSOLD indicating the previous level
Data in the R7 register. Step S158
7, the channel for A / D conversion is SCPi
The port to which the output signal of 147 is connected is selected.
In step S1588, the signal of SCPi147 is A / D converted.

In step S1589, if the A / D conversion result is "0", the A / D conversion could not be performed correctly or if the result was buried in noise.
Since the signal may be in a transient state, the process is interrupted and the process returns to step S1605.

In step S1590, the A / D value is compared with the threshold level 0. When A / D value <threshold level 0, the range is A in FIG. 149. In step S1591, "L" level data is set in the R6 register. In step S1592, when the previous level (R7 register) is equal to or higher than the “M” level, it is determined to be the fall. Step S
Branch to 1601. If the previous level is less than the "M" level, it is determined that there is no change and the process branches to step S1605 and returns.

[0609] In step S1593, the A / D value is compared with the threshold level 1. When A / D value <threshold level 1, it means that it is in the range of (B) in the diagram shown in FIG. 172, so the process branches to step S1604 and the data OFFH that cannot be included in new level data in processing
To set.

[0610] In step S1594, the A / D value is compared with the threshold level 2. When A / D value <threshold level 2, it is in the range (C) shown in FIG. 172.

In step S1595, "M" level data is set in the R6 register. Step S159
6, the previous level (R7 register) is "M"
If it is higher than the level, it is determined to be a fall and the process branches to step S1601. If it is smaller than the “M” level, there is no change and the process branches to step S1605 and returns. If it is smaller than the "M" level, it is determined to be a fall and the process branches to step S1600.

[0612] In step S1597, the A / D value is compared with the threshold level 3. When A / D value <threshold level 3, it means that the value is in the range (D) in FIG. 172, and therefore the process branches to step S1604, and data OFFH which is impossible in processing is set as new level data.

In step S1598, since the A / D value is at "H" level, "H" level data is set in the R6 register. If the previous level (R7 register) is higher than the “M” level in step S1599, it is determined that there is no change and the process returns to step S1605. If it is lower than the "M" level, it is determined to be a fall, and the process branches to step S1601.

[0614] In step S1600, this is the place where the process branches at the rise determination. F_GPSUP, a flag indicating a change in rising edge, is set to "1". Step S160
1, the flag F_GPi indicating that there is a change is set to "1".
To In steps S1602 to S1603, the new level data (R6 register) is stored in the area (D_GPSOLD) for storing the previous level data. In step S1604, data OFFH, which is impossible in processing, is stored in new level data (R6 register). The process returns in step S1605.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 155 will be described. This flowchart shows a flowchart of the brake processing. The following is a sequential description according to the flowchart.

First, in step S1606, a short brake is applied to the sequence motor. Next, in step S1607, a software timer of about 200 μsec is executed. In steps S1608 to S1612, the sequence motor 144 is reversely braked. The sequence motor 144 is reversed for 10 msec by counting the software timer of about 2 msec 5 times.

[0617] Steps S1613 to S1617
At, the short brake is applied to the sequence motor 144. Software timer of about 10 msec 5
By counting the number of times, the short brake is applied to the sequence motor 144 for 50 msec. Step S1
At 618, sequence motor 144 is turned off. The process returns in step S1619.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 156 will be described. This flow chart is a flow chart showing the processing for performing the initial setting required for the sequence clutch switching drive. The following is a sequential description according to the flowchart.

First, in step S1620, interrupts are prohibited so as not to be interrupted while the motor is being driven.
Next, in step S1621, port setting is performed. In step S1622, the interface I
Set the mode of C138. In step S1623, all motors are turned off.

[0620] Steps S1624 to S1625
, The data stored in the EEPROM 135 (the drive voltage of the sequence motor 144, the SCPi 147
LED current of) is read. RAM for each data
Expand to the top. Steps S1626 to S162
8, the LED current XR0 register of SCPi 147 is stored. Step S1636 to Step S163
8, the drive voltage of the sequence motor 144 is set to XR
2 Store in register.

[0621] Steps S1639 to S1640
At, the judgment levels 0 and 1 are read from the EEPROM 135. In steps S1641 to S1650, the judgment level 0 data is multiplied by 16 to XR4.
It is expanded and stored in the XR5 register. Step S1651
In step S1661, the judgment level 1 data is multiplied by 16 and expanded and stored in XR6 and XR7.

In steps S1662 and 1663,
Interface current to the LED current value of SCPi147
138. In step S1664, the SC
Turn on the Pi 147 LED. Step S166
5, in step S1666, the sequence motor 1
The drive voltage of 44 is set. In step S1667, a software timer for about 10 msec during which the light amount of the LED of the SCPi 147 stabilizes is executed. In step S1668, the flag F_DMGGPS indicating the abnormality of the sequence clutch is cleared to "0". The process returns in step S1669.

By using this embodiment as described above,
Since the position can be detected while the current supplied to the photoelectric element is constant, the control can be simplified.

Further, for example, by turning on the power SW, the clutch can be initialized and the judgment level can be determined each time, so that the temperature environment of the use environment and the deterioration with time of the element itself are affected. It is possible to detect the position stably.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the third embodiment of the present invention will be described.

FIG. 174 is an enlarged view of the essential parts showing the clutch lever in the driving force transmission mechanism of the third embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, the lever for locking the clutch cam and the detecting portion thereof are shown as an integrally molded member, but the lever may be formed separately.
4, an example will be described. In this embodiment, the clutch cam portion and each drive system are equivalent to those in the first embodiment, and only the clutch lever portion will be described in FIG. 174 as an example in which the configuration of only the clutch lever is changed.

The clutch lever 201 is a member biased by a spring in the direction of the arrow, and a clutch cam (not shown) abuts on a part of the clutch lever 201, the locking portion 201a. Two pins are arranged on the upper surface of the clutch lever, and the detection plate 202 is adhesively fixed to the clutch lever 201 via the pins. The detection plate 20
Reference numeral 2 denotes a plate molded by a mold, and the detection unit SE point is monitored by a detection photo interrupter (PI) (not shown). The detection plate moves by the swinging motion of the clutch lever 201, and the SE point corresponds to the range of Xg to Xh to Xi.

Now, the range of Xg to Xi will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 175 shows a cross section taken along the line α-α ′ in FIG. 174. Therefore, the thickness of the mold detection plate is X
It is clear that the g part is L1, the Xh part is L2, and the Xi part is a hole.

A material having a certain degree of light blocking property is used as the material of the detection plate 202, and the transmittance is controlled to be about 25% at the thickness L2. Further, the transmittance becomes almost 0 at the thickness of L1 and the transmittance becomes 100% at the i portion which is the hole portion. That is, the detection unit S changes the PI output to 0% or 25% or 100% depending on the lift state of the clutch lever. Since the method of detecting the absolute position and the like is the same as that of the first embodiment, it will be omitted here.

As described above, it has been described that the same result as that of the first embodiment can be obtained by constructing the clutch lever and the detecting portion separately, but if this configuration is used, the detecting plate is directly connected to the clutch lever. Since it is not related, it is possible to metalize the clutch lever where stress concentrates on the locking part or to use a reinforced material, and since there is no place where stress occurs in the detection plate itself, dispersion of transmittance Also, considering only the moldability, the strength of the material is not required, so that it is possible to supply a stable detection unit at low cost.

Next, referring to FIGS. 176 to 177, a modified example in which the detector is provided separately will be described.

FIG. 176 is an enlarged view of essential parts showing a clutch lever in a driving force transmission mechanism which is a modification of the third embodiment.

In FIG. 176, the clutch lever 203
174 is equivalent to FIG. 174, and the portion not shown is the first
It is equivalent to the embodiment.

The detection plate 204 is positioned and fixed to the clutch lever 203 by a pin portion, but in the present embodiment, a photo-reflector (PR) is arranged as a detection element instead of PI in the detection portion SE point. FIG. 178 shows a perspective view of a main part, and a certain clearance is designed and arranged on one side of the detection plate 204. The terminal portion of the photo reflector is input to the processing circuit by a member (not shown).

The range monitored by the detection unit depending on the lifted state of the clutch lever 203 is Xj to X in FIG.
It varies in the range of k to XL. FIG. 177 shows a β-β ′ cross section in order to show the configuration of the Xj to XL portions.

As is clear from FIG. 177, the thickness L of the detection plate 204 is uniform in this example, and the PR 205 is arranged at an appropriate distance x from one end thereof.

Now, the output of the PR (photo reflector) changes depending on the difference in reflectance of the object to be detected.
Therefore, if Xj, Xk, and XL have the same reflectance, it is impossible to detect the position of the detection plate. Therefore, the present detection plate is printed in the range of Xj to XL, and the Xj portion has a reflectance of about 10%, the Xk portion has a reflectance of about 50%, and the XL portion has a reflectance of about 90%. . Of course, if a metal having a smooth surface is used as the material of the detection plate 204, printing is not required in the XL portion, and if the Xj portion is used as a hole and a clearance is secured so that there is no reflecting member behind it, Printing of the Xj part is also unnecessary. Further, the method of controlling the reflectance is not limited to printing, and it is also possible to obtain the effect by attaching a tape-shaped member or by molding the detection plate itself in multiple colors with a mold.

By using this embodiment as described above,
Since the reflectance of the detection part can be controlled by means such as printing or tape sticking, the material of the detection plate can be set arbitrarily, and PR can be configured by using only the space on one side of the detection plate. , Which can contribute to miniaturization of the mechanism.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, an example in which the absolute position is detected only in the initial position has been given, but in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the drive system, shutter / mirror system, and hoisting are used. It is the same that three types of power systems are arranged around the clutch part for the purpose of a clutch for switching to three types of system and rewinding system. However, in this embodiment, not only the initial position,
It is an object of the present invention to provide a method capable of detecting absolute positions of all three types of drive positions.

FIG. 179 is an enlarged view of essential parts showing a clutch lever in the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment.

In FIG. 179, the clutch cam 211 is
Similar to the first embodiment, it is a main part of the clutch part that is switched in one direction and driven in the other direction. Although the planetary gears, which are planets, and the first-stage gears of each drive system are not shown, they have the same configuration as in the first embodiment. Has been done.

The clutch lever 212 is spring-biased in the direction of the arrow by a spring (not shown), whereby the engaging portion 212a
However, it contacts the clutch cam and enables switching and locking. A point SE point monitored by a sensor (not shown) is provided at the tip of the clutch lever, and the sensor output corresponding to the point is input to the processing circuit. The clutch lever 212 is lifted by the cam surface when the cam rotates to the right, and is switched sequentially. However, in order to clarify the relationship between the cam and the lever, FIG.
This will be described with reference to 80.

FIG. 180 shows the lifted state of the cam expanded in the circumferential direction, and the state of FIG. 179 shows the state in which the locking surface at the shutter / mirror position 213 is locked.
That is, since the maximum lift position (outer periphery) of each cam is the same R, the clutch lever 212 corresponds to a position down from the outer periphery by the lift amount h3. By the way, the amount of down from the outer circumference was the same at other locking positions in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the down amount at the winding position is set to h1 and the down amount at the rewinding position is set to h2, and the three locking positions are different.

Therefore, in FIG. 179, the detected portion at the tip of the clutch lever is Xn with respect to the detection point SE.
Although the surfaces correspond to each other, the locking state changes, and the Xq surface corresponds to the SE point in the h1 down winding state and the Xp surface corresponds to the h2 down rewinding state. Further, in the maximum lifted area, the Xr plane corresponds to the SE point.
To clarify the structure of the Xn to Xr planes in the lever,
FIG. 181 shows a γ-γ cross section.

[0648] Xn to Xr with respect to the clutch lever thickness L
The ranges are set to have different thicknesses, the Xn range is set to L1, the Xp range is set to L2, the Xq range is set to L3, and the Xr range is formed to be a hole.

Here, L1 to L3 are constructed so that L1>L2> L3, and in this embodiment, L is 0.8 mm.
L1 is 0.7 mm, L2 is 0.4 mm, and L3 is 0.
Each is set to 2 mm.

Although it has been described in the first embodiment that the clutch lever is molded by the molding member and the transmittance thereof is controlled by the thickness, here, the transmittances at four positions are respectively set as follows. It is set.

Xn: 0%, Xp: 30%, Xq: 60
%, Xr: 100% Therefore, the output values of PI are different for the three driving positions, and the absolute position can be detected in any driving state.

182 to 184 and FIG. 230
Table 13 shows SCPi147 in the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of switching and controlling the LED current by driving each drive system.

Also in the fourth embodiment, the control method is the same as the method described in the first embodiment, but the hoisting system driving position and the rewinding system driving position can be discriminated. Therefore, the LED current of the SCPi 147 is also three types as compared with the two types of the first embodiment. Similarly, the judgment level is 3
It has become a kind.

FIG. 182 shows the output signal waveform of the SCPi 147 when the sequence motor 144 is driven in the switching direction when the LED current of the SCPi 147 is small. It is a figure showing the judgment result of ".

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the output signal waveform of the SCPi 147 in the same manner as above when the LED current of the SCPi 147 has an intermediate value.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing the output signal waveform of the SCPi 147 in the same manner as above when the LED current of the SCPi 147 is large.

Table 13 shown in FIG. 230 shows that the LED current of SCPi147 is large, medium, small and initial position, hoisting system position, rewinding system position, and "H" and "L" after the judgment of the signal output of SCPi147. It is a table showing the relationship with.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 157 will be described. This flowchart is based on SCPi147
7 shows a processing flow of a subroutine at the time of driving to the initial position (mirror drive system position) in the LED current switching method of FIG. In the following, description will be given step by step according to the flowchart.

In step S1670, the initialization necessary for driving the sequence clutch is performed. EEPRO
Expansion of adjustment data stored in M135 to RAM, setting of drive voltage of sequence motor 144, SCP
The determination of the output signal of i147, the setting of the AD channel, etc. are performed.

[0660] Next, in Step S1671, the SC
The LED current value of Pi147 is set to a value of "small". In step S1672, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the sequence clutch switching direction. In step S1673, the output signal of the SCPi 147 is set to A /
D conversion is performed, and the falling change of the signal is detected. Step S
In 1674, if a fall of the output signal of the SCPi 147 is detected, the process branches to step S1675, otherwise to step S1673, and continues until a fall is detected. In step S1675, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. Step S
Return at 1676.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 158 will be described. This flowchart is based on SCPi147
7 shows a process of a subroutine at the time of driving to the position of the hoisting drive system in the LED current switching system of FIG. The following is a sequential description according to the flowchart.

In step S1677, the process shown in FIG.
Similar to step S1670 in 7, initial setting is performed. In step S1678, L of SCPi147 is set.
Set the ED current value to a "medium" value. Step S167
At 9, the falling edges are counted. Set the "falling counter" to "1". It shows the number of falling edges from the initial position to the position of the hoisting drive system. In step S1680, sequence motor 144 is driven in the sequence clutch switching direction. In step S1681, the output signal of the SCPi 147 is set to A /
D conversion is performed, and the falling change of the signal is detected. Step S
In 1682, if there is a fall change, the process branches to step S1683, and if there is no fall change, the process branches to step S1681. In Step S1683,
Decrement the fall counter by "1". Step S1684
In the case where the value of the falling counter is "0", go to step S1685, otherwise go to step S1681.
Branch to.

In step S1685, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. In steps S1686 to S1688, SCPi1
The LED current value of 47 is set to a "small" value, and SCPi147
Detect the output signal of.

As shown in Table 13 shown in FIG. 230, "H" is shown when in the winding position. If "H" is not shown here, the drive may be abnormal.
In step S1689, initial position (mirror position)
After driving, the process branches to step S1678 again to drive the winding position. In step S1689a, if the abnormality is the second one, the drive is interrupted and the process branches to damage. In step S1690, the process returns.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 159 will be described. This flowchart shows a subroutine for driving to the position of the rewinding drive system.

First, in step S1691, initial setting is performed as in step S1670. Next, in step S1692, the LED current of the SCPi 147 is set to a “large” value. Next, step S1693.
At, the counter value for counting the falling edges is set to "2". Next, in step S1694, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the sequence clutch switching direction. Next, in step S1695, the signal output of the SCPi 147 is A / D converted, and the change in the falling edge is detected. If a fall change is detected in step S1696, the process branches to step S1697; otherwise, the process branches to step S1695.

[0667] In step S1697, the "falling counter" for counting the falling edges is decremented by "1". If the content of the "falling counter" is "0" in step S1698, the process branches to step S1699; otherwise, the process branches to step S1695. In step S1699, the sequence motor 144 is braked. Steps S1700 to S1702
At, the LED current of SCPi 147 is set to a value of "medium".

According to Table 13 in FIG. 230, since the output signal of SCPi 147 becomes "H" at the rewinding drive position,
If it does not become "H", it is determined to be abnormal and step S1703
Branch to.

In step S1703, initial position driving is performed once. In step S1703a, if the abnormality is the second one, the process branches to abnormality processing. If not, the process branches to step S1692 to drive the rewinding drive system position again. The process returns in step S1704.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the relationship between the output signal and the drive position and the level when the sequence motor 144 is driven in the switching direction of the sequence clutch when the LED current of the SCPi 147 is constant.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 160 will be described. This flowchart shows the initial position drive processing of the sequence clutch. The following is a sequential description according to the flowchart.

[0672] In step S1705, initial settings necessary to drive the sequence motor 144, such as motor drive voltage setting, A / D channel setting, and SCPi
The output signal of 147 is A / D converted and the storage area is cleared. The judgment levels 0 to 2 stored in the EEPROM in advance are expanded in the RAM.

[0673] Next, in step S1706, the SC
The LED current of Pi147 is read from the EEPROM and set. In step S1707, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the sequence clutch switching direction. In step S1708, the output signal of the SCPi 147 is A / D converted.

[0674] Steps S1709 and S1710
In, if the A / D converted value is smaller than the determination level 0, it is set to the “L” level, and only the “L” level data is added. In steps S1711 and S1712, if the A / D conversion value is smaller than the determination level 1, it is set to the "M1" level, and only the "M1" level data is added. In steps S1713 and S1714, if the A / D converted value is smaller than the determination level 2, the level is set to "M2" level, and only "M2" level data is added.

[0675] In step S1715, it is determined to be "H" level data, and only "H" level data is added. In step S1716, "L", "M1",
When the predetermined number of "M2" and "H" level data are respectively sampled, the tumbling ends, but when the predetermined number is not sampled, step S170 is performed.
Branch to 8 and continue processing.

[0676] Steps S1717 to S1724
In, the total sum of "L", "M1", "M2", and "H" levels is divided by the number, and the average value of each is obtained. The threshold levels 0 to 5 are calculated by the following equations (9) to (14).

Threshold level 0 = “L” level + hiss width 0 …………………… (9) Threshold level 1 = “M1” level−hiss width 1 ……………… (10) Threshold level 2 = "M1" level + hiss width 2 ......... (11) Threshold level 3 = "M2" level-His width 3 ........... (12) Threshold level 4 = "M2" level + Hiss width 4 ……………… (13) Threshold level 5 = “H” level-His width 5 ……………… (14) Each threshold level is stored in RAM.

[0678] In step S1725, SCPi1
The 47 signal output is A / D converted, and a signal change is detected based on the threshold levels 0 to 5 obtained above. Fall detection and level detection of the signal at that time "L" is level 0, "MI" is level 1, "M2" is level 2, "M"
3 "is set to level 3.

[0679] Steps S1726 and S1727
Then, in step S1725 described above, the SCPi14
As a result of detection of the signal of No. 7, when the signal is rising and the level is “0”, the process branches to step S1728. Otherwise, the process branches to step S1725 to continue the process. In step S1728, since the initial position of the sequence clutch is detected, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. The process returns in step S1729.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 161 will be described. This flowchart shows the process of driving the sequence clutch to the mirror drive system position.
The steps will be described below in order.

First, in step S1730, the initialization necessary to drive the sequence clutch is performed.
In step S1731, the LED of SCPi147
Set the current. In step S1732, the sequence motor 144 is driven. In step S1733, the SCPi147 signal output is A / D converted, and the change and level of the signal are detected. In steps S1734 and S1735, when the signal of SCPi147 is the falling edge and the level is "0", step S17
If not, the process branches to step S1733 and the process is continued. In step S1736, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. In step S1737, the process returns.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 162 will be described. This flowchart shows the processing when the sequence clutch is driven to the position of the hoisting drive system. The steps will be described below in order.

First, steps S1738 to S1740 are the same as steps S1730 to S1732. In step S1741, the SCPi147 signal is A / D converted, and the change and level of the signal are detected. In step S1742 and step S1743, when the signal of SCPi147 falls and the level is "1", step S1
744, otherwise branches to step S1741 to continue processing. In step S1744, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. Step S
Return at 1745.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 163 will be described. This flowchart shows the processing when the sequence clutch is rewound and driven to the position of the drive system. The following will be described step by step.

First, steps S1746 to S1.
748 is the above step S1730 to step S173.
Same as 2. In step S1749, the SCP
The i147 signal is A / D converted to detect the signal change and level. Steps S1750 and S1751
At the falling edge of the SCPi 147 signal and the level is "2", the process branches to step S1752.
Otherwise, the process branches to step S1749 to continue the process. In step S1752, the sequence motor 1
Brake 44 and stop. Step S175
Return with 3.

By using this embodiment as described above,
Since the absolute position of 3 or more driving positions can be detected only by the output of one sensor, the cam moves due to vibration while the power SW is off, or the battery is removed while the motor is being driven. Even in the abnormally stopped state due to this, the absolute position is immediately detected at the time of re-driving, so that it is possible to provide an inexpensive yet extremely safe clutch mechanism.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

When the construction shown in FIG. 13 is adopted as in the first embodiment, the transmittance of the clutch lever 1 is high,
When the amount of transmitted light is large, the photocurrent becomes large, the VCE of the phototransistor Q1 becomes small, and the phototransistor Q1 becomes saturated, so that the response speed of the phototransistor Q1 decreases, which is not suitable when a response speed is required. Is.

FIG. 186 is an electric circuit diagram showing the structure of the detection circuit portion of the photo interrupter in the fifth embodiment.

This circuit is a modification of the configuration of the photointerrupter (PI) detection circuit section in the first embodiment.

In FIG. 186, reference numeral I1 is a current source for controlling the LED: D1 in the photo interrupter PI509. The light emitted from the LED: D1 passes through the clutch lever 511 and reaches the phototransistor Q1.
Then, a current corresponding to the amount of light received flows through the phototransistor Q1 and is input to the PTR terminal of the IFIC 520. A waveform shaping circuit is built in the IFIC 520.
This circuit adds a hysteresis characteristic to the current input from the PTR terminal, converts it into a voltage waveform, and outputs it from the PIOUT terminal.

Now, the operation of the waveform shaping circuit section will be described.
First, the current IIN input from the PTR terminal flows through the transistor Q5. Then, a current of IIN / 2 tends to flow in Q4. On the other hand, the current IREF is flowing in the D / A converter, and the transistor Q3
Also, the current IREF is about to flow. The current source I3 is I
3 = IREF / 3 current source.

To make it easier to understand, first, SW1 is turned off to proceed with the discussion. When IIN = 0 [A], Q4 to Q
Since 3 has a larger ability to flow current, the potential at the point VA rises and becomes "H" level. Therefore, the inverted output "L" of PIOUT is output. If IIN is increased from this state and IIN> 2IREF, then Q4 has a greater ability to flow current than Q3. Then point V
The potential of A becomes "L" level and "H" from PIOUT.
Is output. Thus, at I3 = 0 [A], P
IOUT has a threshold value of IIN = 2IREF and IIN <2IRE.
PIOUT = “L” in F, PIOUT in IIN> 2IREF
= “H”.

However, in this state, for example, IIN
If noise is added to IIN for some reason when is close to 2IREF, PIOUT will chatter. To prevent this, PIOUT has a hysteresis characteristic. Specifically, I3 = IREF / 3 is set, and SW1 is turned on only when PIOUT = “L”. In this way, the direction in which the current decreases (Lo-Go
ing) threshold is not affected by I3, so 2IRE
It becomes F. Direction of increasing current (Hi-Goin
The threshold of g) is now PIOUT =
Since SW1 is on because it is "L", the threshold value is 2IREF + 2 / 3IREF = 8 / 3IREF,
A hysteresis width of 2/3 IREF can be provided. Since IREF can be adjusted stepwise by the D / A converter, the threshold value and hysteresis width can be set according to the current value used. Also, in this waveform shaping circuit, the PTR terminal for current input is about 0.7 from GND.
It is kept at a constant potential of [V]. IFI described above
The fifth embodiment is configured such that the waveform shaping circuit of C520 is connected to the output of PI 509, the output PIOUT of IFIC 520 is input to the CPU 120, and the signal is read by the CPU 120.

With such a structure, the output current of the phototransistor is directly processed in the IFIC, and VCE of the phototransistor is kept constant.
Since there is no saturation, the response delay of the phototransistor due to saturation is eliminated.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing a schematic structure of the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

The sixth embodiment has a mechanism for switching the drive system, which was switched to the three systems in the first embodiment, to the four systems.

The structure from the motor 401 to the sequence clutch 403 via the speed reduction system 402 is the same as that of the first embodiment. This embodiment is also applied to a single-lens reflex camera having a focal plane shutter, and the system driven by the motor 401 is a shutter / mirror system 404, a hoisting system 405, a rewinding system 406, and a screen switching system 40.
7

The screen switching system means, for example, switching between a normal screen and a panoramic screen, or switching between a normal screen and a half screen.

As in the first embodiment, the shutter / mirror system 404 is a cam for performing mirror up / down and shutter charge.

FIG. 188 is an explanatory view of the essential parts of the sequence clutch.

In the figure, reference numeral 411 is an output end of the speed reduction system 402, which is a sun gear capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions in association with the rotation direction of the motor 401. The clutch cam 413 is a cam having a shaft portion that holds the clutch gear 412 while applying friction, and four locking portions for restricting the stop position of the clutch gear are provided on the outer circumference thereof.

A clutch lever 414 corresponds to the locking portion, and the lever is biased in the direction of the arrow by a spring (not shown). The clutch lever 414 is integrally provided with a detection unit 420 having three kinds of transmittances, and a PI 419 which is a photointerrupter for detection is provided at the position. As the lever 414 is lifted by the cam and the switching progresses, the detection unit 420 reciprocates in the slit portion of the PI 419.

The state of FIG. 188 shows the initial position (shutter,
The clutch is switched to (mirror system),
By rotating the sun gear 411 in the direction of the arrow, the shutter
The first stage gear 415 of the mirror system can be driven.

Here, a circumferential cam development view of the clutch cam 413 is shown. It shows the relationship between the lift amount and the rotation angle. The cam is h2 down from the outer circumference only at the initial position. Further, the other locking positions are cams down from the outer periphery by h1, and the revolution of the clutch cam is restricted by the clutch lever at each locking position.

In FIG. 188, as in the first embodiment, the detecting section 420 has three kinds of regions having transmittances of approximately 0, 25% and 100%, and the transmittance corresponds to 0 at the initial position. At other locking positions, the clutch lever is stopped at a position corresponding to the transmittance of 25%.

FIG. 191 schematically shows the output of the PI 419 when the clutch is switched in the above mechanism.

When the sun gear in FIG. 188 is rotated in the direction opposite to the arrow direction, the cam can be continuously switched, but the output at that time is 0 from the PI because the initial position is the transmittance. Output is at a low level and is at a high level in the 100% transmission area corresponding to the top dead center of the cam.

Further, the locking positions other than the initial position each output between H and L, and if the intermediate level (1) is detected in FIG. 191, the screen switching position,
If (2) is detected, the hoisting possible position can be detected, and if (3) is detected, the rewinding possible position can be detected.

FIG. 189 shows a state in which the cam is being switched, and shows the state in which the lever is lifted against the spring force (detection section omitted).

In the above structure, reference numerals 404 to 406
Since the configurations of the shutter / mirror system, the hoisting system, and the rewinding system in FIG. 187 are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the screen switching mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, the screen switching principle will be described with reference to the internal perspective view of the present camera with reference to FIG.

The main body 427 has a mask portion corresponding to a photographing screen (normal size) in the central portion, and a cartridge chamber and a spool chamber on both sides thereof. A focal plane shutter 430 is arranged on the front surface (subject side) of the main body 427.

In the first embodiment, there is nothing interposed between the main body and the shutter, but in this camera, a mask 428 and a mask 429 which are thin plates are arranged. The two masks 428 and 429 are held slidably in the vertical direction with respect to the main body by a guide member (not shown).
Further, the masks 428 and 429 are provided with cam portions 428a and 429a that are substantially parallel to the optical axis, respectively. As a result, by applying a driving force from the cam portion, both the masks 428 and 429 move up and down within a limited range.

Various methods are known as so-called panorama switching to obtain a horizontally long screen (about 13 mm × 36 mm) by shielding the upper and lower parts of a normal photographing range (24 mm × 36 mm). Here, the roles of the masks 428 and 429 are similar to those of the panorama switching. The purpose is to block a part of the screen and obtain a horizontally long screen only when the masks 428 and 429 move inward, respectively. It is what

Actually, the above-mentioned cam portions 428a and 429a are actually used.
It has been described that the masks 428 and 429 are moved up and down by driving the. The driving mechanism will be described below.

FIG. 192 is a development view of the above-mentioned screen switching series, and is constructed such that adjacent gears mesh with each other.

The gear 419 is the first stage flat gear of the screen switching system, and corresponds to the gear 418 in FIG. 188. The gear 420 is a two-stage gear having a flat gear and a bevel gear, and the bevel gear portion meshes with the bevel gear portion of the gear 421. As a result, it becomes possible to use it as an output obtained by rotating the rotation direction of 419 by 90 °. The spur gear portion of the gear 421 meshes with the gear 422. The gear 422 has pins 425 on both sides,
A pin 426 is provided vertically and rotates integrally with the gear 422. Here, the pins 425 and 426 are provided at positions facing each other by 180 ° with respect to the center of the gear 422. The diameters of the pins 425 and 426 are provided on the masks 1 and 2. The cam portions 428a and 429a are configured to be slidably movable.

FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 are configuration diagrams of the main parts showing the actual screen switching from the front of the camera.
Is in a normal state. In this state, the masks 428, 4
Both 29 are retracted from the opening of the main body, and the photographed range is not affected by the mask.

The masks 428 and 429 are provided with a bent portion having a cam as shown in FIG. 194. When both masks are attached to the main body, the bent portions have a distance L as shown in FIG. Has a space.

A gear 422 is rotatably held in the space L by a member (not shown), and pins 425 and 426 provided on both sides are fitted in cam portions 428a and 429a of the mask, respectively. The gear 422 is the gear 421,
The gears 420 and 419 are sequentially meshed with each other, and each gear is also rotatably held by a member (not shown). Further, the gear 421 and the gear 422 are configured with the same number of teeth, and the phases that are once combined do not shift.

Further, in this embodiment, as a means for detecting the state of the mask, the detecting element 431 is provided on the side surface of the gear 421.
(Photo reflector) is arranged to monitor the state of the gear 421.

FIG. 193 shows the state in which the gear 421 is viewed from the detection element side.

The gear 421 is formed by a black molding member, and a tape member is attached so that the glossy portion and the semi-glossy portion are 180 ° opposite to each other. Except for the glossy part and the semi-glossy part, the reflectance is much lower than that of the semi-glossy part. Of course, it goes without saying that the detection element shown in FIG. 195 is arranged at a position where the tape portion can be detected.

From FIG. 195, it is apparent that the gear 422 is rotated when the gear 419 is rotated, and the mask change at that time will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 199. FIG. 197 shows a side view of the main part of the pin and the cam.
This corresponds to the 95 state. Now, it is assumed that a screen switching instruction is given by an operation member (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188, power can be transmitted by leftward rotation of the sun gear 411. Therefore, when the clutch is switched to the screen switching system and driving is started, the gear 422 rotates in the arrow direction in FIG. 197. Since the cam and pin are slidably fitted together, both masks are
28 moves downward and the mask moves upward (see FIG. 198).

When the rotation further proceeds from the state shown in FIG. 198, the state shown in FIG. 199 is reached. At this position, the mask 428 is the most lowered position, and the mask 429 is the most raised position. FIG. 196 shows this state.

[0729] Aperture of camera body (up and down 24mm)
Of this, about 9 mm is blocked by the masks 428 and 429, and only the central portion of about 13 mm can be exposed. In this state, the gear 421 is not shown in FIGS.
° It is stopped at the rotated position, and the glossy part corresponds to the detection element.

That is, the photo reflector P in the middle of switching
By detecting the photoreflector PR output corresponding to semi-gloss or gloss from the level where the R output is Low and stopping the gear train, the state of FIG. 195 or 196 can be created alternately. Of course, there is some overrun from the detection by the photoreflector PR until the motor actually stops, but it goes without saying that the detected surface of the gear 421 is provided at a position in consideration of the overrun.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the drive system is divided into four series and each is selected, so that the clutch always passes through the screen switching system during the sequence of one frame. When the clutch revolves, the clutch is provided with friction, and the revolution force is obtained by this, so if the screen switching system is unloaded, the gear 422 can rotate, although only slightly. There is a nature. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gear 420 or the gear 421 is provided with a friction for preventing movement, which prevents the power from being transmitted to the mask even if the gear 419 receives a force from the clutch during revolution.

Although the operation of the screen switching system has been described above, the screen switching can be driven by the common motor by using the clutch of this embodiment. Next, a modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described.

First, the concept of the drive system of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

The motor 463 built in the camera body drives the sequence clutch 465 via the speed reduction system 464, which is the same as the above-mentioned configuration. The sequence clutch 465 also has the same configuration in which the drive system can be selected by the clutch cam and the clutch lever, so the details will be omitted.
In this embodiment, there are three types of drive systems that can be switched.
Seeds are hoisting system 466, rewinding system 467, screen switching system 46.
8

In this embodiment, the shutter has a so-called lens shutter type structure built in the photographing lens, and is driven by a power source separate from the body side motor 463.

FIG. 200 is a sectional view of the essential part of the central portion of the present camera.

The main body 452 is provided with an opening for restricting the exposure range, and two masks 4 are provided in front of it (on the side of the subject).
55,456 are provided. A lens frame 451 including a taking lens is arranged in front of the mask, and a shutter is provided inside the lens frame together with a plunger (not shown) to control the exposure. A cartridge chamber 454 for holding a cartridge and a spool 453 for winding the film are provided at both ends of the main body 452, and the film is appropriately moved to the opening. A mask 4 is placed between the cartridge chamber 454 and the lens frame 451.
55, and pins for restricting the positions of the mask 456 are configured.

FIG. 201 is a front view of the mask driving section, and a pin fitted to the mask (462 in FIG. 200).
a, 462b) and the gear that rotates together with the gear 46
It is 2. Idle gears 461 to 458 are sequentially meshed with the gear 462, and the gear 457 and the gear 462, which are two stages of a flat gear and a bevel gear, are connected to each other. The gear 457 is provided to rotate the rotation direction by 90 °, and a bevel gear portion and a not-shown bevel gear from the sequence clutch side mesh with each other. The power system from the clutch (not shown) is equivalent to the above-mentioned example, that is, when the drive system is selected, the gear 462 can continuously rotate in one direction.

Next, the relationship between the mask portion and the gear 462 will be described. The gear 462 is rotatably held together with other gear trains by a holding member (not shown), and pins 462a and 462b are provided on the subject side and the film side, respectively.
Are configured integrally. The pin 462a is fitted into a cam portion provided on the mask 455 located on the film side, and the pin 462b is fitted into a cam portion provided on the mask 456. Further, both masks are provided with cams so that bosses provided integrally with the main body can be fitted from the main body side, and the relative position with respect to the opening is regulated by these cams.

Next, the relationship between the mask 455 and the gear 462 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 204.

FIG. 202 shows a normal photographing state, and the position corresponding to the opening 440 of the camera body is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. The gear 462 has a pin 46 on the back side.
2a is provided, but the mask 455 has
A cam 455a corresponding to the pin 462a is provided. Further, two bosses 452a and 452b are provided from the main body, and the cam 45 serving as a cam corresponding to the bosses is provided.
5b and 455c are located above and below the cam of 455a. Therefore, the mask 1 by these three bosses
The position is restricted, and the mask 455 moves with respect to the opening 440 by rotating the only movable pin 462a.

The gear 462 can be rotated only in one direction by the power of the motor, and when the motor power is transmitted in the screen switching direction, the gear 462 rotates in the arrow direction of FIG. The mask 455 moves along with the rotation of the gear 462, and when the pin 462a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 203, the mask 455 moves to the rightmost position.
At this position, as shown by the diagonal lines, the left side of the opening 440 is partially blocked, and this amount is equal to the total opening (24 × 3).
6 mm) and about 9 mm in the lateral direction. Gear 462
When is further rotated, the pin 462a is rotated to the position shown in FIG.

In this state, the mask 455 is at the lowest position. Similar to FIG. 203, the hatched portion is shielded, but in this state, about 5.
The area of 5 mm is blocked.

When the gear 462 further rotates from the state of FIG. 204, the mask 455 returns to the state of FIG. 202,
The mask 455 is completely retracted from the opening 440.

205 to 207 are for explaining the movement of the mask 456, and FIG. 205 is the same as FIG. 202.
The mask is completely retracted. Of course, in this state, the gear 462 is in the same position as in FIG.

On the mask 456, a cam 456a fitted to a pin 462b integral with the gear 462, and two cams 456b, 4 fitted to bosses 452a 452b integral with the main body.
56 c is provided and the position is regulated by these three members, which is the same as the mask 455.

As for the shape of the mask itself, the portion turned to the right of the opening is larger than the mask 455, and as is clear from the sectional view of FIG.
In order to dispose 2 inside the masks 455 and 456, the mask 456 is provided with a bent portion on the lower side. When the motor power is transmitted to the screen switching system, the gear 462 rotates in the direction of the arrow, but when the state shown in FIG. 206 rotates, the mask 456 moves to the leftmost side.

[0748] The gear 462 further rotates, and
When the mask 456 is rotated to the state of 7, the mask 456 moves to the uppermost side.

The rotation angle of the gear 462 from FIG. 205 to FIG. 206 is the same as the rotation angle from FIG. 202 to FIG. 203, and from FIG. 206 to FIG. Similarly, when returning to 205, the rotation angle of the gear 462 is the same. Further, in FIG. 203 and FIG. 206, and in FIG. 204 and FIG.

As is clear from the above, in this embodiment, it is possible to select three kinds of screen sizes by selecting the position of the gear 462 at three positions. Here, the three places mean that three types of so-called half state and so-called panoramic state can be selected from the normal time. Of course, if the position can be stopped at a position other than these three positions, it can be used with a mask size of intermediate level between normal and half, and between normal and panorama, providing a screen switching mechanism with an extremely wide range of use. It becomes possible to do.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described.

This embodiment is an embodiment in which the driving force transmission mechanism of the present invention is applied to another camera. At present, various patrones having a so-called feeding mechanism have been proposed in order to eliminate the complexity of setting the patrone.

Usually, these films are automatically sent out by rotating the shaft in the patrone that is rotated during rewinding in the opposite direction, and the user "draws and sets the film to the required length. It is possible to eliminate the series of operations described above.

However, when using a patrone of such a type, a member for driving the shaft of the patrone (hereinafter referred to as a fork gear) must be rotated in both directions. Therefore, a dedicated motor is used on the fork gear side, It required a complicated clutch mechanism.

In view of the above, the present embodiment will explain that the power system in the camera can be constructed with an extremely simple construction by using the planetary gear type clutch described above.

FIG. 209 is a conceptual diagram showing a schematic structure of a camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied, and showing only an essential part of the internal layout of the upper surface and the front surface of the camera. Is.

This camera is a so-called lens shutter type camera, and a lens frame 323 enclosing the taking lens 320 is arranged in the center of the body. On both sides of the lens frame 323, a cartridge 31 that can be inserted / removed by an opening / closing part (not shown).
8 and a spool 319 for winding the film. In addition, the viewfinder 3 is provided above the lens frame 320.
22 and a distance measuring unit 321 for detecting the distance to the subject by a so-called infrared active method.

FIG. 210 is a conceptual view of the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment.

The point that power is transmitted from the motor to the sequence clutch 301 via the reduction gear system is the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment, but in this embodiment, the motor is arranged inside the spool.

In this embodiment, the sequence clutch 301 can switch the power from the motor to four types of power systems. Here, the four types are used to extend the photographic lens for focusing. The lens drive system 302, the spool is rotated to wind the film, the winding system 303 is rotated, the fork gear is rotated in the feeding direction, and the feeding system 304 for preparing the film winding is rotated, and the fork gear is rotated in the rewinding direction. These are drive systems for the rewinding system 305.

FIG. 211 shows the upper surface of the main part of the driving force transmission mechanism in this embodiment, showing the arrangement of the gears.
The sun gear 316 is a gear that is directly rotated in the forward / reverse direction from the motor, and the clutch gear 317 is supported by a clutch cam (not shown) to perform revolution and rotation. Of course, the clutch cam is regulated by a lever (not shown) as in the above-described example.

The state of FIG. 210 is a state in which the clutch gear 317 meshes with the first stage gear of the lens drive system and the AF 311 can be rotated via a gear train (not shown). A first stage gear of the hoisting system, a sending gear 313, and a rewinding gear 314 are also arranged on the revolution locus of the clutch gear. The sending system means that the rewinding system is rotated in the opposite direction. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sending gear and the rewinding gear are connected by the idle gear 338 and the idle gear 339 to enable the fork gear to rotate in both directions. Here, it goes without saying that the two idle gears are sufficiently retracted from the revolution locus of the clutch gear.

FIG. 212 is a development view of the cam portion of the clutch cam that supports the clutch gear.

In this embodiment, only one position has the smallest lift amount so that the lens driving position can be the initial position. Other three hoisting system 327, delivery system 328,
The rewind system 329 has the same lift amount and is controlled by counting the number of pulses from the initial position.

Next, the film feeding detection mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 213. This figure also shows only the layout of the main part, but this figure is when the camera is viewed from the subject side, and the central photographing range (mask) 324 is actually exposed 24 ×
The range is 36 mm. On the lower right side of the mask, a feeding detection element 325 capable of monitoring the film moving behind the mask is arranged.

In this example, the film is not shown, but a case of a type having eight perforations per frame will be described as an example. The element 325 is composed of a photoreflector, and the sensor unit faces the perforation. As a result, as the film moves, an output corresponding to perforation is obtained from the element 325.

Next, the structure of the lens drive system will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216.

FIG. 214 is a sectional view showing the main part in the vicinity of the lens frame.
Although the taking lens 320 and the shutter 335 are shown as a pair for convenience, the number of lenses is plural, and the shutter is not limited to the rear of the lens, and the type provided between the lenses is the same. Now, the lens frame 331 including the lens and the shutter can be guided and moved in the optical axis direction by the guide shaft 333 and the guide shaft 334.

The lens frame 331 is biased toward the film side (imaging surface side) by the autofocus spring 337. A cam gear 332 is provided on the opposite side biased by the autofocus spring 337, and the cam gear 332 is provided with a cam surface 332a as shown in FIG. 215. The protrusion of the lens frame abuts on the cam surface, whereby the feeding position of the lens is regulated by the cam.

Next, the cam surface will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216.

As a feature of the present embodiment, since power is transmitted to each drive system only in one direction, the lens drive system also keeps rotating in one direction so that the payout operation from infinity to the close distance can be repeated. It is configured.

FIG. 216 is a development view of the cam surface portion, and the initial position of the camera is the infinity position, that is, the state where the lens frame is not lifted by the cam at all. The cam surface is smoothly lifted from the initial position and reaches the closest position. The contact position of the lens frame protrusion changes due to the rotation of the cam, and the lens is extended. However, the contact part lifts by the cam rotating 360 ° from the initial position.
It goes down from the x position and returns to the initial position.

As described above, by rotating the cam gear, the lens drive system can perform the feeding operation and the reset operation.

Although the cam control will not be described in detail, a necessary feeding amount is calculated based on the data from the distance measuring section, the cam gear is stopped and controlled by a sensor (not shown) to a predetermined position, and the post-exposure reset control is performed. Needless to say.

Next, the auto-loading operation for setting the film (patrone) in this camera will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 217.

The main feature of this camera is that it uses a patrone having a feed-out mechanism. However, since this camera has a feed-out mechanism in the patrone itself, it has a large rear lid like an existing camera. You do n’t have to
There is a small opening / closing part required for inserting the cartridge.

A switch (hereinafter referred to as BKSW34) is provided in the opening / closing part.
8) is provided, and the switch is configured to be turned off in the closed state and turned on in the open state.

Further, the release SW 341 is a two-stage type switch, and the 1st. Distance measurement, photometry, and lens extension with the release 2nd. It is a type that performs exposure lens resetting and winding at release.

The motor 342 is the only motor used in this camera, and is constructed so that clutch rotation can be performed by CCW rotation and power transmission can be performed by CW rotation.

[0780] The clutch cam 343 is a cam locked by a clutch lever having a developed shape shown in Fig. 213, and a cam for supporting a clutch gear. The clutch lever 344 is biased by the spring toward the cam surface of the clutch cam, and is lifted following the cam. Clutch PI3
45 is a sensor for monitoring the detected portion of the clutch lever, as in the first embodiment.

The spool 346 is of a type having a built-in motor 342, and a protrusion (claw) for holding perforations is provided on the outer periphery of the spool 346.
The feeding PR 347 corresponds to the element 325 described in FIG. 213. The autofocus cam 349 is shown in FIG.
15, as described in FIG. 216, the lift min
Corresponds to the infinite initial position.

The autofocus pulse 350 is a pulse output by a sensor provided in a lens feeding system (not shown) and is a pulse which is interlocked with the rotation of the cam.
The AFSW 351 is a cam position detection switch, and detects the initial position and the pulse count start position during feeding by turning the switch on and off. The fork gear 352 is a gear that is normally and reversely rotated by the above-described sending system and rewinding system.

Now, a series of auto-loading operations from the insertion of the cartridge into the camera until the photographing becomes possible will be described step by step.

First, by closing the lid of the cartridge, the BKSW 348 changes from on to off (T
101). In response to this, the control circuit CCWs the motor 342.
Rotate in the direction. That is, in the initial state, the sequence clutch meshes with the lens drive system, so the clutch gear is revolved in order to switch the clutch to the delivery system.

[0785] The clutch PI is almost 100% in the initial position.
The light-shielded detected portion corresponds, and the output is at the low level. As the cam revolves, the clutch shifts to the hoisting system. As a result, the lever 344 is lifted, and becomes a lift max region before the hoisting system. PI345 here
Output corresponds to the 100% transparent part of the lever,
High level.

For the switching, since it is necessary to first feed the film in the cartridge, the clutch cam is further continuously rotated. That is, the clutch cam is performed until it corresponds to the delivery system, but in this camera, the time T102 when the PI 345 outputs the second trailing edge is the time when the switching to the delivery system is completed, and the motor is immediately stopped upon receiving T102. To be done.

By the way, although it has been described with reference to FIG. 212 that the lift amount of the lever can be stopped at the most lowered position only in the initial position, the level of the detected portion at the other three lift amounts has a transmittance of about 25%. Is configured to correspond to PI345. Therefore, the output of PI does not shift from H to L at the second fall at T102, but falls to an intermediate level between H and L as shown in FIG. 217. By rotating the motor CW in the state of T102, the delivery system can be rotated.

After the motor is stopped by T102, T103
This is the point at which the CW rotation is started, and the clutch cam, which was slightly overrun due to the rotation, starts the engagement mesh transmission to the delivery system. The feed PR 347 is configured to output High in the absence of the film. Therefore, in the perforation portion, the output of H is repeated at the hole portion and the output of L is repeated at the other base portion.

Explaining in combination with FIG. 213, when the fork gear starts to rotate in the feeding direction, in the configuration shown in FIG. 213, the film moves from left to right as seen from the subject side. Therefore, even if the film moves to the spool side, no PR34
No pulse is output from 7.

The point where the leading edge of the film reaches the detection portion of PR325 is T112. As a result, the PR output shifts from H to L. Furthermore, the pulse corresponding to the perforation is output according to the movement.

By the way, the purpose of the main feeding is to guide the film to a position where it can be held by the claws of the spool. Therefore, in this camera, the fall of the output of PR347 is counted from the timing of T112.

With this camera, it is approx. 5 from PR347.
/ 8 frames, the state in which the film is sent to the spool side is the optimal state for holding by the spool, so the CW rotation of the motor is continued until the pulse is counted 5 times. When the fifth trailing edge is detected at T104, the motor immediately stops, and the feeding is completed. Next, after the motor stops at T104, the motor is rotated by CCW again (T105) and the clutch is switched to the hoisting system. When switching from the delivery system to the hoisting system, the rewinding system and the autofocus system (lens feeding system) are passed. Therefore, the output of the PI 345 falls to the intermediate level at T113 and to the Low level at T114, respectively, but these are points that do not need to be stopped, and fall at the next intermediate level of T114 and T106.
At, it is judged that the clutch has moved to the hoisting system and the motor is stopped. After stopping at T106, the motor starts CW rotation at T107. When the clutch meshes with the winding system at T107, the spool starts rotating in the winding direction.

However, the film and the spool are not wound yet at the initial stage of the rotation of the spool, and when the claw portion of the spool rotates to the film perforation locking position, the film and the spool start to move integrally for the first time. That is, with respect to the rotation of the spool, the output of the feeding PR 347 takes a little time, is held by the claws, and then outputs a pulse.

If an output linked to the motor by the feeding PR is obtained, the film is surely wound up. If the film is fed by a necessary amount and stopped, the camera can stand by in the shooting state of the first frame. Become. In this camera, the amount of blank feed is set to 4 frames. That is, by counting the feeding PR pulse from (1) 32 times, T1
The motor is stopped by 08, and the four-frame jump feed is completed.

By the way, in this camera, since the cartridge has a type in which the central axis thereof is interlocked with the film and may rotate, the fork gear 352 of FIG. 217 rotates in the feeding direction during film winding. In FIG. 217, the fork gear is in a state of being rotated via the shaft of the cartridge at T115 to T116 indicated by broken lines in the fork gear.

The timing chart shows T115 to T11.
Since the portion 6 is not transmitted from the clutch side but is rotated by the film, it is shown by a broken line for the sake of distinction.

When the motor is stopped in response to T108, the film stands by at the photographing position.

Finally, the motor starts CCW rotation from T117 in order to put the autofocus system in the standby state. Since the sequence clutch is currently a hoisting system, it is necessary for the autofocus system to pass through the sending system and the rewinding system. Therefore, after confirming the intermediate level at two locations, the motor is immediately stopped by the Low level determination at T109.

[0799] The autofocus system needs to be on standby at a surely meshed position in order to shorten the time lag in actual photographing. Therefore, in this camera T1
Although the clutch cam is stopped by the autofocus system by 19, the AF cam reset operation is performed to obtain a normal state from a slightly overrun state.

That is, the motor is again C by T110.
Start W rotation. The AF pulse 350 outputs a pulse accompanying the rotation of the autofocus system. AFSW351
Is on at the initial position, but is turned off immediately before the lift of the AF cam (T118). The motor continues to rotate, and when it passes through the top dead center of the AF cam 349, it stops at almost the same time as the AFSW off timing T111.

[0801] Of course, the AF pulse 350 up to this point
Is outputting continuous pulses. Since the purpose of this reset operation was to make the AF cam stand by in the initial state, the AF pulse is not used, but in the actual shooting, the necessary number of feeds calculated from the distance measurement data from the OFF timing T118 of the AFSW 351 is used. The corresponding number of pulses is counted, the motor is stopped, the exposure is performed, and then the reset operation is performed.

[0806] By stopping the motor by T111, the clutch cam is stopped in a state where it is surely meshed with the autofocus system, and thus, all autoloading is completed.

[0803] In normal shooting, 1st. , 2nd.
Shooting is performed by the release, but the sending system is not required. Therefore, after the clutch is switched from the autofocus system to the hoisting system, the output system and the rewinding system are passed, and the AF cam is reset again by the autofocus system to perform a series of one-frame shooting. . The rewinding can be similarly realized by detecting the film end by a known method and rewinding, or rewinding midway by the operation member, or by switching the clutch in any state.

As described above, according to this embodiment, even in a camera using a cartridge having a feeding mechanism,
Since it can be realized by a single motor without the need to add a dedicated motor or a clutch mechanism to operate the delivery mechanism, it is possible to provide an extremely small and inexpensive camera.

As described above, by using the above-described embodiments, the power of a single motor can be transmitted to three or more drive systems with a simple structure in which the rotation direction of the motor is switched and controlled. Moreover, since the switching state can be detected by a single detection member, it is possible to provide an extremely small and inexpensive clutch mechanism.

Further, since the absolute position can be detected with a single detecting member, it is possible to provide a mechanism with extremely high safety.

Depending on the embodiment, there are three types of drive systems and four drive systems.
Although an example of switching to a different type has been disclosed, as is clear from the characteristics of the camera, there is no limit to the switching position and the number can be increased or decreased as necessary, so this mechanism is extremely versatile.

Although each of the above-described embodiments discloses an example applied to a camera, the mechanism is widely applicable to fields other than a camera driven by a motor.

[0809]

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a driving force transmission mechanism capable of surely detecting an absolute position with a single sensor.

[Brief description of drawings]

FIG. 1 is a top view of a camera to which a driving force transmission mechanism according to a first embodiment of the present invention is applied.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the camera shown in FIG.

FIG. 3 is a bottom view of the camera shown in FIG.

4 is a right side view showing a state in which a strobe is housed in the camera shown in FIG.

5 is a rear view of the camera shown in FIG.

FIG. 6 is a right side view showing a state in which stroboscopic photography is performed in the camera shown in FIG.

7 is an enlarged top view of a main part showing a mode setting member in the camera shown in FIG.

8 is a central cross-sectional top view of the camera shown in FIG.

FIG. 9 is a WIDE end of a photographing optical system in the camera,
That is, it is a side view showing a state in which the focal length f = 28 mm.

FIG. 10 is a side view showing a standard state of a photographing optical system in the camera, that is, a state in which a focal length f = 70 mm.

FIG. 11: TELE of a photographing optical system in the camera
It is a side view showing a state where an end, that is, a focal length f = 110 mm.

FIG. 12 is a side view showing a retracted state of a photographing optical system in the camera.

FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the inside of the camera.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing power distribution in a power unit in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing the principle of a sequence clutch in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 16 is a model diagram showing a clutch portion in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 17 is a model diagram showing a clutch portion in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 18 is a model diagram showing a clutch portion in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a model diagram showing a clutch portion in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 20 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a planetary gear in the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is an enlarged sectional view showing another example of the planetary gears in the first embodiment.

FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of a gear train from the motor to the clutch portion in the first embodiment.

FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view showing a gear train of the shutter / mirror system in the first embodiment.

FIG. 24 is a side view showing the SM cam gear in the first embodiment. 58b is a cross-sectional view showing 58b.

FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view showing a cam for driving the mirror, taken along the line AA ′ in FIG. 24.

FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view showing the shutter charging cam, taken along the line BB ′ in FIG. 24.

FIG. 27 is a normal stop position (mirror down position) between the SM cam gear and the mirror lever in the first embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship when

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship when the SM cam gear and the mirror lever in the first embodiment are in the mirror-up position.

FIG. 29 is a perspective view of a main part of a mirror system in the first embodiment.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram of the mirror operation of the mirror system in the first embodiment, in which each lever is modeled.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram in which each lever is modeled as a mirror operation of the mirror system in the first embodiment.

32 is a schematic view of the focal plane shutter used in the camera shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from the subject side.

FIG. 33 is a top view of the vicinity of the BB ′ cross section in FIG. 24 seen from above the camera.

FIG. 34 is a top view of the vicinity of the BB ′ cross section in FIG. 24, viewed from the upper side of the camera.

FIG. 35 is a bottom view of the timing board in FIG. 23 as viewed from the bottom surface side.

FIG. 36 is a developed perspective view showing a gear train of the hoisting system in the first embodiment.

FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing a gear train of the rewinding system in the first embodiment.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever in the first embodiment.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever in the first embodiment.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever in the first embodiment.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever in the first embodiment.

42 is a sectional view showing a CC ′ section of the clutch lever shown in FIG. 38. FIG.

FIG. 43 is a developed view of the circumference including the cam surface of the clutch cam in the first embodiment.

FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a clutch lever and a photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an application example of the position detection device in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 46 is a view showing the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment,
6 is a timing chart illustrating a clutch mechanism during a shooting operation.

FIG. 47 is an electric circuit diagram showing a configuration of an electric circuit of the position detection mechanism in the camera.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an output signal waveform of the photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an output signal waveform of the photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an output signal waveform of the photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an output signal waveform of the photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

71 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

72 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 77 is a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied, where the aperture is narrowed down from the mirror up, the shutter release mirror is down, the aperture is opened, and the film is wound up.
It is a flowchart which shows a part of subroutine which comprises a series of shutter release sequences of shutter charge.

FIG. 78 is a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism according to the first embodiment is applied, where the aperture is narrowed down from the mirror up, the shutter release mirror is down, the aperture is opened and the film is wound up.
It is a flowchart which shows a part of subroutine which comprises a series of shutter release sequences of shutter charge.

FIG. 79 is a view showing a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.
It is a flowchart which shows a part of subroutine which comprises a series of shutter release sequences of shutter charge.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a part of shutter release processing operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a part of shutter release processing operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a part of shutter release processing operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a part of shutter release processing operation of the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

85 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

[Fig. 94] Fig. 94 is a flowchart showing a prohibition processing operation of all interrupts in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a remote controller signal processing operation at a destination to which an interrupt is branched by a remote controller signal in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an integration time detection processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

103 is a flowchart showing a threshold level adjustment processing operation at the time of position detection in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

104 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a winding drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

FIG. 105 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a winding drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

FIG. 106 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a winding drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

FIG. 107 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a hoist drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

108 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a hoist drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a part of an initial setting processing operation for driving the sequence clutch mechanism in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a part of an initial setting processing operation for driving the sequence clutch mechanism in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

111 shows a part of a subroutine for A / D converting the SCPi signal at the time of the sequence clutch switching drive in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied to detect the trailing edge of the signal. It is a flowchart.

FIG. 112 shows a part of a subroutine for A / D converting the SCPi signal at the time of the sequence clutch switching drive in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied to detect the trailing edge of the signal. It is a flowchart.

113 shows a part of a subroutine for A / D converting the SCPi signal at the time of the sequence clutch switching drive in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied to detect the trailing edge of the signal. It is a flowchart.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the brake processing operation of the sequence clutch drive motor in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a processing operation for averaging sorted A / D values in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom drive processing operation in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom drive processing operation in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom drive processing operation in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine for driving zoom from an arbitrary position to an optical wide position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

120 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine for driving zoom from an arbitrary position to an optical wide position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a subroutine used at the time of adjustment in the process of driving the zoom to an arbitrary position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a subroutine for zoom driving to a brake start position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a process of driving zoom from an arbitrary position to a retracted position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom motor braking process in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom motor braking process in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a part of processing for initializing zoom driving in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a part of processing for initializing zoom driving in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a part of processing of ZMPi output signals and ZMPR output signals in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a part of processing of the ZMPi output signal and the ZMPR output signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a part of processing of ZMPi output signals and ZMPR output signals in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

131 is a flowchart showing ZMPR determination processing in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a process of detecting a rising edge and a falling edge of a ZMPi signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a part of processing relating to mechanical in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing a part of processing relating to mechanical in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a part of processing relating to a zoom initial in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a part of processing relating to a zoom initial in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a process regarding initials of a mirror and a shutter in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing a part of a sequence clutch initial position driving process in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism according to the second embodiment of the present invention is applied.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a part of an initial position drive process of the sequence clutch in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a part of the initial position drive processing of the sequence clutch in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a part of a sequence clutch initial position driving process in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a part of a sequence clutch initial position driving process in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process of sequentially storing A / D values in a work area and adding the A / D values in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied. Is.

[FIG. 144] FIG. 144 is a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied, in which a sequence clutch is used as a mirror drive system drive position GPSMiR and a hoist system drive position GPSW.
8 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine process of driving to D, the rewind system drive position GPSRW.

[FIG. 145] FIG. 145 is a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied, in which a sequence clutch is used as a mirror drive system drive position GPSMiR and a hoist system drive position GPSW.
8 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine process of driving to D, the rewind system drive position GPSRW.

146] In the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied, the sequence clutch is used as a mirror drive system drive position GPSMiR and a hoist system drive position GPSW.
8 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine process of driving to D, the rewind system drive position GPSRW.

FIG. 147 is a sequencer clutch mirror drive system drive position GPSMiR, hoisting system drive position GPSW in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.
8 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine process of driving to D, the rewind system drive position GPSRW.

148] FIG. 148 is a process to drive the sequence clutch to the initial position when the sequence clutch is not at the initial position at the time of driving to the winding / rewinding drive system position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied. 3 is a flowchart showing a part of FIG.

[FIG. 149] FIG. 149 is a process of driving a sequence clutch to an initial position when the sequence clutch is not at the initial position at the time of driving to the winding / rewinding drive system position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied 3 is a flowchart showing a part of FIG.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process of A / D converting the output signal of SCPi in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a part of a process of detecting a signal change from the result of A / D conversion of the SCPi output signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a part of a process of detecting a signal change from the result of A / D conversion of the SCPi output signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing a part of a process of detecting a signal change from a result of A / D conversion of an output signal of SCPi in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a part of a process of detecting a signal change from the result of A / D conversion of the SCPi output signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing a braking process in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a process of performing initial setting necessary for sequence clutch switching drive in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process at the time of driving to an initial position in the LED current switching system of SCPi in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment of the present invention is applied.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process at the time of driving to a hoisting drive system position in the SCPi LED current switching system in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process for driving to a rewinding drive system position in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an initial position drive process of the sequence clutch in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a process when the sequence clutch is driven to the mirror drive system position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a process for driving the sequence clutch to the position of the hoisting drive system in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a process when the sequence clutch is rewound and driven to the position of the drive system in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of a sounding cycle of PCV in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing another example of the sounding cycle of PCV in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing another example of the sounding cycle of PCV in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 167 is a graph showing an output voltage of SCPi in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.
FIG. 6 is a diagram in which the vertical axis represents the result of D / D conversion and the horizontal axis represents the rotational position of the sequence clutch cam.

168] FIG. 168 is a graph showing an output voltage of SCPi of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.
FIG. 6 is a diagram in which the vertical axis represents the result of D / D conversion and the horizontal axis represents the rotational position of the sequence clutch cam.

169] FIG. 169 is a lens frame cam rotation angle driven by a zoom motor in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied, and ZM output in accordance with rotation of the lens frame.
It is a diagram showing PR output signal and ZMPi output signal, and also a retracted position, a wide angle, a tele position, and other relations.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing how the output signal of the ZMPR is A / D converted and “H” or “L” is determined in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 171 is a timing chart explaining the operation of the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 172 is a timing chart explaining the operation of the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment.

FIG. 173 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment.

FIG. 174 is an enlarged view of a main part showing a clutch lever in the driving force transmission mechanism of the third embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 175 is a sectional view showing an α-α ′ section in FIG. 174.

FIG. 176 is an enlarged view of a main part showing a clutch lever in a driving force transmission mechanism of a modified example of the third embodiment.

FIG. 177 is a sectional view showing a β-β ′ section in FIG. 176;

FIG. 178 is a perspective view showing a photo reflector in the driving force transmission mechanism of the third embodiment.

FIG. 179 is an enlarged view of essential parts showing a clutch lever in the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth example of the present invention.

FIG. 180 is a development view of the lifted state of the cam in the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment, which is developed in the circumferential direction.

181 is a cross-sectional view showing a γ-γ ′ cross section in FIG. 179. FIG.

FIG. 182 is a LE of SCPi in the fourth embodiment.
It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of switching and controlling D current by drive for every drive system.

FIG. 183 is a LE of SCPi in the fourth embodiment.
It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of switching and controlling D current by drive for every drive system.

FIG. 184 is an LE of SCPi in the fourth embodiment
It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of switching and controlling D current by drive for every drive system.

FIG. 185 is an LE of SCPi in the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a relationship between an output signal when the sequence motor is driven in the switching direction of the sequence clutch, and a drive position and a level when the D current is constant.

FIG. 186 is an electric circuit diagram showing a configuration of a detection circuit unit of the photo interrupter in the fifth example of the present invention.

FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a driving force transmission mechanism of a sixth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 188 is an explanatory view of essential parts of a sequence clutch in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 189 is an explanatory view of a main part of a sequence clutch in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 190 is a development view of the lifted state of the cam in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment, which is developed in the circumferential direction.

FIG. 191 is a diagram simply showing the output of the photo interrupter when the clutch is switched in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 192 is a development view of a screen switching series in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 193 is a side view showing a state in which the gear 421 in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment is viewed from the detection element side.

FIG. 194 is an internal perspective view of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment is applied.

195 is a main-part configuration diagram showing a normal state of the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194;

196 is a main-part configuration diagram showing a small screen state of the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194;

197 is an enlarged side view of an essential part showing the mask in the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194;

FIG. 198 is an enlarged side view of an essential part showing the mask in the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194.

FIG. 199 is an enlarged side view of an essential part showing the mask in the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194;

[FIG. 200] FIG. 200 is a cross-sectional view of main parts of a central portion showing a camera to which a driving force transmission mechanism of a modified example of the sixth embodiment is applied.

201 is a front view of the mask driving section in the camera shown in FIG. 200. FIG.

202 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 455 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

203 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 455 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

FIG. 204 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 455 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

205 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 456 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

206 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the mask 456 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

207 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 456 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

FIG. 208 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a drive system of a drive force transmission mechanism of a modified example of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 209 is a conceptual diagram showing a schematic configuration of a camera to which a driving force transmission mechanism of a seventh embodiment of the present invention is applied.

FIG. 210 is a conceptual diagram of the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 211 is a top view of essential parts of the driving force transmission mechanism in the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 212 is a development view of a cam portion of a clutch cam that supports a clutch gear in the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 213 is an explanatory diagram of a film feeding detection mechanism in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 214 is a main-portion cross-sectional view near a lens frame in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 215 is an enlarged perspective view showing a cam gear in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 216 is a development view of a cam surface portion of a cam gear in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 217 is a timing chart explaining an automatic loading operation at the time of loading a film cartridge in the kamera to which the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 218 is a table 1 for explaining flags F_TSYS0, 1 and operating states of the camera in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

219 is a table 2 for explaining flags F_CNDT0, 1 and the state of the film inside the camera in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

[FIG. 220] A mirror F / U subroutine and a flag F_U for controlling the subroutine in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.
Table 3 for explaining the relationship between TY3 and TY4, mirror, and diaphragm drive
Is.

[FIG. 221] FIG. 221 is a table 4 for explaining interrupt factors and factors permitted depending on the state of the camera in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

222 is a bit map showing interrupt factors in Table 4 in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 223 is a bit map showing interrupt factors in Table 4 in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 224 is a table 7 showing internal flag settings at the time of a sequence clutch switching operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 225 is a table 8 showing the relationship between changes in the zoom photo reflector and zoom photo interrupter during zoom driving and the zoom pulse counter in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 226 is a table 9 showing the relationship between changes in the zoom photo reflector and zoom photo interrupter during zoom driving and the zoom pulse counter in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

227] In a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied, a retracted position in which a lens is housed in the camera, a state in which the lens is extended to a wide position during shooting, and a flag F
13 is a table 10 showing the relationship between _ZMSNK and flag F_LNSSNK.

228] In a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied, a retracted position in which a lens is housed in the camera, a state of being extended to a wide position at the time of shooting, and a flag F
13 is a table 11 showing the relationship between _ZMSNK and flag F_LNSSNK.

[FIG. 229] FIG. 229 is a table 12 illustrating a sequence clutch drive process in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 230 is a table 13 for explaining a method of switching the LED current of SCPi in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

[Explanation of symbols]

 1 ... Shooting lens 2 ... Release button 11 ... Mirror frame Timing chart. 12 ... Mirror box 13 ... Shutter unit 14 ... Motor 15 ... Patrone 16 ... Spool chamber 22 ... Power unit 26 ... Shutter charge lever 27 ... Mirror drive lever 31,41 ... Sun gear 32,43 ... Planet gear 33,45 ... Shutter Mirror drive system first stage gears 34, 46 ... Winding drive system first stage gears 35, 44 ... Rewind drive system first stage gears 36, 42 ... Clutch cam 37, 47 ... Clutch lever

─────────────────────────────────────────────────── ───

[Procedure amendment]

[Submission date] July 28, 1994

[Procedure Amendment 1]

[Document name to be amended] Statement

[Correction target item name] Full text

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

[Document name] Statement

[Title of Invention] Driving force transmission mechanism

[Claims]

Detailed Description of the Invention

[0001]

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a driving force transmitting mechanism, and more particularly to a driving force transmitting mechanism for a driving force transmitting mechanism motor for switching the power of a single driving source to three or more independent driving systems.

[0002]

2. Description of the Related Art Heretofore, various driving force switching mechanisms have been proposed for switching a single driving force to a plurality of driving systems for use in devices such as cameras.
Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 648 discloses a driving force switching mechanism that switches the driving force of a single motor to a plurality of transmission mechanisms by forward and reverse rotation operations.

This technical means uses the driving force of the single motor as a driving source for shutter charging, mirror driving, etc. by its forward rotation operation, and the driving force of the motor by the reverse rotation operation to wind up and rewind the film. It is designed to be switched so as to be used as a driving source of each.

Further, Japanese Patent Application No. 4-60548 proposes a technical means for performing a clutch switching operation by rotation in one direction by a rotary clutch and driving a non-driving mechanism by rotation in the other direction.

On the other hand, Japanese Patent Application No. 3-309336 proposes a drive mechanism which selects a plurality of driven gears using a single motor by combining a sun gear and a planetary gear.

Further, Japanese Patent Application No. 4-268878 proposes a switching mechanism for detecting the reset position from the pulse width of a signal being driven.

[0007]

However, in the technical means disclosed in JP-A-1-287648, the locking member of the planetary gear is switched by the section switching member, so that a complicated mechanism is required and a camera or the like is required. Makes it difficult to reduce the size of the device and causes an increase in cost.

Further, the technical means proposed in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application No. 4-60548 makes it difficult to detect the absolute position of the rotary clutch, while the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application No. 3-3.
In the technical means proposed in No. 09336, during the release operation, a series of release operations are performed after selecting the first-stage gear of the drive system that drives the autofocus lens, which causes a release time lag and deteriorates the operational feeling. Invited.

Further, since the technical means proposed in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application No. 4-268878 has no means for detecting the initial position, once the initial position is erroneously recognized due to a malfunction or the like, the operation continues in this state. There is a risk that it will end up.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to solve the above problems and to provide a driving force transmission mechanism capable of surely detecting an absolute position by a single sensor. And

[0011]

In order to achieve the above object, the driving force transmission mechanism according to the present invention constantly meshes with a sun gear which is driven by a single drive source and rotates in a forward and reverse direction. A planetary gear, a gear connecting member that connects the central axes of the sun gear and the planetary gear to each other, and a revolution of the planetary gear by allowing the sun gear to rotate in one direction and a revolution of the planetary gear in the other direction. A rotation control member that regulates the rotation of the planetary gear at a predetermined position on the revolution locus and a rotation position of the planetary gear defined by the rotation regulation member when the planetary gear is positioned at the rotation position. A plurality of driven gears that mesh with the planetary gears to obtain a driving force, and the position of the revolution restricting member with respect to the sun gear is set to the first of the planetary gears.
It is characterized in that the rotation position of the planetary gear is detected by changing the rotation position of the planet gear and the second rotation position, and detecting the change.

[0012]

The driving force transmission mechanism according to the present invention changes the position of the revolution restricting member with respect to the sun gear between the first rotation position and the second rotation position of the planet gear, and detects the change. The rotation position of the planetary gear is detected.

[0013]

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

1 to 6 show a camera to which a driving force transmission mechanism of a first embodiment of the present invention is applied. FIG. 1 is a top view of the camera, FIG. 2 is a front view, and FIG. 3 is a bottom view. Figure, Figure 4
5 is a right side view showing a state in which a strobe is housed in the camera, FIG. 5 is a rear view, and FIG. 6 is a right side view showing a state in which stroboscopic photography is performed in the camera. Further, FIG. 7 is an enlarged top view of an essential part showing a mode setting member in the camera.

The camera is a so-called single-lens reflex camera with a built-in strobe, and is a fixed lens type camera which is further downsized by integrating a taking lens in the body.

As shown in the right side views of FIGS. 4 and 6, the taking lens 1 (see FIG. 2) of this camera is a collapsible lens, and the lens portion is changed by operating the power switch 4 when in use. It is configured to extend to the shooting state shown in FIG.

9 to 12 are side views showing a photographing optical system in the camera.

FIG. 9 shows the WIDE end, that is, the focal length f.
= 28 mm, and FIG. 10 shows the standard state, that is, the focal length f = 70 mm,
FIG. 11 shows the TELE end, that is, the focal length f = 110 m.
The state of m is shown respectively. Further, FIG. 12 shows a collapsed state.

As shown in these figures, the taking optical system of this camera has a focal length of 28 mm from 11 elements in 5 groups.
It is a 4 × zoom of 110 mm.

As described above, FIG. 9 shows the WIDE end, that is, f = 28 mm, and FIG. 11 shows the TELE end f = 110 mm. Also, the standard f = 70
The state of mm is shown in FIG. 10, and the total length of the optical system is such that this state is shorter than both ends.

The above-mentioned lens groups are divided into first to fifth groups, and the respective powers are distributed to be negative, negative, positive, negative, and positive, and one aspherical lens is used in the fifth group. This constitutes an extremely compact and high-performance optical system. Focusing is the front focus type,
This is done by moving the group. The aperture is the fourth
It is located in front of the group and moves together with the fourth group during zooming.

As described above, the present camera is designed to be compact when stored by shortening the interval between the lens groups.
However, since the mirror and the shutter are arranged between the fifth group and the image plane in this embodiment, the fifth group is slightly retracted. Furthermore, in order to make the total length of the first and second groups shorter when retracted, in the state shown in FIG. 12, the first group is retracted in a state in which it is slightly extended to the near side rather than the infinity position (the most retracted state). Is configured.

Although the power system in the lens frame 11 will not be described in detail, the driving of the first group that controls focusing and all groups that controls zooming are controlled by a focus motor and a zoom motor incorporated in the lens frame unit, respectively. It
The diaphragm integrated with the fourth group is controlled by a diaphragm motor (stepping motor) also built in the lens frame 11.

The camera is held by the photographer at the grip portion 7, and a series of photographing operations are performed by pressing the release button 2. Further, if the zoom button 5 is operated prior to the release operation, the photographic lens is moved by a zoom drive system (not shown), and it is possible to set an arbitrary focal length.

Here, the release button 2 is a so-called two-step switch, which is the first step (hereinafter referred to as 1st.
In the release, distance measurement and focusing operation are performed, and a series of shooting operations is performed in the second stage (hereinafter referred to as 2nd release).

A display unit 6 is provided on the upper surface of the camera body to notify the number of film frames and the photographing mode which can be set by the mode operating member.

Next, in order to further clarify the structure of the camera, the overall structure will be described with reference to the central cross-sectional top view shown in FIG.

As shown in the figure, a mirror unit 12 is arranged on the rear side (on the image plane side) of the lens frame 11 including the taking lens 1 (see FIG. 2). In this figure, the lens frame 11 is shown in a retracted state. In the mirror unit 12, a mirror that normally guides a light beam to the finder system and retracts from the optical path during shooting is arranged.

The shutter 13 is a so-called vertical running type focal plane shutter, and the exposure time is controlled by the timing of the front curtain and the rear curtain controlled by the magnet.

On both sides of the mirror unit 12 and the shutter 13, a cartridge 15 and a spool for winding a film, and a spool chamber 16 having a necessary space are arranged, and are connected to the rear side of the shutter 13 (not shown). A motor 14 is disposed between the lens frame 11 and a partially convex magnet portion of the shutter 13 that moves the film on the image plane.

In the present camera, the motor 14 is a power source that controls all operations other than zooming, focusing, and diaphragm inside the lens frame 11, and specifically, shutter charge, mirror up / down, film winding, The film is rewound. In this camera, a DC motor having an outer diameter of 12 mm and a total length of 30 mm is used as the motor 14. The power of the motor 14 is switched to each drive system by the clutch mechanism which is a feature of this embodiment, which mechanism will be described in detail later. A battery 18 is used as an energy source for driving the motor 14 and the like, and in this camera, two lithium batteries are arranged in the grip portion 7.

Patrone chamber 15, motor 14, battery 1
A capacitor 17 for storing strobe energy is arranged in a space surrounded by 8 and is led to a light emitting portion via a strobe substrate (not shown).

Although the main structure has been described with reference to FIG. 8, a zoom motor for zooming, a focus motor for focusing, and an aperture motor for aperture setting are arranged inside the lens frame, although not shown. It goes without saying that all of these actuators are appropriately controlled by the electrical equipment system described later.

Next, in order to clarify the relationship between the respective units of the camera, description will be given with reference to the internal perspective exploded view of FIG. The units equivalent to those in FIG. 8 are designated by the same symbols.

First, the lens frame unit 11 is composed of a cylindrical portion enclosing an optical system and a flange-shaped coupling portion, and the coupling portion is the cartridge chamber 1 described with reference to FIG.
5. The main body unit 21 including the spool chamber 16 can be connected.

A shutter unit 13 is attached to the mirror unit 12, and the unit group is configured to be attached to the main body unit 21 before the lens frame is assembled.

A shutter charge lever 2 for charging the shutter is provided on the lower surface of the shutter unit 13.
6, and a mirror drive lever 27 for moving the mirror up and down is arranged on the lower surface of the mirror unit 12.

In this camera, the motor 14 which is the main power source is used.
The power unit including is configured so that it can be coupled to the main body unit 21 and the mirror unit 12 described above from below, and the power from the motor 14 in FIG. 13 (here, has an output shaft (not shown) below). Through the clutch in the power unit 22, the fork gear 24, the spool 2
It can be transmitted to 5th grade.

Here, the fork gear 24 is for rewinding the film by fitting it to the patrone shaft of the loaded film patrone, and the spool 25 holds the film by a claw member or a spring member (not shown) and winds it up. Is designed to do.

Although not shown, a counterpart lever for operating the shutter charge lever 26 and the mirror drive lever 27 is also arranged in the power unit 22.

Although it has been described that the mirror unit 12 is a unit having a mirror of a single-lens reflex camera, the finder unit 2 for guiding the light beam reflected by the mirror to the finder eyepiece is provided above the unit.
3 are combined. This finder unit 23 has
A screen is arranged at a position equivalent to the image plane (film surface) of the optical system at the time of shooting, and a so-called pentaprism and an eyepiece optical system are also included.

Next, the internal principle of the power unit 22 of the driving force transmission mechanism according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing power distribution in the power unit of the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

Although it has been described that the power source of the camera is a DC motor, the motor 14 used in the present embodiment can drive each drive system directly from the viewpoint of downsizing the entire camera. The large motor with the power of cannot be used. Therefore, the reduction gear system 32A is arranged from the motor 14 as shown in FIG.
After decelerating, it is transmitted to the sequence clutch 36A, which is the main mechanism of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the sequence clutch 36A is configured so that the power can be switched to three systems. The three systems are a shutter / mirror system 33A, a winding system 34A, and a rewinding system 35A. is there. Here, the charge lever 26 and the mirror drive lever 27 described with reference to FIG.
Are driven by the same system (shutter / mirror system 33A). The sequence clutch 36A selectively transmits power to these three systems, and the driving force from the motor 14 is not transmitted to the other two systems during driving.

Next, the principle of the sequence clutch 36A will be described with reference to the conceptual diagram of FIG.

FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing a sequence clutch in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

The sequence clutch 36A utilizes a so-called planetary gear, and will be described in detail at 360 °.
It uses a rotatable rotary planetary gear. Further, it has at least three or more drive systems in the rotation range, and the main constituent gears are a sun gear 31 which rotates by receiving the driving force of the motor and a planetary gear 32 which can revolve around the sun gear 31. And the first-stage gears 33, 34, and 35 of each drive system.

Power is transmitted from the motor 14 to the sun gear 31 via the speed reduction system 32A.
Depending on the direction of rotation of the motor 14, both directions (MA,
MB).

The planet gear 32 has a clutch cam 36.
The clutch cam 36 is rotatably supported on the upper surface and is rotatable with a slight load (hereinafter referred to as friction) on the clutch cam 36. The clutch cam 36 is axially supported by a member (not shown) coaxially with the sun gear 31, and the clutch cam alone can rotate without a load.

The planetary gear 32 is rotatably supported on one side upper surface of the clutch cam 36 with friction, and the distance between the rotation center axes of the planetary gear 32 and the sun gear 31 (hereinafter referred to as the shaft). The so-called gear is arranged such that the so-called gear has a size suitable for transmitting power and ensuring a backlash.

That is, since friction is added to the planetary gear 32, when the sun gear 31 rotates, the clutch cam 36 receives a force from the planetary gear 32,
The sun gear 31 is biased so as to revolve in the rotating direction.

By the way, since the purpose of the sequence clutch 36A is to switch the power to at least three or more systems, the clutch cam 36 is not always functioning only when it is revolving.

In this embodiment, the clutch cam 36 is provided with the engaging surface 38 corresponding to the number of switching power systems, and the engaging surface 38 is engaged by the clutch lever 37 which is spring-biased toward the center of the clutch cam 36. When stopped, the clutch cam 36
The rotation in one direction can be restricted at a specific position.

In FIG. 15, when the rotation direction of the clutch cam is arrow MA, the clutch cam 36 is stopped by the clutch lever 37, and when it rotates in the direction MB, the clutch cam 36 lifts the clutch lever 37. While continuing to revolve around.

That is, in the figure, when rotating in the MB direction,
Considering that the operation is started from the locked state shown in 5,
A cam surface is formed at the end of the engaging surface 38 so as to gradually lift the clutch lever 37 against the spring biasing force. Therefore, as the clutch cam 36 rotates, the clutch lever 37 moves. When it is lifted and rotated by a predetermined amount (here, since it is switched to three systems, the predetermined amount is about 1
20 °), and the clutch lever 3 on the next locking surface 38.
7 falls, and the relative position of the clutch lever 37 becomes the same as in FIG.

That is, while the clutch cam 36 rotates, the clutch lever 37 performs the above-mentioned lift operation three times. When the rotation direction is switched from the MB direction to the MA direction, the clutch cam 36 revolves in the MA direction and first holds the locking surface 38 abutting on the clutch lever 37, and the revolution is prohibited. Needless to say.

In summary, the sequence clutch 36A is characterized in that the clutch is continuously switched when the motor rotates in one direction and the power is transmitted to the selected drive system when the motor rotates in the other direction. Can say

Returning to FIG. 15, the first stage gears of each drive system are arranged around the clutch cam 36. Figure 15
In this state, the winding system 34A is being driven, but the rotation of the sun gear 31 in the MA direction causes the first-stage gear 34 of the winding system 34A to rotate in the arrow MC direction, and transmits power to a spool (not shown). It is like this.

Although the position of the planetary gear 32 is restricted by the engaging surface 38, the sun gear 3 is in a power transmission state.
The rotation centers of the gears 1, 1, the planetary gear 32, and the first stage gear 34 of the winding system are aligned on a straight line.

Further, the planetary gear 32 and the first gear 3
Proper backlash is ensured in this state between the gears with 4 as well.

When the other locking surface 38 is locked by the clutch lever 37, the planetary gear 32 meshes with the first gear 35 of the rewinding system 35A or the first gear 33 of the shutter / mirror system 33A. .

Even in these states, the sun gear 31, the planetary gear 32, the first gear 35, or the sun gear 3
The relative relationship between each gear and the locking surface 38 is configured such that the rotation centers of the 1, planetary gear 32, and the first-stage gear 33 are aligned on a straight line. That is, the clutch cam 3
When 6 rotates in the MB direction in the drawing, the planetary gear 32 revolves while passing through the meshing position at the time of transmission of each drive system.

If the friction added to the planetary gear 32 is extremely small, the clutch cam 36
Tries to lift the clutch lever 37 against the spring force, it slips and cannot revolve, and the planetary gear 3
Only the rotation of 2 will be performed.

Further, if the friction is increased more than necessary, the above-mentioned slip is eliminated, but when driving each drive system, the friction also contributes to the transmission loss because the friction is involved as a transmission loss. , The driving efficiency is significantly reduced.

FIG. 20 is an enlarged sectional view of the planetary gear 32.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, the planetary gear 32 fixed to the clutch cam 36 by adhesion or the like.
The planetary gear 32 is spring-biased by the coil spring 32b with respect to the shaft 32a to obtain stable friction.

FIG. 21 is an enlarged sectional view showing another example of the planetary gear 32.

As shown in FIG. 21, the planetary gear 32
As another example, instead of the coil spring 32b, a wave washer 32c having a bent washer or a disc spring can be used to obtain friction.

16 to 19 are model views of the upper surface of the clutch portion of the present embodiment, which is arranged in the power unit 22 described in FIG.

Although the cam rotation direction (drive side and switching side) is opposite to that of FIG. 15 for explaining the principle, it has three drive systems as in FIG.

First, FIG. 16 shows a state in which the rewinding system is being driven, the sun gear 41 rotates in the direction of the arrow, and the planet gear 43 has the clutch cam 42 engaging surface with the clutch lever 4.
7 is in contact with the clutch cam 42 at the point PB.
Is restricted and the rewinding system 44 is driven in the direction of the arrow.

The clutch lever 47 is the clutch cam 4
It is spring-biased in two directions and contacts the clutch cam 42 at the point PA. That is, the position of the clutch lever 47 is determined by the cam shape of the clutch cam corresponding to the point PA.

Now, let us consider a case where the rewinding is completed and the shutter / mirror system is driven next.

After the motor is stopped, it is rotated in reverse due to the switching of the clutch. As shown in FIG. 17, the sun gear also starts rotating in the direction of the arrow.

The planetary gear 43 has the same structure as shown in FIGS.
As shown in FIG. 1, the friction similar to that of the planetary gear 32 is built in, so that the clutch cam 42 revolves in the direction of the arrow. That is, the planetary gear 43 disengages from the first stage gear 44 of the rewind system and revolves toward the first stage gear 45 of the shutter / mirror system.

At this time, the clutch lever 47 is lifted from the PA point side by the cam surface of the clutch cam 42 as shown in FIG.

Almost at the same time when the planetary gear 43 passes through the meshing position with the first stage gear 45 of the shutter / mirror system, the clutch lever 47 deviates from the top dead center and is pressed by the spring toward the next cam surface (bottom dead center). It At this time, the state of these levers and the clutch is detected by a sensor described later, and the motor rotated to the clutch switching side is
Stop.

This state is shown in FIG. 18, and since there is some overrun in the characteristics of the motor, the engagement surface side of the clutch lever has not yet contacted the clutch cam.

Next, the motor rotates to the driving side. As a result, the overrun clutch cam 42 is shown in FIG.
At the point PD, the clutch lever 47 locks at the PD point. At this time, the clutch lever 4
7 is spring-pressed at the PC point corresponding to the bottom dead center of the clutch cam 42 and the position is restricted. Therefore, the rotation of the sun gear 41 is transmitted as the rotation in the arrow direction to the first stage gear 45 of the shutter / mirror system in FIG.
A series of clutch operations is established.

In this way, the same switching operation is performed when the shutter / mirror system first gear 45 moves to the hoisting system first gear 46. Further, the switching is not performed only to the adjacent drive system, and if necessary, for example, the shutter / mirror system can be switched to the rewinding system without stopping at the winding system.

The sensor (not shown) and the position detecting method will be described in detail later, but only the concept will be described with reference to FIG.
3 will be described.

FIG. 43 is a developed view of the circumference including the cam surface of the clutch cam described above.

As shown in this figure, the three locking positions are specified as the positions corresponding to the respective drive systems.

In this embodiment, the shutter / mirror system is set to the initial position of the normal standby of the camera. In the clutch cam, the top dead center, that is, the maximum lift position when switching from each locking surface to the next locking surface is set to the same radius. However, the lift amount up to the top dead center is divided into two types.

In FIG. 43, the lift amounts are indicated by h1 and h2. As is clear from this, when the shutter / mirror system corresponding to the initial position is locked, the clutch lever is h2 above the top dead center. Just in the down position,
When locked at other positions, it is stable at a position down by h1.

As a result, it is possible to determine the initial position from the three types of locking positions by the difference in the relative positions of the clutch levers.
Further, the outline of the position detection of the present embodiment is that it is possible to determine other locking positions by determining which locking position from the initial position.

Now, the power portion of this embodiment will be described in detail below. Mainly, the internal structure of the power unit 22 described in FIG. 13 will be described in detail.

FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the gear train from the motor to the above-mentioned clutch portion.

In this drawing, in order to clarify the structure, it is developed in the vertical direction and only the main parts are shown, but in reality, the adjacent gears are meshed with each other.

The pinion gear 51 is a gear press-fitted into the shaft of the motor and is the power source of this embodiment. A gear train composed of gears 52, 53, 54 sequentially meshes with the pinion gear 51 to rotate the sun gear 41 which is the input side of the clutch portion. In the present embodiment, the object to be driven is a film, a shutter or the like with respect to the power of the motor, so that it cannot be driven directly and it is necessary to use it after decelerating appropriately.

Further, the friction of the coil spring 32b and the wave washer 32c has been described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 as the one that controls the revolution of the clutch cam 42. The friction does not become a loss during revolution, but when the planet gear rotates. Since a loss occurs, unless the output shaft of the motor is decelerated to a certain extent, the ratio of the loss to the motor power becomes large and the efficiency of the entire mechanism is significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reduction gear ratio of about 30 is ensured by the engagement of the four-stage gears from the pinion gear 51 to the sun gear 41 shown in FIG. Has been realized (the loss is further reduced as the reduction ratio is increased, but the time required for switching increases).

Further, the three types of power systems described with reference to FIG. 16 and the like are laid out on the outer periphery of the clutch cam 42.

Next, each power system will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of a gear train in the shutter / mirror system.

In this figure, the gear 55 is a partner with which the planetary gear 43 can mesh, and corresponds to the gear shown as the first stage gear 45 of the shutter-mirror system in FIG. The gear 55 sequentially meshes with gears 56 and 57, and the gear 57 meshes with a cam gear 58 for a shutter mirror (hereinafter referred to as an SM cam gear 58) which is a lever drive source of the main drive system.

The SM cam gear 58 has a mirror cam 58a for driving the mirror system on its upper side and a shutter charge cam 58 for charging the shutter system on its lower side.
b is integrally provided, and a mirror-up state and a shutter charge completion state are established depending on the stop positions of the cams 58a and 58b.

Therefore, in order to output a signal corresponding to the SM cam gear 58, the SM cam gear 58 is meshed with the timing gear 59 having the same number of teeth, and the sliding section fixed to the timing gear 59 has the sliding section fixed thereto.
By rotating on the pattern of SM cam gear 5
It is configured so that the relative position of 8 can be detected.

Next, the cam provided on the SM cam gear 58 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26.

FIG. 24 is a side view of the SM cam gear 58, and FIGS. 25 and 26 are sectional views taken along lines AA ′ and BB ′, respectively.

FIG. 25 (section AA ') is a sectional view showing a cam 58a for driving the mirror. About 2/3 of the circumference is formed by R1 having the same radius, and a part thereof is at top dead center. The part connecting R1 and R2 formed by R2 is R
1, R2 are connected smoothly. Here, the top dead center range of R2 corresponds to the state where the mirror is up as the state of the camera.

FIG. 26 (BB 'section) is a sectional view showing the shutter charging cam 58b, which is formed by a smooth cam between the top dead center range indicated by R4 and the minimum radius indicated by R3. Has been done.

The cam shown in FIGS. 24 to 26 is composed of a molded component which is coaxially integrally molded with the gear portion of the SM cam gear 58.

Next, the lever mechanism for driving the mirror / shutter by the SM cam gear 58 will be described.

FIG. 29 is a perspective view of a main part of a mirror system in this embodiment.

The mirror lever 61 is a lever rotatable about the center of rotation, and one end portion 61A of the mirror lever 61 contacts the SM cam gear 58. Also, the other end 61B
Is in contact with the side plate lever 62. The side plate lever 62 is also a rotatable lever having a rotation center.

A side plate lever 63 is in contact with the other end of the side plate lever 62. The side plate lever 63 is also a rotatable lever. A rotation center shaft is provided on the upper end side of the mirror 64, and the rotation center is held by a mirror unit (not shown), so that the rotation can be made within a range of 45 °.
A mask frame pin 65 is fixed to the side surface (side plate lever side) of the mirror 64 so as to be integrated with the mirror 63, and the mask frame pin 65 contacts the other end of the side plate lever 63 with respect to the side plate lever 62. Touching.

With the above structure, the mirror 64 can be moved from the normal position (down position) to the up position by driving the mask frame pin 65 in the mirror up direction.

30 and 31 are explanatory views in which each lever is modeled for the above-mentioned mirror operation, and those having the same functions as those in FIG. 29 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

FIG. 30 shows the normal state (mirror down state).
The mirror 64 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown). As a result, the mask frame pin 65 comes into contact with the side plate lever 63, and the pressing force thereof is further increased.
It is transmitted to 2.

FIG. 31 shows the mirror-up state,
When the SM cam gear 58 rotates, the mirror lever 61 moves in the direction of the arrow so that the side plate levers 62 and 63 rotate, respectively. This causes the mask frame pin 65 to lift upward against the spring force. It is supposed to be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 31, the SM cam gear 58 is used.
Shows the mirror lever 6 at the top dead center position described in FIG.
1 is in the state of maximum lift. Needless to say, when the mirror 64 goes down, the lever of the mirror 64 returns to the state shown in FIG. 30 by the spring force of the mirror 64 if the mirror lever 61 is in the retractable position by the rotation of the SM cam gear 58. .

27 and 28 show the SM cam gear 5 described above.
8 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between 8 and the mirror lever 61,
The mirror driving cam lifts the mirror lever 61 that presses the side plate lever 62. And FIG.
7 shows a normal stop position (mirror down position), and FIG. 28 shows a mirror up position (equivalent to FIG. 31).

Next, the shutter charging operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34.

FIG. 32 is a schematic view of the focal plane shutter used in the camera shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from the subject side.

As shown in the figure, a magnet portion 72 is provided on one side of the mask portion 70, and the front and rear curtain magnets move the shutter lever 71 from the free state shown by the solid line to the charged state shown by the broken line. It is designed to be charged by moving L.

By energizing the magnet portion 72 in this charged state, the magnet is attracted and the second is formed at the timing of turning off the magnet. In this embodiment, the shutter lever 71 is charged by the SM cam gear 58. It has become.

FIGS. 33 and 34 are top views of the charge state, which are made clearer, as seen from the upper side of the camera in the vicinity of the BB ′ cross section of FIG. 24.

FIG. 33 shows a free state, that is, a state where the shutter is not charged.
1 is biased in the direction of the arrow in the figure by the spring force attached to the magnet portion 72. The shutter charge lever 26 is rotatably provided while being pressed by a spring force at one end, and is in contact with the cam surface of the SM cam gear 58 at the other end. The state of FIG. 33 corresponds to immediately after the exposure is completed in this camera.

33, when the shutter is charged by the motor in FIG. 33, the SM cam gear 58 rotates clockwise. As a result, the shutter is gradually charged to reach the charging completed state shown in FIG.

Here, the shutter charge lever 26 is in contact with the top dead center range on the cam of the SM cam gear 58 described above. Therefore, even if the motor is stopped, the shutter charge lever 71 causes a spring force to cause the shutter charge lever 26 to move. 26 does not rotate the SM cam gear 58.

In the above description of FIG. 23, it is described that the timing position of the SM cam gear 58 is secured by the timing gear 59 and the timing board 60. The structure of the timing board 60 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 35 is a bottom view of the timing board in FIG. 23 as viewed from the bottom surface side.

In the figure, regions Wa, Wb and Wc are conductive pattern portions. The sliding contact piece integrally fixed to the timing gear 59 shown in FIG. 23 has a width that covers the minimum radius R1 to the maximum radius R2 of the pattern of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35, the pattern portion has
It is divided into three parts, a Wa part, a Wb part, and a Wc part, each of which is input to the detection part by a pattern (not shown).

The sliding contact piece has a contact end on the same line with respect to the center of rotation, and rotates on the pattern portion. Therefore, when the sliding contact piece is located in the area Wb range or the Wc range, the area Wa and the area Wb are electrically connected to each other and the area Wa and the area Wc are made conductive, and the sliding contact piece is in the range Wb The presence in the range of the area Wc can be detected.

The area Wb range corresponds to the state where the shutter charging corresponding to FIG. 34 is completed, and the area Wc range corresponds to the state where the mirror corresponding to FIG. 28 is up.

In terms of motor control, the brake is applied when the area Wa and the area Wb are brought into conduction when the shutter is charged, and the brake is applied when the areas Wa and Wc are brought into conduction when the mirror is raised. Although a stable stop operation is obtained, details will be described later with reference to a timing chart.

Next, the gear train of the hoisting system in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing a gear train of the hoisting system.

The gear train of this hoisting system is developed in the vertical direction similarly to the gear train of the shutter / mirror system, but the gears adjacent to each other mesh with each other.

In the figure, a gear 81 is a first stage gear with which a planetary gear meshes when the hoisting system is driven, and corresponds to the gear indicated by the first stage gear 46 of the hoisting system in FIG. The unit configuration of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. 13 above. In the power unit, the hoisting system is
Since it has to be transmitted to the side facing the motor, a gear train for transmitting the lower side of the main body is required.

In FIG. 36, the two-stage gear 87 is rotated from the lower side of the main body through a series of idle gears 82 to 86 from the gear 81. The spool that holds and winds the film is provided with a claw portion and a gear portion that are integrally formed, and the spool is rotated by the engagement of a series of these gear trains. In addition,
The upper protruding portion of the spool is rotatably fitted to an upper portion of a spool chamber provided in the main body unit.

Next, the gear train of the rewinding system in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the gear train of the rewinding system.

In the figure, a gear 91 is a first stage gear with which a planetary gear meshes when the rewinding system is driven, and corresponds to the gear indicated by the first stage gear 44 of the rewinding system in FIG. The gear 91 meshes with the two-stage gear 92 and then meshes with the gear portion of the fork 93. In the fork 93, the fork portion at the tip corresponds to the patrone shaft portion of the loaded film patrone to transmit the rotation, and the fork portion is coaxial with the patrone chamber provided in the main unit, and The fork portion is spring-biased in the direction of the arrow in the figure so that it can be moved back and forth when the cartridge is inserted.

Here, in order to effectively use the power of the motor, the hoisting system is set to a total reduction ratio of about 240 from the motor, and the rewinding system is set to a total reduction ratio of about 150.

The internal structure of each drive system has been described above,
The mechanism that enables shutter charging, mirror driving, film winding, and film rewinding by means of one clutch provided in the power unit has been shown.

Next, as an example of application of the camera position detecting device, an example used for controlling a sequence motor of a camera will be described.

FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an application example of the position detecting device in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

In FIG. 45, the CPU 120 sequentially executes programs stored in the internal ROM to control peripheral ICs and the like. AFIC
Reference numeral 134 is an autofocus IC. In this camera, the TTL phase difference detection method is adopted as the autofocus method.

First, the AFIC 134 has a CPU.
AFIC reset signal (AFRES) Si from 120
g101 is sent and reset. The light from the subject passes through the taking lens and reaches the photo sensor array arranged on the upper surface of the AFIC 134. Then, inside the AFIC 134, processing such as light quantity integration and quantization is performed. Then, the amount of focus shift is calculated as the distance measurement information.

When the light amount integration is completed, the signal (AFEND) Sig102 indicating that the light amount integration is completed is sent to the CPU.
Sent to 120. AFIC134 and CPU for distance measurement information
Signal indicating that communication between 120 (AFCEN)
Sig103, data signal (DATA) Sig104,
CP in the synchronization clock signal (CLK) Sig105
Transferred to U120.

By the way, if the characteristics of the respective elements of the photosensor array vary, accurate distance measurement information cannot be obtained as it is. Therefore, the variation information of the photo sensor array is stored in advance in the EEPROM 135, which is a non-volatile storage element, and the CPU 120 performs the correction calculation of the distance measurement information obtained from the AFIC 134. In addition, the EEPROM 135 stores various adjustment values such as mechanical variations and variations in electrical characteristics of various elements. These adjustment values are stored in the EEPROM 1 if necessary.
35, that is, a signal (EPCEN) Sig107 that activates 35, that is, a data signal (DA).
TA) Sig108, synchronous clock signal (CLK) Si
Reading can be performed by g109. In addition, CPU1
Data is exchanged between 20, the AFIC 134, and the EEPROM 135 by serial communication.

The date module 137 imprints the date on the film in response to the imprint signal Sig110 from the CPU 120. The light emission time of the projection lamp changes stepwise depending on the film ISO speed. The interface IC (hereinafter referred to as IFIC) 138 is activated by the IFIC activation signal (IFCENb) Sig111 from the CPU 120, and the CPU 120 and the latch signal (LATC).
H) Sig112, 4-bit bus line signal (D0b-
D3b) Sig113 to Sig116, D / Ab signal S
Perform parallel communication using the ig117, measure subject brightness, measure temperature inside the camera, shape the output signal waveform of the photo interrupter, etc., control the constant voltage drive of the motor, generate temperature stable voltage, generate temperature proportional voltage, battery Remaining amount check, infrared remote control reception, motor driver IC
Control of various LEDs, low voltage monitoring of power supply voltage, control of booster circuit, and the like.

The latch signal Sig112 is a signal for timing the reading of the signal on the bus line. The D / Ab signal is a 4-bit bus line signal Sig1.
13 to Sig116 is a signal indicating whether it indicates an address or data. D / Ab
4-bit bus line signal Sig1 when the signal is "L"
13 to Sig116 represent addresses, and when the D / Ab signal is "H", 4-bit bus line signal Sig113 to.
Sig116 represents data.

The brightness of the subject is measured using the silicon photodiode 170 divided into two parts. The light receiving surface of the sensor is divided into two parts, that is, the central part of the screen and the peripheral part thereof, and the SPOT for performing photometry only in a part of the central part of the screen.
It is possible to perform photometry, average photometry using the entire screen, and two types of photometry. The photometric sensor outputs a current corresponding to the subject brightness to the IFIC 138. I
The FIC 138 converts the output from the photometric sensor into a voltage and transfers it to the CPU 120. The CPU 120 performs exposure calculation, backlight judgment, etc. based on the voltage information.

For measuring the temperature inside the camera, a voltage proportional to the absolute temperature is output by the circuit built in the IFIC 138, and the value is obtained by subjecting the signal to A / D conversion by the CPU 120. The obtained temperature measurement value is used for correction of mechanical members and electric signals whose state changes with temperature. In the waveform shaping of the photo interrupter or the like, the photocurrent of the output of the photo interrupter or the photo reflector is compared with the reference current, and output from the IFIC 138 as a rectangular wave. At this time, noise is removed by giving a hysteresis to the reference current. Further, the reference current and the hysteresis characteristic can be changed by communicating with the CPU 120.

To check the remaining capacity of the battery, connect a low resistance to both ends of the battery, divide the voltage across the battery when a current is applied inside the IFIC 138 and
Output to 120, and the CPU 120 performs A / D conversion to obtain a voltage value. Upon reception of the infrared light remote controller, modulated infrared light is emitted from the LED 141 for projecting light from the remote controller transmitting unit 140, and the infrared light is received by the light receiving silicon photodiode 142. The output of the silicon photodiode 142 is subjected to processing such as waveform shaping inside the IFIC 138 and transferred to the CPU 120.

For low voltage monitoring of the power supply voltage, the IFIC 138 is provided with a dedicated terminal. When the voltage input to the IFIC 138 falls below a specified value, the IFIC 138 outputs a reset signal to the CPU 120 to prevent the CPU 120 from running out of control. To prevent. The control of the booster circuit is to operate the booster circuit when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. Further, the IFIC 138 is connected with an LED 143 for displaying in the finder for the end of AF distance measurement, a flash light emission warning, or an LED used for a photo interrupter or the like.

On / off of these LEDs and control of the amount of emitted light are controlled by the CPU 120 and the EEPROM 135, I.
Communication is performed between the FICs 138, and the IFIC 138 directly controls. What is controlled is the LED current Sig131 of SCPI147 and the LED current Sig1 of LDPI148.
32, LED current Sig133 of ZMPR172, ZM
LED current Sig134 and AVPI152 of PI173
LED current Sig135, WPR178 LED current Sig146 and finder display LED 143
Is on and off.

In the constant voltage drive control of the motor, the CPU
By communicating with 120, the drive voltage can be set stepwise. The motor driver IC 139 performs film feeding, shutter charging, and mirror driving, and is a motor 144 corresponding to the motor 14 in FIG. 8 (hereinafter referred to as a sequence motor to distinguish from other motors) and a lens for focus adjustment. Driving LD motor 145,
Driving three motors of the ZM motor 146 for zooming the lens frame, driving the booster circuit, driving the LED 171 for displaying the self-timer operation, and a front curtain magnet (MGF) for attracting and holding the front curtain of the focal plane shutter.
176, a rear curtain magnet (MGS) 177 that attracts and holds the rear curtain of the focal plane shutter is controlled.

These operation controls, for example, which device is driven, whether the motor is normally or reversely rotated,
Apply the signal of CPU120 to IFIC1
38, and the IFIC 138 controls the transistors of the motor driver 139 by a signal Sig 118 that turns on and off. Whether the sequence motor 144 is in the shutter charge, film winding, or film rewinding state is a photo interrupter for detection, SCPI1.
The signal Sig119 is detected at 47 and is output to the CPU 120.

The amount of extension of the lens is detected by the photo interrupter LDPI 148 attached to the LD motor 145, and the output Sig120 is sent to the CPU 120 after being waveform-shaped by the IFIC 138. The zooming state of the lens frame is based on the photo interrupter ZMPI1 built in the lens frame.
73 and photo reflector ZMPR172. When the lens frame is between TELE and WIDE, the high reflection portion provided on the lens frame is configured to face the ZMPR 172, and the low reflection portion is configured to face in the other range.

Accordingly, the output Sig1 of the ZMPR 172 is obtained.
By inputting 21 to the CPU 120, the TELE end, W
It becomes possible to detect the IDE end. ZMPI173 is ZM
It is attached to the motor 146, and its output Sig122 is waveform-shaped by the IFIC 138 and then input to the CPU 120 to detect the amount of zooming from the TELE end or the WIDE end.

The motor driver IC 150 is a stepping motor or AV motor 151 for driving the diaphragm adjusting unit.
ON / OFF signal (ENA) Sig from CPU 120
It is designed to be driven by 136 and the forward / reverse rotation signal (IN) Sig123. The AVPI 152 waveform-shapes the output Sig124 by the IFIC 138 to generate a CP.
It is input to U120 and the aperture open position is detected.

The liquid crystal display panel 136 uses the segment signal (SEG) Sig125 and the common signal (COM) Sig126 sent from the CPU 120 to display the number of film frames, the photographing mode, the strobe mode, the aperture value, the remaining battery level, and the like. It has become.

The strobe unit 179 is for giving a required brightness to the subject by causing the light emitting tube to emit light when the brightness of the subject is insufficient at the time of photographing or autofocus distance measurement. At IFIC
138 strobe charge signal (STCHG) Sig12
7, strobe light emission start signal (STON) Sig128,
Signal to stop strobe emission (STOFF) Sig1
It is controlled by each signal of 29. Also,
The charging voltage of the strobe is C as VST signal Sig130.
It is designed to be sent to the PU 120.

The WPR 178 is a photoreflector for detecting the amount of film fed. This WPR178
Are arranged to face the perforation of the film. Since the light reflectance differs between the film surface and the perforation portion, the output of the WPR 178 differs when corresponding to each. Since the WP 178 and the perforation alternately face each other during film feeding, the output Sig 147 of the WPR 178 has a pulse shape, and the amount of movement for one frame of the film can be detected by counting the number.

Key signals 0-5 (KEY0-KEY5) S
ig137 to Sig142 and key common 0 to 2 (K
EYCOM0 to 2) Sig143 to Sig145 are used to detect which of the switches 121 to 133 is on.

KEY0 to KEY5 are normally CPU1
The signal level is in the "H" state because it is pulled up inside 20. Here, for example, KEYCOM0Si
It is assumed that g143 is "L", KEYCOM1Sig144 is "H", and KEYCOMSig145 is "H". If R1SW121 is turned on at this point, KEY0
Sig137 changes from "H" to "L". Therefore, the signal levels of KEYCOM0 to 2Sig143 to Sig145, and KEY0 to 5Sig137 to Sig142.
If the signal level of
You can see which of the 33 is on. In addition, KEYCOM0 to 2Sig143 to Sig
Two or more 145 cannot be set to "L" at the same time.

First release switch (R1SW)
Reference numeral 121 turns on when the release button is half-pushed to perform a distance measuring operation. The second release switch (R2SW) 122 is turned on when the release button is fully pressed, and a shooting operation is performed based on various measured values. Zoom up switch (ZUSW) 12
3 and a zoom down switch (ZDSW) 124 are switches for zooming the lens frame, and when ZUSW 123 is turned on, zooming is performed in the long focus direction, and when ZDSW 124 is turned on, zooming is performed in the short focus direction.

When the self-switch (SELFSW) 125 is turned on, the self-timer photographing mode or the remote control standby state is set. In this state, R2SW12
If 2 is turned on, self-timer shooting is performed, and if a shooting operation is performed with the remote control transmitter, shooting is performed with the remote control. When the spot switch (SPOTSW) 126 is turned on, the spot metering mode is set in which metering is performed only in a part of the center of the photographing screen. Note that the SPOTSW126
Normal photometry when is off is performed using the entire shooting screen.

Pict 1 switch (PCT1SW) 127
A pictogram 4SW (PCT4SW) 130 and a program switch (PSW) 131 are program photographing mode changeover switches, and a photographer selects a mode according to photographing conditions. When the PCT1SW127 is turned on, the portrait mode is set, and the aperture and the shutter speed are determined so that the depth of field becomes shallow within the proper exposure range. When the PCT2SW128 is turned on, the night view mode is set, and the value is set one step lower than the value of the proper exposure at the time of normal shooting. When the PCT3SW129 is turned on, the landscape mode is set, and the aperture and shutter speed values are determined so that the depth of field is as deep as possible within the proper exposure range.

When the PCT4SW 130 is turned on, the stop motion mode is set, and the shutter speed is set to be as high as possible. At this time, the red-eye prevention mode of the flash mode cannot be used.

The above PCT1SW127 to PCT4SW
No more than one 130 can be selected at the same time.

The PSW 131 is a normal program photographing mode switch. By pressing this PSW131,
The PCT1SW127 to PCT4SW130 are reset and the AV priority program mode described later is reset. When the AV priority switch (AVSW) 133 is turned on, the shooting mode becomes the aperture priority program mode. In this mode, the photographer determines the AV value, and the shutter speed is determined by the program according to the AV value. In this mode, PCT2SW128 and PCT4SW13
0 becomes the AV value setting switch without the above function. The PCT2SW128 serves as a switch for increasing the AV value, and the PCT4SW130 serves as a switch for decreasing the AV value.

A strobe switch (STSW) 132 is a strobe light emission mode changeover switch. It is a normal automatic light emission mode (AUTO) or a red-eye reduction automatic light emission mode (AUTO).
-S), forced light emission mode (FILL-IN), strobe off mode.

The power switch (PWSW) 153 is the main switch of this camera.

The panorama switch (PANSW) 154 is a switch for detecting whether the photographing state is the panoramic photographing or the normal photographing and is turned on during the panoramic photographing.

The back cover switch (BKSW) 155 is a switch for detecting the state of the back cover and is in the off state when the back cover is closed. When the BKSW 155 shifts from the ON state to the OFF state, film loading starts.

Shutter charge switch (SCSW)
156 is a switch for detecting the shutter charge.

Mirror up switch (MUSW) 157
Is a switch for detecting mirror up, which is turned on by mirror up.

The DX switch (DXSW) 158 is a D indicating the sensitivity of the film printed on the film cartridge.
A switch for reading the X code and for detecting the presence / absence of film loading, which is composed of five switch groups (not shown).

Pop-up switch (PUPSW) 15
Reference numeral 9 is a switch for controlling the strobe. PUPSW1
Reference numeral 59 is interlocked with the movement of the strobe light emitting portion, and when the light emitting portion is raised, the PUPSW 159 is turned on to perform strobe charging. If the subject has low brightness and the flash mode is the normal automatic light emission mode (AUTO) or the red-eye reduction automatic light emission mode (AUTO-S) and the PUPSW 159 is on, the flash light emission is permitted.

The rewinding switch (RWMSW) 160 is a switch for forcibly rewinding the film. R
WMSW160 is on to force film rewind.

The XSW 174 is a switch for adjusting the timing of strobe light emission, and is turned on when the front curtain of the shutter finishes traveling, and turned off when the shutter charge is completed.

The piezoelectric buzzer (PCV) 175 emits a sound at the time of focusing at the time of autofocus and at the time of operating the switch.

Next, a method of detecting the clutch portion used in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 44.

As described above, since the clutch portion is composed of a plurality of cams and locking surfaces, the relationship between the clutch lever and the clutch cam that locks the clutch parts becomes a problem.
That is, it is necessary to surely and instantaneously determine to which drive system the power is transmitted when the motor rotation direction on the driving side is switched from the motor rotation in the clutch switching direction. Therefore, in this embodiment, the position of the clutch cam can be detected by the following method.

Although the development view of the clutch cam has been described with reference to FIG. 43, the lift amount is different from h2 and h1 on the locking surface at the shutter / mirror driving position and the winding / rewinding locking surface. That is, when the shutter / mirror drive position can be locked, when the lift amount h2 is down from the top dead center when the clutch cam is rotating in the switching direction,
Until the next top dead center is over and down. Therefore, since there is only one h2 down during one rotation of the clutch cam, it is possible to grasp the absolute position by detecting the state of the cam surface or the lever at this location. In this embodiment, a method of detecting the absolute position by detecting the position of the clutch lever that is in contact with the cam will be described in detail below.

FIG. 38 shows the relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever. The lever is spring-biased in the direction of the arrow.

The difference from the conceptual diagram described with reference to FIG. 16 and the like is that the detector (upper side in the figure) is integrally configured. The sensor monitoring position (SE point) indicated by the arrow is the detection point of the only photoelectric sensor in this clutch,
In this embodiment, it is a place where the state of the clutch lever 47 can be detected by a photo interrupter (SCPI).

FIG. 44 is an enlarged perspective view of an essential part showing the relationship between the SCPI and the clutch lever 47.

Now, FIG. 38 shows the state where the shutter / mirror position is locked. That is, the clutch lever 47 is located at a position h2 lower than the outermost circumference of the clutch cam 42. At SE point, the clutch lever 47
The Xd section in the inside corresponds, but here, in order to explain what the Xd section is, a cross section CC ′ is shown in FIG. 42.

The wall thickness of the detected portion is L, but the wall thickness of the Xd portion corresponding to the SE point is now L1. Then, as is apparent from FIG. 38, when the clutch lever 47 is lifted by the clutch cam 42, the detection surface corresponding to the SE point moves to Xe and Xf. The Xe portion has a wall thickness L2, and the Xf portion has a hole formed therein, and there is nothing for blocking the photo interrupter. Here, the clutch lever 47 is a molding member in which the locking portion and the detection portion are integrally molded.

Since the photo interrupter SCPI receives the projected infrared light, even the integrally molded clutch lever 47 has different thicknesses Xd and Xd.
Different outputs can be obtained if the transmittance of the e portion is different. Specifically, in this embodiment, the transmittance of the Xd portion is set to about 0, the transmittance of the Xe portion is set to about 25%, and the Xf portion is set to 100% because it is a hole. Therefore, the thickness of the clutch lever 47 is L1: 0.
The width L is set to 7 mm and L2 is 0.2 mm, and the total width L is set to 0.8 mm from the package interval of the photo interrupter SCPI.

FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the clutch lever and the SCPI in order to clarify the positional relationship of the clutch lever 47 with respect to the SCPI switch portion. The SCPI signal is guided to the detection unit by a flexible substrate (not shown).

With these configurations, the SCPI can always grasp the lift amount of the clutch lever 47 in three states of maximum, h1 down, and h2 down.
Although it has been described here that the material for the clutch lever is a mold, it goes without saying that the characteristic of the clutch lever is that the plate has a color of approximately 0.7 mm that can shield light almost completely. In addition, in the present embodiment, the thickness is 0.2 mm and 2
Although a material of 5% transmission is used, the thickness is not particularly limited to this, and there is no problem in terms of mechanism even if appropriately changed.

By the way, it has been stated that the absolute position can be detected because there is only one range where h2 is down in the entire circumference of the cam.
The behavior of the clutch lever 47 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

FIG. 38 shows a state where the shutter / mirror position is locked, that is, a normal standby position.
Now, considering the actual shooting operation, the camera winds after exposure and drives the drive system in the order of shutter charge.

Therefore, the clutch section must also be switched promptly after the end of exposure (including the mirror down) to transmit power to the hoisting drive system. After the mirror down is completed in the state of FIG. 38, the motor starts reverse rotation. Since the reverse rotation here means the rotation in the clutch switching direction, the clutch cam 42 is disengaged from the engagement surface, and in the figure,
Rotate clockwise.

This is the state of FIG. 39, and the clutch lever is lifted against the spring biasing force. FIG. 39 shows a state in which the lift has finished and the rotation of the cam has progressed to the top dead center.
The Xf portion, which is a hole, corresponds to the sensor surface, that is, the SE point.

Now, set the output level of the sensor in this state to H
ig (hereinafter, H level). In addition, the output level of the light shielding unit corresponding to FIG. 38 is set to Low (hereinafter, L level). Furthermore, the output level corresponding to the intermediate Xe section is set to Mi.
d (hereinafter M level). However, the output here is S
Consider a waveform output from a single CPI that does not include a stable output, that is, a value that is output momentarily during switching. Therefore, when the clutch lever 47 moves, for example, from Xd to Xf during switching, Xe is briefly
Output is obtained, but that part is omitted for convenience in the description here.

After the state shown in FIG. 39, the motor continues to rotate further, so that the cam continues to rotate to the right, and when the top dead center range ends, h1 is lowered. As a result, the clutch lever 47 also rotates following the clutch cam 42, and S
The detection unit corresponding to the point E is the Xe unit. The motor is stopped by judging the Xe portion. That is, the rotation of the motor in the mechanical system driving direction drives the hoisting system.
Guaranteed by the discretion of the department.

FIG. 40 shows the state at the moment when the motor stops.

Since the motor braked by the M level judgment slightly overruns, the engagement surface of the clutch cam 42 is not in contact with the clutch lever 47 in this state. In this camera, since exposure to winding is a series of operations, the state of FIG. 40 is momentary, and the motor switches to rotation in the drive direction. Then, the clutch cam 42 is locked,
FIG. 41 shows a state in which the hoisting system is being driven.

The switching from the shutter / mirror system to the hoisting system has been described above. Here, the M-level determination is performed to detect the Xe portion. However, as a feature of this embodiment, there are two ranges in which the M-level output is output, and absolute position detection cannot be performed. Therefore, it is actually necessary to determine the level and the level count (how many times the M level is). In this camera, it is judged that the first M level is the winding upper part and the second M level is the rewinding part with respect to the initial position.
The place is judged. Therefore, if you want to forcibly rewind during shooting, set the initial position (shutter,
The clutch rotated from the mirror position) passes through the hoisting system,
By stopping at the second M-level judgment, any rewinding from any state is possible.

Prior to the description of the entire operation, the clutch mechanism during a series of photographing operations will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. Although it has been described that the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of this embodiment is applied has a zoom mechanism and an autofocus mechanism built in the lens frame unit, the timing chart has no direct relation to the power system of the camera body. The behavior of these actuators is omitted.

This camera has a two-step stroke release function. Distance measurement and lens extension are performed with the release. This operation is performed between timings T01 and T02, and normally when a focus evaluation cannot be obtained, a warning is issued and the operation does not proceed to T02 and thereafter. 2nd at T02. When the release is permitted, the motor is first applied with a voltage in the CW direction. The CW direction is a rotation direction that can drive any power system in the conceptual diagrams described above.

Since the initial position of the clutch portion is the shutter / mirror system, the motor rotation from T02 is transmitted to the SM cam gear 58 and the shutter charge cam portion 58b (charge cam) and the mirror drive cam portion 58a which are integral with the cam gear 58. (Mirror cam) and change respectively. T
At the moment when the motor is turned on in 02, the camera is on standby with the shutter charging completed. Therefore, the timing gear 59 and the timing board 60 meshing with the SM cam gear 58 are detected to detect the phase of the SM cam gear 58. The states of the two switches formed by are changed as follows.

First, at T02, the timing SW charge (hereinafter SCSW) is on and the timing SW mirror (hereinafter MUSW) is off. The SM cam gear 58 rotates, and the charge cam moves down to the bottom dead center (T0
4). Here, since SCSW is a SW that determines that the cam is surely present at the top dead center, it shifts to OFF at the timing of T03 before the charge cam goes down. The mirror cam starts to lift almost at the same time as the charge cam goes down. Miller continues to climb and reaches top dead center at T05.

That is, at this point, the mirror is retracted from the optical path of the photographing and the exposure becomes possible. Immediately after T05 when the actual raising of the mirror is completed, the MUSW is turned on (T06), and it is possible to determine the end of the mirror drive. T0
Upon receiving 6, the motor stops. Actually, in order to stop the motor at high speed and accurately, a control that combines a reverse brake and a short brake is performed at the time of stopping, but here it is considered that the motor stopped at a slight overrun after T06. . Of course, this overrun is sufficiently narrow for the top dead center range of the mirror cam. Exposure is performed when the motor is stopped.

In the timing chart, since T07 is the motor start for mirror down, the exposure is T06.
However, the description is omitted here. However, the method of controlling the off-timing of the magnets of the front curtain and the rear curtain attracted by the shutter part to form the necessary exposure time is not different from the known method. Now, when the exposure is completed, the mirror down operation is started at T07, which corresponds to the start thereof, and the SM cam gear that is the same as the power system driven at the time of the mirror up is rotated.
It is sufficient to perform W rotation.

When the cam starts to rotate, the MUSW turns off at T22. Since the MUSW reliably detects the up state of the mirror, T05 of the mirror cam top dead center is detected.
To T23 are included in the range from T06 to T22. The mirror cam starts to descend from T23 and returns to the normal 45 ° down position at T09. Here, in this embodiment, the timing of the mirror down completion is not detected in order to minimize the number of sensors. Therefore, in terms of control, a constant timer is started from T22, and the motor is stopped at T08 at the set time to perform mirror down.

Although the timing of T08 is set slightly before T09, the timer is set so that the state of T09 is surely ensured when the motor is stopped due to the overrun of the motor.

With the above description, a series of operations from release to mirror up, exposure, and mirror down are completed.

In this embodiment, next, winding is performed. Since the drive system for winding is different, it is necessary to switch the clutch. At T10, clutch switching starts, and CCW rotation of the motor starts. As a result, the clutch cam 42, which has been locked at the charging position until now, rotates to the winding position. The clutch lever 47 is also lifted by the cam 42, but since the shutter mirror system was locked at the start timing of T10, the output of the clutch photo interrupter is Low. When the clutch lever 47 is lifted by the rotation of the motor, the photo interrupter output passes from the L level to the M level and becomes the H level. The fall timing after the H level range means the transition to the next locking surface.

Since the output level of the hoisting system is the M level, the clutch lever 47 following the cam down causes the photo interrupter to output the M level at T11. As a result, the motor stops, but there is a slight overrun, so the clutch cam 42 is rotated slightly to the rewinding side, and the clutch lever 47 is not in contact with the locking surface. T11
After that, at T12, the motor starts CW rotation. This C
The W rotation is a rotation in which the clutch cam 42 is first applied to the locking surface of the winding and the winding system is driven as it is.

That is, the spool starts to rotate in the winding direction from T13. In this embodiment, a photoreflector (feed PR) is used to detect the film feed amount (feed detection), and a method of directly counting the perforation of the film is used. Therefore, the perforation for one frame, that is, the output of 8 pulses is output from the feeding photo reflector. The first pulse from T12 is T14, and the rise of the photoreflector output is counted sequentially. When the eighth pulse is determined at T15, the motor immediately stops.

In order to stabilize the stopping accuracy of the film, the driving method is actually controlled before counting the 8th pulse, but the details are omitted here. The film side completed the preparation for the next shooting by winding one frame.

Finally, the shutter is charged and the series of operations is completed. First, the motor is CC again by T16.
Perform W rotation. This time, it is a switching operation from winding to shutter / mirror system.

Similar to the above-mentioned case, the stop timing is determined by the output of the above SCPI. However, when the clutch is rotated from the winding, first the M is temporarily returned at the rewinding position.
The level is output. Of course, if the motor is rotated CW here, the film will be rewound. Therefore, the determination unit passes the M level and continues the CW rotation.
As a result, the clutch lever lifts for the second time, and outputs the L level from SCPI at the timing of T18. However, the clutch cam 42 does not come into contact with the locking surface because the clutch cam 42 is rotated upward by the amount of overrun.

The motor starts CW rotation from T19. This rotation causes the clutch cam 42 to
The SM cam gear 58 is rotated by contacting the mirror position. The SM cam gear 58 is rotated to the mirror down in the operation before hoisting, and the cam shifts to the charge area of the charge cam. The shutter is charged by the charge cam, and the shutter charging is completed at the timing of the top dead center T20.

Since it is the charge SW that determines the completion of charging of the shutter, the SW shifts to ON at T21 which is slightly delayed from T20. Upon receiving this determination, the motor immediately stops. Of course, the amount of overrun at this time is narrow enough for the top dead center range of the charge cam to be SCS.
It is also configured to be sufficiently narrow with respect to the ON range of W.

By the above sequence, the preparation for the next photographing is completed, and the normal photographing sequence is completed.

Now, in the timing chart of FIG. 46, S
The principle of detecting the absolute position by utilizing the fact that the direct output of the CPI changes from the Low level to the High level has been described. However, the output of the SCPI is actually judged by the CPU via a processing circuit or the like. The circuit configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 47 is an electric circuit diagram showing a structure of an electric circuit of the position detecting mechanism in the camera.

In FIG. 47, reference numeral 191 is a clutch lever,
Reference numeral 192 is a detection photo interrupter SCPI, and reference numeral 194 is an LED built in the photo interrupter 192.
A current source for switching the current flowing through 195 to change the brightness of the LED 195, and a reference numeral 193 is a resistor for converting the photocurrent of the phototransistor 196 into a voltage.

Next, the position detecting method will be described.

As described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41, when the motor performs the switching operation, the clutch lever 4
7 moves. At this time, the moving portion of the clutch lever 47 moves at the concave-shaped detecting portion of the photo interrupter 192. At this time, in the moving portion of the clutch lever 47, the Xd, Xe, and Xf portions shown in FIG. 42 reciprocate.

Xd, Xe, X of the clutch lever 47
Since the portions f have different transmittances, an output signal corresponding to the transmittances can be obtained. That is, as shown in FIG. 48, when the photo interrupter 192 (SCPI) corresponds to the light shielding portion Xd of the clutch lever 47, the level of the output signal becomes V1.

Further, the semi-transparent portion Xe of the clutch lever 47
When the photo interrupter 192 (SCPI) corresponds to the above, the level of the output signal is V2, and when the photo interrupter 192 (SCPI) corresponds to the entire transmission part Xf of the clutch lever 47, The level of the output signal becomes V3.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the movement of the clutch lever 47 is caused by the photo interrupter 192 (SCP
To explain which part of the clutch lever 47 I) corresponds to, Xd → Xf → Xe → Xf → Xe → Xd is 1
It works as a cycle. Therefore, the clutch lever 47
The waveform of the output signal when the is operated is as shown in FIG.

When the initial position is detected here, L
When the current flowing through the ED 195 is adjusted to an appropriate value, the output signal waveform as shown in FIG. 50 is obtained. At this time, the clutch lever 47 is detected by detecting the falling portion from the output level V'3 to V'1.
Detects that is in the initial position.

Next, when detecting the states 2 and 3,
The LED current is adjusted again so that the output signal waveform as shown in FIG. 51 is obtained. V3 of this signal waveform
The position of the clutch lever can be detected by counting the fall from "" to V2 ".

The driving force transmission mechanism of this embodiment and the structure and position detecting mechanism of the camera to which the embodiment is applied have been described above in detail. Next, the sequence of the entire camera will be described with reference to the flowchart.

For the description, refer to the above-mentioned FIG. 45 for explaining the flowcharts and circuit blocks of FIG. 52 and subsequent figures.

First, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 52 to 76 will be described.

The flow charts shown in FIGS. 52 to 76 show the main flow. Hereinafter, they will be sequentially described.

Steps S1 to S38 show the power-on reset process. The power-on reset operation when the battery is turned on is sequentially executed from step S1.

First, in steps S1 and S2,
The interrupt permission level of the CPU 120 is set. next,
In step S3, interrupts are prohibited so as not to be interrupted by noise, and in step S4, the stack pointer of the CPU 120 is set. Next, in step S5, the CPU
Set 120 machine cycles.

Next, in steps S7 to S12, the RAM area inside the CPU 120 is cleared to "0", and in step S13, the input / output of the port and the output state are set. Next, in step S14, the iFic
On activates the interface IC 138. Further, in step S15, the CPU 120 reads out the data with the adjuster and performs the processing according to each version.
The program version of is set in RAM.

At steps S16 to S17, L
Initialize the CD136 port, step S1
In 8, it is judged whether the regulator (not shown) is connected,
If connected, communication processing with the adjuster is performed in step S19.

In steps S20 to S23, the operation SW state is read, and in step S24,
The communication check with the EEPROM 135 is performed, and if the data is abnormal, the camera operation is locked. Then, in step S25, the data in the EEPROM 135 is transferred to the CPU.
It is read into the RAM inside 120 and expanded, and step S26
Now, measure the temperature.

In steps S27 and S28, it is determined whether or not the strobe light emitting unit 174 is raised, and if the strobe light emitting unit 174 is raised, the flag F_ST is set.
Set CHRG to “1” to request strobe charging. In addition, in steps S29 to S32, the power SW
When (PWSW) 153 is turned on, the power-on state is set. Flags F_TSYS1, F_TSY
The meaning of S0 is as shown in Table 1 shown in FIG.

When the camera is in the power off state,
When the flag F_TSYS1,0 is 00, the LCD display of the camera disappears, 0 and 1 are respectively displayed during low power consumption, and the LCD display is 1 and 0 when the camera is in a standby state in which the remote control signal can be received. During LCD display, the numbers are 1 and 1, respectively.

In steps S33 and S34, when the back cover is in the open state from the opened / closed state of the back cover, F_BK
The OPN flag is set to "1", and in step S35, the abnormal state is changed to a normal state in preparation for the case where the battery is removed during mechanical operation by the mechanical process (certified by the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 133 to 137). Return once.

In step S36, the flash mode of the camera is returned to the initial state. Auto strobe (AUTO),
In the red-eye reduction strobe mode (AUTO-S), the strobe mode is left as it is, and in the other strobe modes, the auto strobe mode (AUTO) is set.

In step S38, the LCD display time is set. After step S39, a main sequence is configured while the battery is inserted.

Steps S39 to S87 show the transition process of the CPU 120.

If power is off in step S39, the process jumps to step S81 to perform power off processing. If the power is on, in step S40, L
It is determined whether or not the CD display is on, and if the LCD display is off, the process jumps to step S57, and if it is being displayed, the port set being displayed is set at step S41.

In step S42, data for LCD display is set, and in step S43, step S42.
The LCD 136 is displayed based on the data set in. In step S44, the back cover switch (B
If the KSW) 155 is in the open / closed state or open, step S48.
Jump to.

At step S45, interrupt is prohibited once,
In step S46, the interrupt permission during the LCD display and the prohibition level are set. Further, in step S47, interruption is permitted, and in step S48, during strobe charging, the process proceeds to step S88, and steps S49 and S50.
Is in the standby mode for the remote controller, the process proceeds to step S88 during the remote control release, and the CPU 120 causes SLE in step S51.
The common-side ports (Sig143 to Sig145) are output at the "L" level so that they can be raised by the operation SW during EP.

In step S52, the interrupt is prohibited once, and in step S53, the SLE of the CPU 120 with the back cover opened.
The interrupt permission prohibition level in EP is set, and the interrupt is permitted in step S54. And step S
With the 55, when cleaning the film cartridge while opening the back cover, static electricity is generated through the DX contact piece 158 (DXSW).
SLEEP to prevent the CPU 120 from running out of control
Put in a state.

In step S56, the key reading common port (Si) set to the "L" level in step S51.
g143 to Sig145) are returned to the "H" level output.
Further, in step S58, the LCD display is turned off, and in step S59, the port of the CPU 120 is set for low power consumption during SLEEP. Next, in step S60,
Interrupt branching is prohibited, and in step S61, the permission / prohibition level of the interrupt during display off is set.

In step S62, the machine cycle is delayed to reduce the power consumption of the CPU 120. And
In step S63, the CPU 120 is put in the SLEEP state, and in step S65, the machine cycle of the CPU 120 is set to the maximum speed. Next, in step S66, SLE
When the power SW 153 is rising from the EP, and in step S67, the back cover SW 155 (BKSW).
And the rewind button 160 in step S68.
(RWMSW) and the switch 121 on the key matrix
If it is ~ 133, the process jumps to step S70.

In step S69, if it is a timer for timekeeping, the process jumps to step S87; otherwise, it jumps to step S88. In step S70, the mode display switching prohibition flag is set to "1". And
In step S71, the operated flag for updating the display time is set to "1" by operating the button, and step S7 is performed.
In 2, the port is set.

At step S73, the interface i
The c138 is activated, and in step S75, display data is set. In step S76, LC
The D display is turned on, and in steps S78 to S79, when the strobe light emitting unit 174 is in the pop-up state, a charging request is made.

In step S81, the LCD display is turned off. In step S82, the port setting is turned off. In step S83, interrupt branching is prohibited.
In step S84, permission / prohibition of the interrupt level in the power-off state is set. In step S85, the CPU
120 is put in the STOP state. In step S87, C
A rising flag indicating that the PU 120 has risen from SLEEP and STOP is set to "1".

In steps S88 to S93, it is determined whether the switches SW have been operated. If they have been operated, the operated flag is set to "0" and the LCD display timer is updated. Further, in the self-timer mode of step S94, while the remote controller is on standby, the interface ic 138 is set to the mode for remote control reception in step S95, and the remote control circuit is turned on in step S96.

If the regulator is connected in step S97, communication with the regulator is performed in step S98. In step S99, the display timer counts. If the counter overflows in step S100, the process proceeds to step S101. If not, step S11.
Jump to 3.

[0254] In step S101, if the counter overflows while the LCD display is off (approximately 4 hours), CP
Step S110 to set U120 to the STOP state
F_PWR on flag, F_TS in step S111
YS0, all F_TSYS1 flags are set to "0" in step S112.

If the counter overflows during standby for the remote controller (about 18 minutes) in step S102, or the counter overflows during standby for the remote controller (approximately 30 seconds) in step S103, the LCD display time is terminated. That is, in step S106, a timer is set for counting the timer while the LCD display is off, and in steps S107 and S108, F-TSYS1 is set to "0" to indicate that the display is off, and F_TSY is set.
Set S0 to "1".

In step S109, the flag F-MODDSL is set to "0" to cancel the self mode, and the process jumps to step S39.

In step S113, the change and state of the keys are detected, and the power SW 153 (PWSW) and panorama S
W154 (PANSW), case back SW155 (BKS
W), pop-up SW 159 (PUPSW), and rewind SW 160 (RWMSW) are detected. Step S11
If the button is not pressed in step 4, the process jumps to step S217.

Steps S115 to S132 show the processing when the rewind button RWMSW160 is pressed.

In steps S115 and S116, if the rewind button 160 is not pressed, step S115 is performed.
Jump to 133. Step S117, Step S
At 118, if rewinding has already been completed, the process jumps to step S133. F_CNDT0 and 1 are flags indicating the state of the film, and their meanings are shown in Table 2 in FIG.

Now, Table 2 will be described.

This is a function of automatically feeding the film when the camera is loaded with the cartridge and the back cover is closed. When the film is not wound correctly, the auto-load fails.
Both F_CNDT0 and 1 are “0”.

When the film is properly wound up and ready for shooting, the autoloading is completed, and F_CNDT0 is set to "1", F
_CNDT1 becomes "0". It indicates that the film is wound one frame at a time for each shutter release. The film end is detected during the winding of one frame, and when the film is in the rewinding state, the rewind is in progress. F_CNDT0 is “0”, F_
CNDTI becomes "1". Rewinding is completed when it is detected that all the film has been wound into the cartridge during rewinding. F_CNDT0 is "1", F_CNDT
1 becomes "1".

In step S120, the button operated flag is set to "1". In step S121, rewinding is not performed when the case back is opened, so the process jumps to step S133. In step S122, initial settings for mechanical drive are performed. The contents prohibit interrupt branch, set port, interrupt strobe charge, battery check, DC
/ DC is on. In step S123, the initial positioning of the clutch is performed. In step S124, the clutch is switched to the rewind position.

In steps S125 and S126, F-CNDT0 and 1 are set during rewind. In step S127, F-CNDT0, 1 is set to EEPRO.
Store in M135. In step S128, the motor is driven to rewind the film. In step S129, the result of rewinding is set to F-CNDT0, 1 in the subroutine of step S128 rewinding, and the result is stored in the EEPROM.

In step S130, since the lens barrel is retracted during power off and the mirror does not carelessly move up and down to collide with the lens frame, the process jumps to step S133. In step S131, the sequence clutch is moved to the mirror position (that is, the initial position) during power-on, and in step S132, the shutter charging operation is performed to drive and stop the clutch lever to the clutch cam locking position (from FIG. 18). 19).

Steps S133 to S164 are
The processing of the back cover SW155 (BKSW) is shown.

If it is determined in step S133 that the back cover SW155 has not changed, the process jumps to step S165.
If the back cover SW 155 has changed, step S1
At 34, the operated flag is set to "1". Step S
In 135, if the state of the back lid SW155 (BKSW) is "1", it indicates that the back lid has changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, the process jumps to step S154 to perform auto loading. When it is "0", it indicates that the back cover has changed from the closed to the open state, and the operation for removing the winding and rewinding drive system so that the film may be pulled out is performed as follows. To do.

In step S136, mechanical drive initialization is performed. In step S137, the film state flag is set to "0", and in step S138, the EEPROM is set.
Store in 135. Steps S139 and S14
At 0, the state of the back cover opened is stored in the EEPROM 135. In step S150, the back cover open state flag is set to "1".
To

In step S151, the sequence clutch is set to the mirror position (initial position), and is wound up and removed from the rewinding position. In steps S152 and S153, during power-on, shutter charging is performed and driving is stopped at the clutch cam locking position. Jump to step S165. Does nothing during power off.

In step S154, mechanical drive initialization is performed.

In steps S155 and S156, the state of the back cover closed is stored in the EEPROM 135. In step S157, the back cover open state flag is set to "0". After the clutch is set to the initial position in step S158, the sequence clutch is set to the winding position in step S159. In step S160, the film is idly fed to prepare for shooting. The result of the success or failure of the blank feeding is output to F_CNDT0,1. The result is stored in the EEPROM 135 in step S161.

In step S162, the sequence clutch is moved to the mirror position in step S163 while the power is on, and shutter charging is performed in step S164 to set the clutch cam to the engagement position.

Steps S165 to S172 show the pop-up processing of the flash light emission unit.

In step S165, the pop-up SW
If there is no change in 159, jump to step S173. If there is a change, the flag operated in step S166 is set to "1". In step S167, if the pop-up SW 159 (PUPSW) state is "0", it means that the light emitting portion of the strobe has been moved up, and the process jumps to step S170. If the value is "1", it means that the light emitting section of the strobe has been lowered.
At 168, the strobe charge request flag is set to "0" to prohibit charging.

[0275] In step S169, the strobe mode is turned off, and the process jumps to step S173. In step S170, the strobe charge request flag is set to "1".
And allow charging. In step S171, the off mode of the flash mode is released. In step S172, the spot metering mode is canceled, and the process jumps to step S173. Steps S173 to S206 show a process of turning off the power SW 153 (PWSW).

In step S173, the power SW 153
If there is no change in (PWSW), the process jumps to step S113. In step S174, the power SW 153
When the (PWSW) status is "1", the power SW 153
Indicates that the switch has been turned on → off, the process jumps to step S207. In step S175, mechanical drive initial setting is performed, and in step S176, the EEPROM 135 is set.
Check the data of.

At step S177, the EEPROM 13
The contents of No. 5 are expanded in the RAM of the CPU 120. In step S179, the initial positioning of the clutch is performed. In step S180, the zoom retracting flag is set to "0", and it is stored in the EEPROM 135 in step S181. In step S182, the zoom is driven to the wide position. In step S183, the number of zoom drive pulses is converted into a zoom encoder value, and in step S184, an open aperture value is calculated from the zoom encoder value.

In step S185, the lens collapsing flag F-LNSSNK is set to "0", and step S18 is performed.
In step 6, the data is stored in the EEPROM 135. Step S18
In step 7, the number of lens drive pulses from the optical infinity position is determined. In steps S188 and S189, the lens is driven to the ∞ position. In step S190, all the operation SWs 121 to 133 are pseudo-read once to initialize the internal RAM.

In step S192, the flash mode is reset. AUTO other than AUTO and AUTO-S
To In steps S193 and S194, A
Initialize E mode to program mode. In step S195, the spot metering mode is cleared.
In step S196, the self mode is cleared. In step S197, the remote control release flag is cleared. In step S198, the release lock flag is cleared. In steps S200 and S201, the flash charging time counter is reset.

At step S202, the charging voltage monitor data is cleared. In step S203, the power-on flag is set, and in steps S204 and S205, the LCD display flag F-TSYS0, 1 is set. In step S206, a display time timer (about 30 seconds) is set, and the process jumps to step S113.

Steps S207 to S216 are
A process of turning on / off the power SW 153 (PWSW) is shown.

In step S207, the mechanical drive is initialized. In step S208, one lens group is extended from the optical infinity position to the near side of a predetermined number of pulses so that the one lens group and the two lens groups of the lens groups do not interfere with each other when each lens frame is collapsed. In step S209, the lens retracting flag F-LNSSNK is set to "1", and the step S209 is performed.
At 210, it is stored in the EEPROM 135.

In step S211, the zoom motor 146 retracts each lens frame to the retracted position (FIG. 1). In step S212, the zoom retracted position flag F-
Set ZMSNK to "1", and in step S213, EE
Store in PROM135. In step S214, the power-on flag is set to "0", and in steps S215 and S216, the F-TSYS 0 and 1 are set to the power-off state, and the process jumps to step S113.

In steps S217 to S226, the battery is removed during rewinding or the power SW 153 (PW
(SW) is turned off → on or turned on → off, and rewinding resuming processing is performed when the rewinding is temporarily interrupted.

In steps S217 and S218, if F_CNDT0, 1 is not being rewound, the process jumps to step S227. In step S219, mechanical drive initialization is performed. In step S220, the initial position of the sequence clutch is set. In step S221, the sequence clutch is switched to the rewinding drive system.

At step S222, the film is rewound. In step S223, the result of rewinding is F.
-Store CNDT0, 1 in EEPROM 135. If power is on at step S224, step S224
At 225, switch the sequence clutch to the mirror position,
In step S226, shutter charging is performed and the clutch cam is driven to the locking position.

Steps S227 to S232 are processings for locking the operation of the camera by button operation, and are processings when the film has failed in idling, when rewinding is completed, and during power-off.

If F_TSYS1 is "0" in step S227, the power is off or the LCD display is off, so that there is no need to proceed any further, so the routine jumps to step S39. If F_CNDT1 is "1" in step S228, the process is not rewinding because rewinding is in progress or rewinding is completed. Therefore, the process jumps to step S39 to form a loop of the main routine. In step S229, F_CN
If DT0 and DT are "0" and the autoloading fails, and the back cover is closed in step S230, the DX in step S231 and step S232 is performed.
The presence / absence of a cartridge is detected from the contact piece 158 (DXSW) to confirm the presence / absence of the cartridge. If there is a patrone, the button operation is locked, and the process jumps to step S39.

If the strobe charge request flag is "1" in step S233, strobe charge is performed in step S234. In step S235, switch group 0 (121 to 126) is detected. SWs to detect are release SWs 121 and 122 (R1SW, R2SW),
Zoom up SW123 (ZUSW), zoom down S
W124 (ZDSW), Self SW125 (SELFS
W) and spot SW126 (SPOTSW).

[0290] Steps S239 to S252 are 1
This is processing when the 26 spot button (SPOTSW) is pressed.

In step S239, the switch group 0
If there is no change in any of the switches, step S253
Jump to. In step S240, the spot SW1
If 26 does not change, the process jumps to step S253. In step S241, the operated flag is set to "1".
To

In step S242, the spot mode is not accepted in the night view mode, so the process jumps to step S251. In step S243, since the spot mode is not accepted during the flash pop-up, the process jumps to step S251. If the spot mode has already been set, the spot is released, and the process jumps to step S251.

In step S245, interrupt branching is prohibited. In step S246, strobe charging is suspended. In step S248, the spot mode flag is set to "1" to set the spot mode, and step S249 is performed.
Then, the F_SPLOCK flag is set to "0", spot photometry is performed by the auto focus sensor in step S250, and the process jumps to step S252.

In step S251, the spot mode flag is set to "0". In step S252, the LED 143 indicating the spot mode in F is turned on / off in the spot mode. In step S253, the process jumps to step S264 during the remote control release, and to step S264 during the step S254 release half-press (only the RISW 121 is on).

Steps S255 to S260 show the processing when the release button 121 is not pressed.

In step S255, flags related to autofocus calculation are initialized. Step S2
In 57, when the completion of integration of the AFIC 134 is detected, the data is read from the AFIC 134, the defocus amount is calculated, and the number of drive pulses of the lens is calculated. Step S2
At 59, F-RELEND becomes "1" after the shutter release, and the 121 release button is cleared by a flag which detects that the release button is still pressed after the shutter release. In step S260, the F-AECMPL clears this with a flag for detecting the end of photometry, and in step S2
Jump to 64. In step S264, when it is detected that the release button 121 is pressed even after the shutter release, the process jumps to step S355 to lock the release.

Steps S266 to S281 show photometric processing.

In step S266, if the photometry has been completed once (F-AECMPL flag is "1"), AE is performed.
In order to lock, the process jumps to step S282 and the photometry is not performed again. In step S267, interrupt branching is prohibited. In step S268, strobe charging is suspended. In step S271, the DX code of the cartridge is read, and in step S272, the DX code is converted into an SV value.

At step S273, the photometric SPD 17
Divided photometry by 0 is performed. In step S274, the BV value is calculated from the photometric A / D value. In step S275, average photometry calculation is performed. In step S276, evaluation photometry calculation is performed. In step S277, backlight determination is performed. In step S278, the EV value is calculated from the BV value and the SV value, and the AV value, TV value,
The guide number value for strobe emission is calculated, and the strobe emission request flag is set.

[0300] In step S281, F_AECMPL
Is set to "1" to indicate the end of photometry. Step S282
The first remote control release in step S283,
At the first time when the release 121 is half-pressed in step S284, the operated flag is set to "1" in step S285.

Further, step S286 and step S27.
In step 8, if there is a light emission request based on the photometry calculation result, the strobe charging voltage is checked in step S287,
As a result, when the voltage reaches the light emission enable voltage, the strobe light emission enable flag F_FLSEN is set to "1". In step S288, if light emission is possible, the process jumps to step S290, and if light emission is not possible, the strobe charge request flag is set to "1".

At steps S290 and S291,
When there is a strobe light emission request and the light emission is impossible, the strobe charge is prioritized, the autofocus operation is not performed, and the process jumps to step S296. Step S29
In step 3, the strobe charge request flag is set to "0", in step S294 strobe charge is interrupted, and in step S295, autofocus calculation and lens driving are performed. At the time of focusing, the focusing flag F_iNFOCUS flag is set to "1". When out of focus, out of focus display flag F_A
The FNGDSP flag is set to "1". When the integration of AFIC134 is not completed, nothing is done and the process returns from the subroutine.

In step S296, when strobe light is emitted,
Alternatively, the state of the flash being charged and the result of focusing / non-focusing after the autofocus operation are displayed on the LED 14 in the viewfinder.
3 is lit or blinked to display. Step S2
In step 98, the process jumps to step S300 when the remote control is released, and to step S355 when the release buttons 121 and 122 are not fully pressed in step S299.

Steps S300 to S306 are processes for determining whether or not shutter release is possible.

At step S300, F_AFCMPL is set.
When is “0”, the photometry has not been completed, and therefore the shutter release is not performed and the process jumps to step S355. In step S302, when F_iNFOCUS is "0", the focus is not yet achieved, so the process jumps to step S355. In step S303 and step S304, when there is a strobe light emission request and the strobe charging voltage has not reached the light emission enable voltage, the release timing is missed. Therefore, in step S305, the remote control release flag is set to "0" so as not to release. To do. In step S306, the F-RELEND flag is set to "1" so that the release lock is performed until the release button is once released.
Jump to 355.

At step S307, since the shutter release is proceeded to, the LED 143 in the finder is turned off.
In step S308, interrupt branching is prohibited. In step S309, a battery check is performed. In step S310, the DC / DC converter is driven, and the process jumps to step S311.

Steps S311 to S339 show the delay time processing at the time of the self-timer or the remote control release. The shutter release is performed 12 seconds after the focus is set in the self mode, and the shutter release is performed 2 seconds after the focus is set in the remote control mode in the remote control mode. To do.

If it is determined in step S311 that the mode is not the self mode, the process jumps to step S340. Step S3
In step 12, the process jumps to step S332 to create a delay time of 2 seconds during remote control release. In step S313, X is detected in order to detect that the power SW is off.
The power SW ON state data is put into the R6 register.

In step S314, the rewind SW 160
Rewind SW to XR5 register to detect ON of
Enter the off state data for 160. Step S315
Then, in order to keep the self-LED 170 lit for 10 seconds, data for 10 seconds is set in the timer and the blinking flag F_2Hz is set to "0". Step S
In 316, a switching flag F-UTY of 10 seconds / 2 seconds is used.
0 is set to “0”. In step S317, FU
When TY0 is "0", self-L
To turn on the ED 170, the process jumps to step S319. When F_UTY0 is “1”, the remaining 2 seconds are indicated, and the self LED 170 blinks at a cycle of 2 Hz.

In step S318, the blinking flag F-
If 2 Hz is "1", in step S319, self LE
D170 is turned on, and if "0", step S319b
Then, the self LED 170 is turned off. Step S32
For 0, read the 0 group of switches, step S
If the self-SW 125 is turned on at 321, it is determined that the self-timer is stopped, and the process jumps to step S338.

In step S322, the power SW 153
Is read, and the result of step S323 is power S
If W153 is off, jump to step S338.
In step S324, the rewinding SW 160 is read, and if the result of step S325 is that the rewinding button 160 is on, the process jumps to step S338. Step S32
In step 6, one group of switches 127 to 132 is read, and if there is no change in any of the switches in step S327, the process jumps to step S329 to continue the process.

In step S328, the program SW1
If it is determined that 31 (PSW) is pressed, the process jumps to step S336 to suspend the process. Step S32
At 9, the preset timer value is monitored, and if an overflow occurs, the F_TiMCNT flag is set to "1". In order to generate a blinking cycle of 2Hz, read the timer value and perform F-2H every 250ms.
Processing for inverting the z flag is performed.

In step S330, F_TiMCNT is used.
If is "0", the process jumps to step S317. F_T
If iMCNT is "1", the timer has overflowed, and the set time has ended. Step S3
If F_UTY0 is "0" at 31, it means that the time measurement for 10 seconds is completed, and the process jumps to step S332 to perform the time measurement for 2 seconds. If F_UTY0 is “1”,
Since this means the end of time measurement for 2 seconds, the process jumps to step S334 to shift to shutter release.

At step S332, data of 2 seconds is set as the timer value. The F_2Hz flag is reset to "0". In step S333, F_UTY0 is set to "1" to indicate that the time is being measured for 2 seconds, and the process jumps to step S317.

In steps S334 and S335, the shutter release by the shutter release button in the self mode releases the self mode, but the shutter release by the remote control in the self mode does not release the self mode. In step S336,
The self LED 171 is turned off, and in step S337, the camera is reset. It clears the self mode, releases the remote control release, initializes the AE mode, initializes the flash mode, and drives the lens to an infinite optical position.

In step S338, the operated flag is set to "1", and in step S339, the self-LED 171 is set.
Off and jump to step S345. In step S340, the self LED 171 is turned off.

In step S341, shutter release processing (explained with the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 80 to 83) is performed.

In step S342, F_RELEND
Set the flag to "1" and release lock until you release your finger from the release button. In step S343, F_
The MODSPT is set to "0" to reset the spot mode. In step S344, the operated flag is set to "1". In step S345, F_RMC2R
Set the flag to "0" and clear the remote control release flag.

In step S352, F_STCHRG
Set the flag to "1". Set the strobe charge request flag to "1". In step S353, AFic134
Reset and start integration of auto focus.
In step S354, 2 Hz is displayed in order to display the LCD 136 or blink the LED 143 in the viewfinder.
Set the timer to measure the time.

In steps S355 to S357, the first-time flag of the remote control signal is set to "0" after passing through the main loop twice so that the interrupt of the remote control signal may enter anywhere in the main loop.

Steps S358 to S376 show the processing of the zoom buttons (ZUSW) and (ZDSW).

In step S358, since the zoom buttons 123 and 124 are not accepted while the release button 121 is half pressed, the flow jumps to step S437. Step S3
At 59, F-ZMUP is set to "1" to set the zoom drive direction flag to the tele direction. Step S360
Then, if the zoom-up button 123 (ZUSW) is pressed, the process jumps to step S363. Step S3
At 61, F_ZMUP is set to "0" in order to set the zoom drive direction flag to the wide direction. Step S3
At 62, if the zoom down button 124 (ZDSW) is pressed, the process jumps to step S363, and if not, the process jumps to step S377.

In step S363, the operated flag is set to "1". In step S364, during remote control release (when the F_RMC2R flag is "1"), the process jumps to step S437. In step S365,
Perform mechanical drive initial settings. In step S366, zoom driving is performed while the zoom buttons 123 and 124 are being pressed. In step S367, F_AECMPL is set to "0" to reset photometry. In step S368, F_RELEND is set to "0" to prohibit release when 1R is still pressed.

In step S370, the zoom pulse is converted into a zoom encoder value. In step S371,
Open FNo. Is calculated. In steps S372 to S375, the aperture value set in advance in the aperture priority mode and the open FNo. And the open FNo.
Is greater than the set value, the FNo. Put in. In step S376, the number of lens drive pulses from the mechanical contact position to the optical infinity position is calculated, and the process jumps to step S437.

At step S377, the switches 121-
If the group 0 of 126 has not changed, step S38.
Jump to 7.

Steps S378 to S386 show the processing of the self switch 125.

[0327] If it is determined in step S378 that the state of the self-SW 125 has not changed, the process jumps to step S437. In step S379, the operated flag is set to "1".
To In step S380, if already in the self mode, the process jumps to step S384. Otherwise, in step S381, F_MODSLF is set to "1".
To

At step S382, the mode of the interface ic138 is set. In step S383, the remote control circuit inside the interface ic138 is turned on, and the process jumps to step S437. In step S384, the self mode is released. Step S3
At 85, the remote control release flag is cleared. In step S386, the remote control circuit inside the interface ic138 is turned off, and the process jumps to step S437.

In step S387, the switch groups 127 to 132 are read and the fall of the switches is detected. The switch to read is Picto Switch 12
7 to 130, a program SW131 (PSW) and a strobe mode SW132 (STSW).

If there is no change in the status of the switch groups 127 to 132 in step S388, step S4
Jump to 21. In step S389, the operated flag is set to "1". In step S390, the process jumps to step S403 during remote control release. If there is no fall of the pictograph SW127 in step S391, the process jumps to step S394. Pict S
If W127 is falling, PC is set in step S392.
V175 is sounded at 2 KHz for 33 msec (see FIG. 166).

In step S393, the AE mode is set to the pictogram 1 mode, and the process jumps to step S437. Steps S394 to S402 are settings of the pictogram 2, pictogram 3, and pictogram 4 AE modes.

In step S403, the program SW13
When 1 is pressed, a sound is generated by the PCV 175 in step S404, and then the mode is reset in step S405.
AE mode is program mode, strobe is AUTO or AUTO-s mode, self release, remote control release release, spot mode release, lens is in optical infinite position. Then, the process jumps to step S437. If the program SW131 is not pressed, step S406
Jump to.

In step S406, the process jumps to step S437 during remote control release. If the remote control release is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S407. Step S407
Then, if the strobe light emitting unit is not popped up, the process jumps to step S437. In step S408, if the flash mode switch 132 is not pressed, the process jumps to step S437.

In step S409, if the LCD display is restarted by the strobe mode switch 132 while the LCD display is off, the strobe mode is not updated, and the process jumps to step S437. In steps S410 to S412, if the strobe mode is AUTO, the strobe mode is set to AUTO-S. Step S41
In 3 to step S415, the flash mode is AUTO-.
When S, the strobe mode is set to FiLL-iN. In steps S416 to S418, if the strobe mode is FiLL-iN, the strobe mode is set to AUTO. In step S419, the strobe mode is set to EEPR.
Store in OM135.

In step S420, the spot metering mode is set to "0", and the process jumps to step S437. In step S421, the fall of switch group 2 is detected. The group 133 is an aperture priority mode switch (AVSW). In step S422, the group 1
If 33 does not fall, the process jumps to step S437.

In step S423, the operated flag is set to "1". In step S424, during remote control release, the process jumps to step S437. Step S4
If there is no trailing edge of the aperture priority mode switch 133 (AVSW) at 25, the process jumps to step S437. If the aperture priority mode is not set in step S426, the process jumps to step S431. In step S427, when the LCD display is restarted with the aperture priority mode button (AVSW), only the display is performed and the aperture value is not updated. Therefore, the process jumps to step S437.

At step S428, the PCV 175 is set to 2
Sound is generated for 33 msec at kHz (see FIG. 166).

In step S429, the aperture value is increased by 1 EV to obtain the minimum aperture value, for example, FNo. When it becomes 22 or more, it is set to the maximum aperture value. In step S430, EEPRO
It jumps to step S437 which stores in M135.
In step S431, the AE mode is set to the aperture priority mode. In step S432, PCV175 is sounded.

At steps S433 to S435,
The aperture value that was set is the open FNo. If it is smaller than the set aperture value, the F-number is open to the set aperture value. Put in. Step S4
At 36, it is stored in the EEPROM 135.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 will be described.

The flow charts of FIGS. 77 to 79 are subroutines that constitute a series of shutter release sequences of from the mirror up, the aperture down, the shutter release mirror down, the aperture open film winding, and the shutter charge.

First, in step S500, if there is no flash emission request as a result of the photometric calculation (F_FLSRQ flag is "0"), the process jumps to step S508. Also,
In step S501 and step S502, when the strobe mode is not AUTO-S (red-eye reduction mode) or in stop motion mode (AE mode for fast-moving subject) in picto mode, the red-eye reduction emission is not performed in step S504. To jump.

In step S503, red-eye reduction pre-emission is performed, and in step S504, the power SW 153 may be turned off during red-eye pre-emission.
When W153 is turned off, the process jumps to step S550.

In step S505, the emission GNo. To calculate. In step S506, it is checked whether the charging voltage is a charging voltage capable of emitting light. In step S507, the charging voltage and the light emission GNo. Calculate the flash firing time from and. In step S508, the sequence clutch is switched to the mirror position. Step S5
In 09, the imprinting time of the date module 137 is calculated from the ISO value of the film. In step S510, the number of drive pulses of the stepping motor 151 from the initial position of the diaphragm is calculated from the diaphragm value and the zoom encoder value. In step S511, the excitation of the magnet that attracts and holds the front and rear curtains of the shutter is turned on.

Next, steps S512 to S52.
Before explaining 0, according to Table 3 shown in FIG.
The relationship between the Y3 and 4 flags, the MiRUP and the MiRDN subroutine will be described.

Each subroutine is F_UTY3,
The processing contents can be switched by the flag of 4. When F_UTY3 is set to "1" and the subroutine is CALL, mirror up or mirror down processing is performed. F_U
When the flag of TY4 is set to "1" and the subroutine is called, the operation of narrowing down or opening up is performed. In the above, if both the flags of F_UTY3 and F_UTY4 are set to "1" and a subroutine call is made, two processes can be performed simultaneously with the aperture being opened while the aperture is being narrowed down or the mirror being being down while the mirror is being raised.

At steps S512 and 513, the F-UT
Set both Y3 and 4 to "1". Next, step S514.
If the sequential drive flag is "1", step S51 is performed in order to perform mirror up and narrowing down separately.
In step 5, F_UTY3 is set to "0".

Here, in consideration of minimizing the image disappearance time, the aperture is narrowed down first, and then the mirror is raised. Further, the sequential drive flag is set to the above-mentioned step S309.
It is set by the battery check of. That is, when the power supply cannot supply the energy necessary for driving the mirror and the diaphragm at the same time, it is judged by the battery check based on the power supply voltage data written in the EEPROM 135 by the adjuster in advance, and the diaphragm and the mirror are driven separately. This is a flag for instructing switching.

In step S516, F_UTY3,4
Mirror up or narrow down according to the contents of. In step S517, if the sequential drive flag is "1", the MiRUP in step S516 has already been used for narrowing down. Therefore, in steps S518 and S519, F_UTY3, 4 is set so that only the mirror up is performed.
Is set according to Table 3.

In step S520, MiRUP is called. Next, in step S521, shutter release processing is performed. Next, in step S278, the shutter time obtained by the photometric calculation is reproduced by a timer, the timing at which the front curtain and the rear curtain start to travel is calculated, and the shutter is released.

In steps S522 to S530, the mirror is down and the aperture is opened. When driving sequentially, the mirror is lowered first, and then the aperture is opened.

In steps S531 to S535, the total release count is stored in the EEPROM 135.
That is, by reading the data stored in advance,
Is stored in the EEPROM 135.

In steps S536 to S538, it is determined whether or not to wind one frame of film. That is, since F-CNDT0 and F-CNDT1 are assigned to the 0th and 1st bits of the 8-bit RAM called D-CNDT, the determination is made according to Table 2 shown in FIG. 219. Only when the autoloading is completed, the film is wound up by one frame.

In step S539, the sequence clutch is switched to the winding drive system. Next, step S540.
Then, a flag F-OWiND indicating that winding is being performed
Is set to "1", and in step S541, 35EEPRO is set.
Store in M.

At step S542, one frame of film is wound up. In this one-frame winding subroutine, when one film is wound, one is added to the number of film frames. F_C if the film is not wound within one frame
NDT0 is set to "0" and F-CNDT1 is set to "1" so that rewinding is performed.

In step S543, the sequence clutch is returned to the initial position. Next, in step S544, F
_OWiND is set to "0" to end the winding. Then, in step S545, F_OWInD, film count, F-CNDT0, and F-CNDT1 are EEPR.
Store in OM135.

Next, in step S546, shutter charging is performed. Then, in steps S547 to S549, after 100 msec, the excitation of the mirror motor and the stepping motor of the diaphragm is turned off, and then step S55.
Return 0.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 80 to 83 will be described. Note that this flowchart shows the shutter release processing.

First, in step S551, interrupt branch prohibition is performed. Then, steps S552 to S558.
Then, from the shutter speed, high speed seconds, medium speed seconds, and low speed seconds are determined, and if high speed seconds, F-UTYA is set to "1". If the speed is low, the F-UTY9 is set to "1", and the data of the power SW 153 being ON is stored in the XR6 register.

In step S559, the TV value is converted into a timer value convenient for reproducing the shutter speed. Then, in steps S560 to S562, the timers 1, 2 and 3, 4 are initialized.

Next, step S563 and step S56.
In 4, the shutter time is added to the above timers 1 and 2,
In steps S565 to S567, the timer values obtained by adding the trailing curtain running time to the shutter seconds are set in the timers 3 and 4. The timers 1 and 2 are timers for measuring the start of the trailing curtain running, and the timers 3 and 4 are timers for measuring the start of the mirror down.

Next, steps S575 to S57.
7, the adjustment value for correcting the shutter speed is EEPRO
It is read from M135 and stored in the R3 register and the R4 register.

At steps S578 and S579, the timers 1 and 2 and the timers 3 and 4 are started. If the R3 register is "0" in steps S580 to S583, the process jumps to step S584. If not, the R3 register is decremented and the shutter speed is shortened by repeating the process until it becomes 0.

In step S584, the front curtain running is started. That is, the magnet holding the front curtain 176 by suction is turned off and the front curtain 176 is caused to run. Also, trailing curtain 1
The magnet attracting and holding 77 remains on. Next, in step S588, the timers 1 and 2 are
Is overflowed, it means that the trailing curtain has started, and therefore the process jumps to step S609.

In step S592, the XSW 174 is not looked at during the high speed second, and the process jumps to step S588 to make the second reproduction accurate. In addition, step S59
6 is interface ic at medium speed and low speed.
A signal for turning on the magnet for attracting and holding the rear curtain is output in consideration of the fact that the register inside 138 falls due to noise.

Next, in step S597, if there is a light emission request, light emission is not completed in step S598, and if XSW174 is turned on in step S599, chattering of the switch is removed in step S600. , NOP. After this, again
If the XSW 174 is turned on in step S601, strobe light emission is performed in step S602.

In step S603, the light emission completion flag is set to "1". Further, in step S604, F_UTY
When 9 is “0”, since it is a medium speed second time, step S588.
Jump to.

Then, in step S605, a 1 ms software timer is executed, and in step S606, S
The imprint signal of ig110 is output. Next, in step S607, the state of the power SW 153 is input, and when it is detected that the power SW 153 is off in step S608, the process jumps to step S609. If the power SW 153 (PWSW) is on, the process jumps to step S588.

In steps S609 to S612,
By a process similar to that of steps S580 to S583 described above, correction is performed to extend the shutter open time by delaying the timing of starting the trailing curtain.

In step S613, the magnet holding the rear curtain 177 by suction is turned off to start the rear curtain traveling. Then, in step S614, when the speed is high speed, the process jumps to step S622. Also,
In steps S615 to S621, medium speed,
Since it is possible that the XSW 174 is turned on while the rear curtain is running at the low speed second, the strobe light is emitted as in steps S597 to S603.

At step S622, the timer 3,
The completion of the trailing curtain running is predicted by step 4, and the process jumps to step S614 until the timers 3 and 4 overflow.

In steps S626 to S628, the timers 1 and 2 and the timers 3 and 4 are stopped, and the process returns in step S629.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIGS. 84 to 93 will be described. This flowchart is a flowchart showing the autofocus operation.

First, steps S630 to S63.
In No. 2, when the AE mode is landscape or night view mode, the lens is set to infinity and then the autofocus operation is performed.
If the mode is set to infinity once or the mode other than landscape and night view mode is selected, the process jumps to step S637.

After the lens is driven to the infinite position in step S633, the operated flag is set to "1" in step S634, the once infinite flag is set to "1" in step S635, and further, in step S636, Set the lens infinity flag to "1". Then, the process jumps to step S740.

In step S637, once autofocus is completed, the process immediately returns to lock the autofocus. Then, the process jumps to step S744. In step S638, when the contrast is low, the fill light flag is set to "1" based on the result of the autofocus calculation. Moreover, step S
If the strobe mode is not off at 639, the auxiliary light is emitted. Otherwise, jump to step S659.

In steps S644 to S645, when the auxiliary light emission count reaches a predetermined number, in steps S646 to S651 the strobe capacitor is once charged. Then, during flash charging, release the shutter button halfway to stop charging and return. Then, the process jumps to step S744.

At step S652, the light emission count of the auxiliary light is incremented by 1, and at step S653, the charging voltage is checked. Also, step S654, step S
At 655, if the charging voltage has not reached the light emission enable voltage, charging for auxiliary light is performed. Then, in step S65
6. In step S657, if the F_SEK flag is set to "0" and the AFALG subroutine is called, integration of the autofocus sensor is started.

In step S658, auxiliary light is emitted by strobe light. Then, in step S659,
If the lens scan request flag is "0", step S
Jump to 675. Next, in step S660, a lens scan operation is performed in which the lens is once moved to the closest position and further moved to infinity. In step S661, the lens scan request flag is set to "0" so that the lens scan is not repeated. Further, in step S662, the lens scan completion flag is set to "1".

[0380] In step S663, if the remote control release is selected and the result of the autofocus calculation is out of focus, the process proceeds to step S665. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S663.
Jump to 740.

In step S665, the lens is set to an infinite position, and in steps S666 to S670, EE is set.
The lens is extended to the data position according to the adjustment value of the PROM 135. Then, in step S671, the operated flag is set to "1". Next, in steps S672 to S674, the focus flag is forcibly set to "1" and the autofocus completion flag is set to "1", and the process jumps to step S744.

In step S675, the data from the AFIC 134 is read, the defocus amount is calculated, and it is determined whether the object is in focus or out of focus. When it is dark, the auxiliary light request is made. Further, the number of driving pulses and the driving direction of the lens are calculated. Next, in step S676,
Since the F-SEK flag remains "1" during the integration, the process jumps to step S744.

In step S681, if the auxiliary light flag is 1, the process jumps to step S689, and in step S682, if the auxiliary light request flag is "0" as a result of the autofocus calculation, the process jumps to step S689.

In step S683, the auxiliary light flag is set to "1" to emit the auxiliary light when the next subroutine is called. Next, in step S684,
The lens scan flag is set to "0".

In steps S685 to S687, if the AE mode is the night view mode and the lens has already been scanned, the auxiliary light flag is set to "0". Then, in step S688, if out of focus, step S7
44, otherwise jump to step S713.

In step S689, when the auxiliary light is not required and the subject is out of focus, the process jumps to step S691. If the auxiliary light is not being emitted in step S690, the process jumps to step S713.
If the strobe mode is the off mode in step S690b due to non-focus during the emission of the auxiliary light, the process jumps to step S691. If it is not in the strobe off mode, the process jumps to step S744.

If the AE mode is the night view mode in step S691, the process jumps to step S694, or if the AE mode is the landscape mode in step S692, the process jumps to step S693, and if not, the process jumps to step S707.

In step S693, if autofocus cannot be performed even if the focus is infinite, step S696-
In step S698, focusing is forcibly performed. Also,
If it is not set to infinity, the out-of-focus display is performed in steps S699 to S701, the F_SiNE flag is set to "0", the autofocus operation is continued, and the process jumps to step S702.

In step S702, F_LSC
The AN flag is set to "0" and lens scanning is not performed.
Further, in step S703, the F_SLMPON flag is set to "0" and the auxiliary light emission is not performed.

In step S704, the lens scan end is set to "1" so that the lens scan is not performed. Next, in steps S705 and S706, in the case of focusing, the PCV 175 is operated at a frequency of 2 kHz for 33 ms.
ec oscillate, stop for 33msec, then 33mse
It vibrates for c (see FIG. 164) and sounds. Then, the process jumps to step S744.

Next, in step S707, the auxiliary light flag is set to "0", and in step S708, the lens scan request flag is set to "1". Then, step S7
If the lens scan has been completed in steps 09 to S712, the out-of-focus display flag is set to "1". Also,
The lens scan request flag is set to "0", the auxiliary light flag is set to "0", and the process jumps to step S744.

In step S713, the out-of-focus display flag is turned off. In step S714, when in focus, the PCV 175 is sounded in step S719, and then step S7.
At 20, the F-SiNE flag is set to "1" and the process jumps to step S744. When the object is out of focus, the F_SEK flag is set to "0" in step S715 to prepare to start integration at the next subroutine call.

In step S716, the lens infinity flag is set to "0", and in step S717, the lens is driven based on the number of lens driving pulses and the driving direction calculated as a result of the autofocus calculation. Next, step S72.
In 1, the flag indicates whether or not the lens is actually driven. When the flag is "0", the lens is driven.
Jump to 726.

In steps S722 to S725, since the contact state at the mechanical stopper position is shown, the lens scan and the non-focus display flag for setting the lens scan end flag to "1" to prohibit the auxiliary light are set to "1". 1 "and set the lens scan flag request flag to" 0 "
Then, the auxiliary light flag is set to "0". Next, in steps S731 to S739, when the closest end flag is "1" by the remote control release, the lens is forcibly focused, the lens is extended to the closest position, and the process jumps to step S744.

[0395] In step S726, the operated flag is set to "1", and if the focus is set in step S727, in step S728, the F-SiNE flag is set to "1" to end the autofocus. Further, in step S729, the F_AFNGDSP flag is set to "0".
To Then, in step S730, PCV175
Is sounded about twice, similar to step S706, and the process jumps to step S744.

In steps S740 to 743, a process of resetting the autofocus sensor and starting integration is performed, and the focus flag is set to "0". By calling AFALG as a subroutine, integration reset of the autofocus sensor is started, and the process returns at step S744.

In step S745, the flags related to the autofocus operation are cleared. That is, a lens scan request flag, a lens scan end flag,
Infinite drive end flag, once autofocus complete flag, out-of-focus display flag, lens infinite position flag, PCV
Clear the pronunciation end flag.

In step S746, the auxiliary light flag is set to "0", and in step S748, the focusing flag is set to "0". The auxiliary light count is set to "0" in step S750, and the process returns in step S751.

Next, interrupt permission prohibition and interrupt branch processing will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

First, the flowchart of FIG. 94 will be described. This FIG. 94 shows a prohibition process for all interrupts.

In steps S752 to S754, the register D_iLR1 for setting the interrupt permission level is set.
The lowest interrupt level is set in 3 to 3, and the branching process is prohibited even if an interrupt occurs, and the process returns in step S744.

Next, the flowcharts of FIGS. 95 to 100 will be described. These flowcharts show the process of switching the interrupt function depending on the state of the camera.

First, INTRUN is the state in which the back cover is closed while the LCD of the camera is being displayed, and INTBKSLP is the state in which the back cover is open while the LCD of the camera is being displayed, INTS.
LP is a state in which the power SW 153 is on, the display time has elapsed, and the display is turned off. INTSTP is the power S
Each of the states shows that the permission / prohibition of interruption is set when W153 is off.

Tables 4, 4, and 6 shown in FIGS. 221, 222, and 223, respectively, show specific setting contents in each of the above states. Note that Tables 5 and 6 above are bit maps showing the interrupt factors in Table 4. “Key-on wake-up” in Table 4 above means CPU1 by key input.
20 indicates a transition from the SLEEP or STOP state to the RUN state, and does not branch to a predetermined branch destination by an interrupt. "Wake-up" is interrupted at a predetermined cycle due to overflow of the timebase timer, and CPU is RU same as key-on wake-up.
"Permit" for N state is SLEEP, S
The state changes from TOP to RUN and further branches to an interrupt branch destination designated in advance. "X" disables interrupts.

First, in step S756, all interrupts are prohibited. Next, in steps S757 to S765, the integration completion interrupt level is set, and the interrupt level of the remote control signal is set and enabled in the enable / self mode and the remote controller standby state, and in step S806.
Jump to.

In steps S766 to S772, a key-on wakeup interrupt level is set, an autofocus integration interrupt level is set, and an interrupt level of the remote control signal in the remote control standby mode in the self mode is set.

In steps S773 to S778, the states of the case back SW 155, power SW 153, and strobe pop-up SW 159 are detected, and the edge detection direction of the interrupt is switched to either rising or falling.

In step S779, a key-on wakeup interrupt permission flag is set. Step S780
In step S782, the interrupt permission flag of the remote control signal in the remote control standby mode in the self mode is set. In step S783, the time base timer interrupt is permitted, and the process jumps to step S806.

In steps S784 to S787, the key-on wakeup interrupt level and interrupt enable flag are set, and in steps S788 to S791, the states of the back cover SW155 and the flash pop-up SW159 are detected to determine the edge of the interrupt. Switch the detection direction.

In steps S792 to S794, the interrupt enable flag of the key-on wakeup SW is set, and in step S795, the interrupt enable flag of the time-base timer is set. Also, step S7
In steps 96 to S798, the key-on wakeup interrupt level is set, and in step S799, the interrupt permission flag is set.

In steps S800 to S803, the states of the back cover switch 155 and the power switch 153 are detected to switch the edge detection direction of the interrupt. In step S804, the interruption permission flag of the rewind switch 160 is set, and in step S805, interruption of the time base timer is prohibited.

In steps S806 and S807, the interrupt flag is cleared, in step S809 the serial communication interrupt flag is cleared, in step S810, the AD completion interrupt flag is cleared, and the process returns in step S811. .

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 101 will be described. This flowchart shows the remote control signal processing at the destination where the interrupt branch is performed by the remote control signal.

First, in step S812, multiple interrupts are prohibited. Then, in step S813, it is confirmed whether or not it is an interrupt by a remote control signal. Here, if they are different, the process jumps to step S826.

In step S814, it is determined whether the port to which the remote control signal is input is at "L" level.
If it is not at the "L" level, the process jumps to step S815. Then, in step S815, if the remote control signal has already been received and the remote control release state is set, the process jumps to step S826. Next, in step S816, if it is not in the self mode, the process jumps to step S826.

Step S817 is a subroutine for judging whether or not it is a remote control signal. If it is determined that the signal is a remote control signal, the F_RMCOK flag is set to "1". next,
If the F_RMCOK flag is "0" in step S818, the process jumps to step S826.

[0417] In step S819, the F_RMCOK flag is set to "0", and in step S820, the remote control release signal is set to "1". Further, in step S821, the remote control 2R1st processing flag is set to "1", and in step S822, the counter flag for executing the main routine one or more times is set to "0". In step S823, the photometry end flag is set to "0". Then, in step S824, the integration start signal of the autofocus sensor is output, and in step S825, the operated flag is set to "1". Also, step S825b
Then, PCV is pronounced.

At step S826, interruption of the remote control signal is prohibited. In step S827, the interrupt permission level of the remote control signal is lowered to prohibit interrupt branching. The interrupt flag is cleared in step S829, and the process returns in step S830.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 102 will be described. This flow chart shows the integration time detection processing at the point where the interrupt branch is made by the integration completion signal of the AFCI134.

First, in step S831, interrupts are prohibited. Next, in step S832, it is confirmed that the interrupt is the integration completion signal of the autofocus sensor. If not, the process jumps to step S843.

In steps S833 to S835, the contents of the register are saved in the stack area. In step S836, the timer measuring the integration time is temporarily stopped. In step S837, the timer value is stored in the accumulator. In step S838, the timer is restarted. In step S839, the data saved in the accumulator is stored in the predetermined RAM area.

In steps S840 to S842, the contents of the registers saved in the stack area are restored. The interrupt flag is cleared in step S843, and the process returns in step S844.

Next, FIGS. 167 and 168 will be described. FIG. 167 shows that when the LED current of the SCPi 147 is about 10 mA, and FIG.
When each of the 47 LED currents flows about 1 mA, C
FIG. 6 is a diagram in which the vertical axis represents the result of A / D conversion by PU and the horizontal axis represents the rotational position of the sequence clutch cam.

In the case of driving the sequence clutch to the initial position, that is, to the position of the mirror drive system, the LED current of SCPi147 is made to flow about 10 mA as shown in FIG. Is detected and the motor is braked and stopped.

Threshold level 1 in this case is data to be adjusted. When driving the sequence clutch to the winding position or the rewinding position, as shown in FIG. 168,
The LED current of SCPi147 is made to flow about 1 mA, it is judged by the threshold level 2 at the time of detecting the winding position, the falling is detected, and the winding is performed by the number of falling from the initial position.
Drive to the rewind position. Threshold level 2 in this case
Is data that is adjusted similarly to the initial position.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the adjustment of the threshold level.

First, in step S850, appropriate data are set in advance for threshold 1 and threshold 2. Next, in step S851, mirror position driving is performed. If the trailing edge position cannot be detected by the threshold 1 in step S852, the damage flag is "1". Therefore, in step S583, the threshold 1 is moved up and down again and the operation of step S851 is repeated.

If the mirror position can be correctly driven in step S854, the AD value of the light-shielding portion of the lever is set to AD1.
To store as. Next, in step S855, the winding position drive is performed. Next, in step S856, the LED current of the SCPi 147 is switched to the current value for driving the mirror position.

If the AD value is close to AD1 in step S857, it indicates that the determination threshold value is low. Therefore, in step S858, threshold 2 is reset and the process jumps to step S855.

If the winding position can be detected in step S859, the AD value of the LED current of SCPi147 of 10 mA is stored as AD2. In step S860, the threshold 1 is calculated based on the following calculation formula (1).

Threshold 1 = (AD1 + AD2) / 2 (1) Next, in step S861, the maximum AD value is obtained when the winding position is driven. Further, the AD value at the time of detecting the winding position is stored as AD3. Then, the threshold 2 is calculated based on the following calculation formula (2).

Threshold 2 = (ADMAX + AD3) / 2 (2) Next, in step S862, thresholds 1 and 2 are written in the EEPROM. Then, in step S863,
The adjustment is completed.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 104 to 115 will be described.

First, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 104 to 108 will be described. These flowcharts show the initial drive of the sequence clutch, the drive of the sequence clutch to the mirror drive system position, the drive to the winding drive system position, and the drive to the rewind drive system position.

First, steps S871 to S88.
Reference numeral 7 is an initial setting for causing the flag to identify the sequence clutch switching operation. The settings are shown in Table 7 shown in FIG. 224. That is, F_UTY0 and 1 identify each drive of the initial drive system, the mirror drive system position, the winding drive system position, and the rewind drive system position. Further, the processing branches at the time of adjustment are made to correspond to the above four types of drive by F_UTY2.

[0436] In step S888, the motor drive,
Initialization necessary for detecting the Pi signal is performed. Step S
889, in step S890, when the sequence clutch initial drive is performed, the process branches to step S906. If the current position data is the mirror position (data is “1”) in steps S891 to S893, the process branches to step S901.

In steps S894 to S895, the identification data is saved in the stack area, and in step S896 the sequence clutch initial drive is performed. In steps S897 and S898,
The identification data is returned from the stack area.

If the damage flag is "1" in step S899, the process branches to step S934 and the ending process is performed. In step S900, initialization is performed again. In steps S901 and S902, when the mirror position is driven, the process branches to step S934, and the process proceeds to the end process.

In steps S903 to S905, the number of drive pulses from the mirror position when driving the winding position and the rewinding position is set. The pulse number is set to "1" when the winding position is driven, and the pulse number is set to "2" when the rewinding position is driven. In steps S906 to S907, a timer that measures the period for A / D converting the Pi signal is set to 1 ms.

In step S908, the sequence clutch switching motor 144 (SCM) is normally rotated to rotate the sequence clutch cam in the switching direction. Step S
At 909, the time measurement of the 1 ms timer is started. In step S910, the process continues waiting until the time measurement of 1 ms ends. 1 when the F-T2iF flag becomes "1"
ms time measurement ends.

In step S911, F_T2iF
The flag is cleared, and in step S912, the SCP
The output signal of i147 is A / D converted to detect the falling edge of the signal. In step S913, F_GPSD
If the N flag is "1", it indicates that the signal of SCPi147 has fallen. If there is no fall,
Jump to step S917.

In step S914, F_GPSD
The N flag is set to "0". In step S915,
Decrease the number of drive pulses by "1". In step S916, when the number of drive pulses becomes “0”, the process jumps to step S926 to end the drive. If it is not "0", the process jumps to step S917.

In steps S917 to S920, drive time limiter processing is performed. If the processing is not completed within one second after the motor is driven, the output signal of the SCPi 147 may be abnormal or the mechanism may be abnormal. Therefore, damage processing is performed and release lock is performed. If not, the process branches to step S908.

Steps S921 to S925 are processing for branching to damage.

First, in step S921, the timer is stopped. In step S922, sequence motor 144 that performs sequence clutch switching is turned off.
In step S923, the damage flag indicating the trouble of the sequence clutch mechanism is set to "1".

[0446] In step S924, during the adjustment, the process branches to step S934 to prevent damage and release lock. In step S926, termination processing is performed when a predetermined number of falling edges are counted,
The sequence motor 144 is braked. The braking method includes short brake in which both ends of the sequence motor 144 are electrically short-circuited to perform braking, and reverse braking in which a voltage is applied for a predetermined time in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the motor that has been conventionally rotated to perform braking. Use together.

In step S927, the winding position,
When the rewinding position is driven, the process branches to step S932.
When the mirror position is driven in step S928, the process branches to step S934.

In steps S929 to S931,
It shows a process at the time of initial drive.

First, the flag F_GPSiNi flag indicating that the initial process has been executed once is set to "1". In step S930, in order to set the position data of the sequence clutch in the process described later, F_U
The TY0 flag is set to "1" and used as mirror position data.

At steps S932 and S933, ADMAX is calculated at the time of adjustment. Step S934
In step S936, the sequence clutch position data is "1", the winding position data is "2", and the rewinding position data is "3". Step S937, Step S
At 938, the timer is stopped and step S939
Return with.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 109 and 110 will be described. This flowchart shows initial settings for driving the sequence clutch mechanism.

First, in step S940, the interrupt prohibition level is set, and in step S941, the port is set. In step S942, the interface ic 138 is initialized, and in step S943, the motor drive circuit is turned off because another motor may be turned on.

In steps S944 and S945, data is read from the EEPROM 135. In steps S946 to S955, EEPRO
The data of M135 is expanded in the RAM inside the CPU 120. The threshold judgment level at the time of winding and rewinding position drive in the XR1 register. Initial to the XR0 register,
A threshold drive level for driving the mirror position and a motor drive voltage for switching the clutch are set in the XR2 register.

In steps S956 and S957, the count value is set in the RRO register for 1 second.
In steps S958 to S964, the adjustment RAM area is cleared to "0". Step S965,
In step S966, the motor drive voltage of the XR2 register is set in the interface ic138.

In step S967, the damage flag for the sequence clutch drive is cleared. Step S
At 968, the previous data for the SCPi147 signal falling edge determination is cleared to "0". In steps S963 to S976, the determination threshold value for each drive position is set in the R3 register. PiLED for each drive position
The current value is set in the interface ic138.

[0456] In step S977, SCPi14
7 is emitted. In step S978, the SCP
Wait for the light emission stabilization time of the i147LED. Step S979
In step S98, the A / D conversion port is set.
Return with 0.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 111 to 113 will be described. This flow chart is
The SCPi 147 when the sequence clutch switching drive is performed.
A subroutine for A / D converting the signal and detecting the falling edge of the signal is shown.

First, in step S981, A / D conversion is performed at a preset port. The A / D conversion result is set in the accumulator. Step S982
At, the A / D conversion result is stored in the R5 register.
In step S983, after a delay of 100 μsec,
In step S984 again, A / D conversion is performed.

In steps S985 to S990, the absolute value of the difference between the results of the two A / D conversions is calculated. In steps S991 and S992, it is determined whether the absolute value is less than or equal to a predetermined value. Considering the voltage value, a difference of 0.06 V or less is detected within 100 μsec. If this difference is greater than 0.06V, it means that the SCPi147 signal is being switched,
Ignore this sampling result.

In steps S993 to S997, it is determined whether the A / D value is greater than or less than the threshold level preset in the R3 register, and if the A / D value is greater than the threshold level, the "H" level is set. Judge F_
The GPi flag is set to "1" and the process branches to step S1001. When the A / D value is less than the threshold level, it is determined to be "L" level, the F_GPi flag is set to "0", and the process branches to step S998.

In steps S998 to S1000, if the previous SCPi 147 output is "L", the process proceeds to step S1002, and if "H", the current output is "L".
Therefore, the fall has been detected. The fall flag F_GPiDN is set to "1". The F-GPiOLD flag, which means the previous output level, is set to "0", and the process branches to step S1002.

In step S1001, since the A / D converted value is at "H" level, no fall detection is performed. The F-GPiOLD flag indicating the previous A / D value is set to "1". In step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003 while the adjustment is in progress, and the step S1003 when the adjustment is not in progress.
It branches to 1025 and returns.

[0463] In step S1003, if the initial mirror position is being driven during adjustment, step S102.
Branch to 5 and return.

Steps S1004 to S1024
Is a process performed during the winding and the rewinding position drive during the adjustment. That is, A / D value sort processing is performed,
This is a process of rearranging eight sampled A / D values in descending order.

First, in step S1004, EP
The area start address is set in the register, and step S10
In 03 to step S1007, the data in the area is compared with the A / D value, and when the data is larger than the data in the area, steps S1008 to S1016 and the subsequent data are sequentially shifted.

Steps S1017 to S1018
Then, the A / D value is stored in an empty place as a result of the shift, and the process branches to step S1025. In steps S1020 to S1024, it is determined whether the search has been performed up to the end of the area.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 114 will be described. This flowchart shows the brake processing of the sequence clutch drive motor.

First, in step S1026, the short brake is applied to the sequence motor 144. Next, in steps S1027 and S128,
After 200 μsec, steps S1029 to S1
At 033, reverse brake is applied for 10 msec.

Steps S1034 to S1038
In, the short brake is applied for 50 msec, then, in step S1039, the sequence motor 144 is turned off, and in step S1040, the process returns.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 115 will be described. This flow chart is sorted A /
This is a process of averaging D values.

First, steps S1041 to S1.
At 044, initial setting is performed. Step S1045
In step S1052, the total sum of the data in the area is calculated. In steps S1053 to S1055, the sum is divided by 8 to obtain an average value, the ADMAX value is stored in a predetermined RAM area, and in step S1056,
To return.

Next, FIGS. 169, 170 and 116.
The zoom drive will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

FIG. 169 shows a lens frame cam rotation angle driven by the zoom motor 146, ZMPR output signals and ZMPi output signals output in accordance with the rotation of the lens frame, and further retracted position, wide position, tele position, and the like. It is a figure showing the relationship of.

As for the ZMPR signal, a black and silver sticker attached to the outer periphery of the lens frame is caused to output a reflection signal by the PR (photo reflector) 172, and the output is A / D of the CPU 120.
This signal is read by the port. In the figure, the "L" level signal of the ZMPR signal is a black seal portion where there is no reflection.

[0475] In the above, the "H" level portion is the portion reflected by the silver seal portion. When it is extended from the lens frame, it is slightly before the optical WIDE and goes from "L" level to "H".
"WIDE-1", a point where the level changes, is provided. When it is further extended, it passes the optical WIDE position, and when it is further extended, "TELE-1" is provided at a point just before the optical TELE, at which the "H" level is switched to the "L" level. When it is further extended, there is a TELE position, and when it is further extended, there is a stopper position that contacts the mechanical stopper.

ZMPi is the rising edge of the output signal of Pi,
Count falling edges. WID from collapsed position
220 edges from E-1 to WIDE-1 to WI
4 to DE, 22 from WIDE to TELE-1
6, from TELE-1 to TELE is 12, and from TELE, the stopper position is 3 edges.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 116 to 118 will be described. This flow chart is
Zoom up button 123 (ZUSW), zoom down button 1
This is a zoom drive process performed when a zoom operation is performed by the 24 (ZDSW).

Step S1060 is initial data setting necessary for zoom driving. Interrupt disabled, port set E
The data of the EPROM 135 is expanded in the RAM. The drive voltage setting of the zoom motor, the light emission of the zoom PiLED, the current of the zoom PRLED, and the light emission are controlled.

At step S1061, if the zoom direction flag F_ZMUP is "1", the zoom is driven in the feeding direction and if "0", the zoom is driven in the feeding direction. Step S
In step 1062 to step S1066, the brake start position is calculated for when the zoom buttons 123 and 124 are continuously pressed.

Target position = (TELE position) − (number of stop edges during feeding) (3) The number of stop edges during feeding is the number of edges from the start of applying the short brake during feeding drive to the complete stop. Is.

Steps S1067 to S1071
Then, the brake start position in the zoom-down direction is calculated.

Brake start position = (WIDE position) + (number of stop edges in the take-in direction) (4) In step S1072, the start position obtained by the above formula (3) or formula (4) is set in the WR2 and 3 registers. To store. In step S1075, a timer for detecting the edge width of the Pi signal is started. In step S1074, the zoom button is detected. Step S1075 to Step S107
In step 6, if another key is pressed, the zoom is interrupted, the process branches to step S1093, and the brake is applied.

Steps S1077 to S1080
In, when it is detected that the zoom-up button is released during zoom-up, the process branches to step S1093, and when it is detected that the zoom-down button is released only while ZMPR is at the “H” level during zoom-down, the process branches to step S193. . In the range of TELE to TELE-1, even if the user starts to zoom down, and tries to stop the zoom by releasing his finger from the zoom button, it cannot be stopped unless it is moved from TELE-1.

At step S1081, the zoom edge count during driving according to the zoom drive direction is compared with the brake start position, and if the position is exceeded, Cy = 0.
It branches to step S1083. In step S1083, the ZMPi signal is counted and the output signal of the ZMPR 172 is used to refresh the counter of the ZMPi 173 output signal. By adjusting the output signal of the ZMPR172, the total of the count error that appears when the zoom is repeatedly driven to the wide-telephoto is an adjustment value that is adjusted at the time of factory shipment.
It is solved by rewriting the value of the counter of the output signal of ZMPi173.

If it is determined in step S1084 that the output signal of the ZMPi 173 has not changed even after the lapse of a predetermined time, the damage flag F_DMGZM becomes "1", and the process branches to step S1086.

In step S1085, the zoom motor 146 is driven by the zoom drive voltage in the normal direction and the reverse direction according to the drive direction. In step S1093, the zoom motor 146 is braked. Since the zoom motor 146 does not stop immediately after the brake is applied, the edge count ZMPR1 of the output signal of the ZMPi 173 is also applied during the braking.
The edge counter is reset by the output signal of 72. If the ZMPi signal has not changed for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the zoom motor has stopped, and in step S1094,
The motor is turned off, and the process returns at step S1095.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 119 to 120 will be described. This flowchart shows a subroutine for driving the zoom from an arbitrary position to the optical wide position.

First, in step S1096, the zoom drive is initialized. Step S1097 to Step S
At 1102, it is determined whether the current position or the wide position is on the side. If the carry becomes "0" by subtracting the number of pulses at the current position from the number of pulses at the wide position, it is judged to be on the collapsed side of the wide side and to the tele side of the wide side if the carry is "1". On the retracted side, in steps S1103 to S1105, the driving direction is calculated as the feeding direction, and the brake start position is calculated as (wide-stop pulse number). On the tele side, steps S1106 to S1109
The drive direction and the stop start position (wide +
Calculate with the number of stop pulses).

In step S1110, the calculated brake start position is stored in the WR0, 1 register. In step S1111, a timer that detects the edge width of the output signal of the ZMPi 173 is started. Step S1112
In step S1114, if the ZMPR signal is “L”, if the wide position is detected when the zoom pulse is extended to the wide side only by counting the zoom pulse, and if the count is incorrect, the wide range is not reached, so the PR signal is Wide detection is not performed until it becomes "H". Instead, in consideration of the failure of the zoom PR circuit, the edge counter is provided with a limiter and stopped.

In step S1115, the brake start pulse is set to either the wide position or the limiter value. In step S1116, the current position pulse and the brake start pulse are compared. In step S1117, if the start position is exceeded, braking is started, so the process branches to step S1121. In step S1118, the zoom PR signal and the zoom Pi signal are processed.

[0491] If the zoom damage flag is "1" in step S1119, the process branches to step S1122. In step S1120, the drive direction of the motor is set based on the zoom drive voltage and the drive direction in step S1112.
Branch to. The zoom brake is applied in step S1121, and the process returns in step S1122.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 121 will be described. This flowchart is used for adjustment in the process of driving the zoom to an arbitrary position.

First, in step S1123, the zoom drive is initialized. Step S1124 to Step S1
At 129, the drive target position is set in the WR6 and 7 registers. Check if the drive target position is smaller than tele. If it is larger than the tele, put the tele at the target position.

[0494] Steps S1130 to S1133
Now, compare the current position with the target position. Step S113
In 4 to step S1137, setting in the feeding direction is performed. In steps S1138 to S1140,
Make settings for the take-up direction. In step S1141, the brake start position is set. Step S1142
Now, call the zoom drive subroutine. The process returns in step S1143.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 122 will be described. This flowchart is a subroutine for zoom driving to the brake start position.

First, in step S1144, the zoom pulse time width limiter is set. Step S1145
If the braking start position is exceeded in step S1146, the process branches to step S1150. In step S1147,
The signal processing of ZMPi173 and ZMPR172 is performed.

[0497] If the zoom damage flag is "1" in step S1148, the flow branches to step S1151. In step S1149, the motor drive voltage setting motor is driven, and the process jumps to step S1145.
The zoom motor 146 is braked in step S1150, and the process returns in step S1151.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 123 will be described. This flowchart is a process for driving the zoom from an arbitrary position to the retracted position.

First, in step S1152, the zoom drive is initialized. In steps S1153 to S1158, the brake start target position is calculated.
In steps S1159 to S1160, if the current position is on the retracted side further than the retracted position, step S
In 1161 to step S1162, zoom drive is not performed. In step S1163, the process returns.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 124 to 125 will be described. This flowchart shows the brake processing of the zoom motor 146.

First, in step S1164, ZMPi1
The pulse width limiter clock timer 73 is started. In step S1165, a flag F-ZMBOV (overflow flag) indicating a process for continuously outputting the ZMPi signal due to vibration of the blades (not shown) of the ZMPi 173 is set to "0".

Steps S1166 to S1167
Then, the zoom pulse before braking is retracted to XR0, 1 in advance. In steps S1168 to S1169,
The limiter timer value when the ZMPi 173 output signal continues to be output is set in the R1 register.

In step S1170, the zoom motor 14
Brake on 6. In steps S1171 to S1172, the brake determination limiter value for confirming that the output signal of the ZMPi 173 has not been detected for a predetermined time and stopped, is set in the R0 register.

In step S1173, a timer overflow is detected. In step S1174, the overflow flag of the timer is cleared to "0". In step S1175, the R0 register is decremented. If the value of the R0 register becomes "0" in step S1176, it means that the output signal of ZMPi173 has not been output for a predetermined time, and the process branches to step S1192.

Steps S1178 and S1179
Then, the R1 register is decremented. When the R1 register becomes “0”, it means that the output signal of the ZMPi 173 continues to be output for a predetermined time or longer, and therefore the process branches to step S1181 to forcibly stop the process.

[0506] In step S1179, the ZMPR 172,
The change of each output signal of ZMPi173 is examined.
In step S1180, as a result of the processing in step S1179, “0” is set to ZMPi1 by the F-ZMPi flag.
“1” for which no change in 73 was detected is the ZMPi1
This means that a change in the output signal of 73 can be detected. Here, in the case of “0”, the process branches to step S1173.
If it is “1”, the process branches to step S1170, and R
Reset the 0 register.

Step S1181 to step S1189
If the output signal of the ZMPi173 keeps changing even after a lapse of a predetermined time, the zoom pulse counter is making an incorrect count, so the current number of pulses before braking and the number of stop pulses It is necessary to assume the position. The zoom pulse saved before braking and the number of brake stop pulses are added or subtracted according to the driving direction.

In step S1190, the result of the calculation is stored in the RAM counting the zoom pulse. In step S1191, the flag F-ZMBOV, which means that overflow has occurred during braking, is set to "1".
In step S1192, the zoom motor 146 is turned off. In step S1193, the process returns.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 126 to 127 will be described. This flowchart shows the processing for initializing the zoom drive.

First, in step S1194, interruption is prohibited. In step S1195, port setting is performed. In step S1196, the interface ic138
Set the operation mode of. In step S1197, all the motors 144, 145, 146 are turned off.

[0511] Steps S1198 to S1206
At the adjustment value retracted position of the EEPROM 135, Wi
DE-1, WiDE, TELE-1, TELE, TEL
The zoom pulse at the E end is expanded in the RAM.

[0512] Steps S1207 to S1228
At, the adjustment value of the EEPROM 135 and the determination threshold value of the motor drive voltage value zoom Pi are expanded in the RAM.

[0513] Steps S1229 to S1242
In the adjustment value of EEPROM135, ZMPR17
The judgment value of 2 and the LED current value of ZMPR 172 are expanded in the RAM. In step S1243, the LED current value of the ZMPR 172 is set in the interface ic138.

[0514] In step S1244, ZMPR1
Turn on the 72 LED. In steps S1245 and S1246, the LED of the ZMPi 173 is turned on. In steps S1246b-d, the determination threshold level of the PTR output signal of ZMPi173 is set in the interface IC 138.

In step S1247, the number of folding pulses when the zoom driving direction is reversed is set in the RAM, and in steps S1248 to S1251, the zoom stop pulse number (extending direction, extending direction). In step S1252, the limiter value for determining the end of braking is set in the ZR5 register.

[0516] In step S1253, a limiter value for determining that the ZMPi signal is not output due to the zoom being set is set in the ZR6 register. Step S12
At 54, a limiter value forcibly ending when the zoom Pi continues to output during braking is set to ZR7.
In step S1255, ZMPR172, ZMP
The software timer has the time from when the LED of i173 is emitted until the output is stabilized. Step S12
At 56, the overflow flag during braking is cleared.

[0517] In step S1257, ZMPR1
The detection flags 72 are initialized. Step S1258
At, the detection flags of ZMPi173 are initialized. In step S1259, the zoom damage flag is cleared to "0". In step S1260,
To return.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 128 to 130 will be described. This flowchart is Z
Processing of the output signal of MPi173 and the output signal of ZMPR172 is shown.

As shown in Table 8 in FIG. 225, the output signal of ZMPR 172 rises and falls, and
Depending on the zoom driving direction at that time, the processing for changing the content of the counter counting the zoom pulse to a predetermined value is switched. When the rising of the signal of the ZMPR 172 is detected and the zoom is the continuous drive, (WIDE-1) data is set to the count value of the zoom pulse. It is not set when the zoom is drive-in.

When the trailing edge of the ZMPR 172 signal is detected and the zoom is in the extended drive, (TELE-1)
Set the data of. When the zoom is driven forward (W
Set the data of IDE-1).

The output signal of ZMPi 173 counts the rising and falling edges of the output signal of ZMPi 173 as shown in Table 9 of FIG. 226. It counts up by "1" at the time of feeding, and counts down by "1" at the time of feeding.

[0522] In step S1261, ZMPR1
The change of the 72 signal is detected. When the ZMPR172 signal has changed, the F_ZMPR flag is set to "1". If the F_ZMPR flag is "0" in step S1262, the process branches to step S1274. In steps S1263 to S1264, the zoom pulse at the time of switching is stored in the WR4 register.

[0523] Steps S1266 to S1273
In, when the F_PROLD flag is "1", it means rising. If the lens is zoomed in at the start and zoomed down, go to step S1274. If zoomed up, go to step S1269.
Then, WIDE-1 is set to the zoom pulse. When zooming down, (WIDE-1) is set.

[0524] In step S1274, ZMPi1
The change in the output signal of 73 is detected. When a signal change is detected, the F-ZMPi flag is set to "1". If the output signal of the ZMPi 173 does not change in step S1275, the process branches to step S1284. In steps S1276 to 1280, the zoom pulse is incremented when zooming up, but not incremented when the result of the increment is an overflow.

[0525] Step S1281 to Step S1283
In, the zoom pulse is decremented at the time of zooming down, but if it is "0" before decrementing, it is not decremented. Jump to step S1295. In step S1284, if the ZMPi173 pulse width timer does not overflow, the process branches to step S1296.

In step S1285, the overflow flag is cleared. In step S1286, the R0 register that counts the pulse width of Pi is decremented. When R0 becomes "0" in step S1287, it is determined whether the mechanical signal has been applied to the mechanical stopper or the ZMPi173 circuit has more than it, because the Pi signal has not changed for a predetermined time, and the damage process is performed. In the damage process, the motor is turned off in step S1288.

[0527] In step S1289, the damage flag is set to "1". Step S1290 to Step S
In 1294, the zoom pulse is set to “0” because the sinking end contact may be considered as damage during zooming down. When zooming up, it is possible to use a stopper contact, so use the zoom pulse as stopper position data.
Jump to step S1296. Step S129
In 5, when the output signal of the ZMPi 173 changes, the clock timer is reset. Step S12
Return at 96.

Next, FIG. 170 will be described. In FIG. 170, the output signal of the ZMPR 172 is A / D converted and "H" threshold and "L" threshold stored in the R6 and R7 registers are given a hysteresis to make "H" and "L" judgments. It indicates that

[0529] For example, the previous determination result is "H" (F_PR
When the OLD flag is "1") and the current AD result is smaller than R7 and is "L" (F_PROLD is set to "0"), it is determined to be a fall. The change flag (F_ZMPR) is set to "1".

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 131 will be described. This flowchart is based on the above ZMPR17
2 shows a determination process of 2.

First, in step S1297, F-
The ZMPR flag is cleared to "0". Step S129
At 8, the signal of ZMPR 172 is A / D converted.
The A / D result enters the accumulator. Step S129
At 9, the accumulator is compared with the R7 register containing the "L" level value. If it is smaller than the R7 register, the process branches to step S1305. When the R7 register is exceeded, the accumulator is compared with the R6 register containing the "H" level value. If it is less than the R6 register, it is an intermediate level, so nothing is done, and the process jumps to step S1310.

[0532] In step S1301, if the previous determination result is "H", it is determined that there is no change, and the process branches to step S1310. If the last time is "L", there is a possibility of noise, so in step S1302, A / D conversion is performed again, and in step S1303, it is confirmed whether it is R6 or more by comparing with the R6 register. If less than R6, try again. Jump to step S1298. R6
Since the rising has been detected in the above cases, the previous determination result F-PROLD is determined in step S1304.
To "1". It branches to step S139.

If it is determined in step S1305 that the previous determination is "L", the process branches to step S1310. In step S1306, A / D is performed again for confirmation. If it is smaller than R7 in step S1307, it means that the falling edge has been detected. If it is larger than R7, the process branches to step S1298. In Step S1308,
The previous determination (F-PROLD) is set to "0". Since the signal of the ZMPR 172 has changed in step S1309, the F-ZMPR flag 9 is set to "1", and the process returns in step S1310.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 132 will be described. This flowchart is based on the above ZMPi1.
This shows the processing for detecting the rise and fall of the signal 73.

In step S1311, the change flag is cleared to "0". If the output signal of the ZMPi 173 is "L" in step S1312, step S13.
Branch to 1317. Here, if “H”, step S
1313, the previous 173ZHPi signal (FP
If iOLD) is "H", go to step S1322 and "L"
If so, in step S1314, after waiting for 50 μsec to prevent noise (software timer), if the output signal of ZMPi 173 is “L” in step S1315, the process branches to step S1312 to try again. If the output signal of ZMPi 173 is “H”, then 173
This means that the rising edge of the Pi signal has been detected.

[0536] In step S1316, the previous Pi
The signal (F_PiOLD) is set to "1". Step S1
Jump to 321.

[0537] In step S1317, the previous Pi
If the signal is "L", the process branches to step S1322 and "H".
If so, after 50 μsec in step S1318, if the Pi signal is “H” in step S1319, the process branches to step S1312 to redo. Step S1
If the ZMPi signal is "L" at 319, the fall of the ZMPi signal has been detected.

[0538] In step S1320, the last ZM
The Pi signal is set to "0". In step S1321, F-ZM is used to indicate that the ZMPi signal has changed.
The Pi flag is set to "1". The process returns in step S1322.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 133 to 137 will be described. This flow chart shows the processing relating to the mechanical that is returned to the normal state when the mechanism is not in a normal state when the battery is inserted into the camera, for example, when the battery is removed during the photographing operation.

First, in step S1323, the zoom drive is initialized. In step S1324, the zoom initial position drive is performed. When the zoom position is unknown, the ZMPi173 pulse count value is reset by switching the ZMPR172 signal once by widening. After performing mirror up / down and shutter charge initials, set the zoom to the retracted position.

If the power is off in step S1325, the process branches to step S1338. If the power is on, the zoom will be wide and the lens will be infinite. In step S1326, the initial position of the sequence clutch is driven. Step S1327,
In step S1328, the lens retracting flag is set to "1" and the zoom retracting flag is set to "0" to indicate that the zoom is not in the retracted position.

In step S1329, EEPRO
Write to M135. In step S1330, the zoom is driven to the wide position. In step S1331, the zoom encoder value is calculated from the zoom pulse. In step S1332, the maximum aperture value is calculated from the zoom encoder value. In step S1333, the optical infinity position is calculated from the mechanical stopper position of the lens from the zoom encoder value.

In step S1334, the lens retracting flag is set to "0" to indicate that the lens is not in the retractable position. In step S1335, the EEPROM
Write to 135. Step S1336, Step S1
In 337, the lens of the first group is moved to the position where the first and second groups of the lenses do not interfere with each other when retracted (the position where the predetermined pulse is moved from the optical infinite position), so that the lens is driven to the optical infinite position.

In step S1338, the mirror and diaphragm drive are initialized. Turn on the diaphragm Pi 152. In step S1339, the aperture Pi 152
If the output of is "H", the diaphragm is in the initial position,
The process branches to step S1346 where initials are not performed.

[0545] Steps S1340 and S1341
At, the maximum value is put in the diaphragm drive pulse. In steps S1342 and S1343, F_UTY
3 is set to "0" and F_UTY4 is set to "1", and the mirror driving subroutine is set to perform only diaphragm driving. In step S1344, the F_DPRN flag is set to "0" to prevent the imprint signal (S110) from being output to the 137 date module by mistake during mirror driving.

In step S1345, the mirror down process is called to open the aperture. In step S1346, after the software timer of 100 msec, in step S1347, the aperture stepping motor 15
The chip enable of the first driver circuit 150 is turned off, and the excitation of the stepping motor 151 is cut off.

Steps S1348 to S1367
Is a mechanical mechanical related to film drive.

In step S1348, according to Table 2 shown in FIG. 219, if F-CNDT1 is "0", autoload has failed or has been completed, so the flow branches to step S1357. If F_CNDT0 is "1" in step S1349, rewinding is completed, and nothing is done, so the process branches to step S1366. Step S135
At 0, if the initial position drive of the sequence clutch is completed, the process branches to step S1352. If not completed, the initial position of the sequence clutch is driven in step S1351.

[0549] In step S1352, the sequence clutch is switched to the rewind position. Step S1353
In, rewind. If the power is on in step S1354, the lens frame and the rear lens are not in positions where they interfere with the mirror. Therefore, in step S1355, the sequence clutch is driven to the mirror position, and step S1
At 356, shutter charging is performed. If the power is not on, the process branches to step S1366.

[0550] In step S1357, F_CND
When T0 is "0", autoloading has failed, so nothing is done and the process branches to step S1366. When F_CNDT0 is "1", in step S1358, it is checked whether winding is in progress. When the F-OWiND flag is "1", it means that the film is being wound up. Therefore, it is necessary to wind up one frame in order to prevent overlapping of photographed frames in the next shooting.

If it is determined in step S1359 that the initial position drive of the sequence clutch has been completed, the process branches to step S1361, and if not completed, the sequence clutch initial position drive is performed in step S1360. In step S1361, the sequence clutch is driven to the winding position. Step S1
At 362, one frame is wound. Step S136
In step 3, if the power is on, the lens frame and the rear lens do not interfere with the mirror, so in step S1364, the sequence clutch is switched to the mirror position, and step S
At 1365, shutter charging is performed.

[0552] In step S1366, the winding midway flag F_OWiND is set to "0", and step S136.
7, the result of other processing F_CNDT0, F_C
Since there is a possibility that NDT1 has changed, EEPROM135
Write in. In step S1368, the process returns.

Next, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 135 to 136 will be described. This flowchart shows the mechanical mechanical of the zoom when the battery is removed during the zoom operation.

If the zoom lens is in the retracted position on the way, in this state, in order to avoid interference between the rear lens of the lens and the mirror when the mirror is moved up and down, only when the zoom is in the wide position, the mirror Make initials.

First, in step S1369, if the zoom collapsing flag F-ZMSNK is "1", the zoom is in the correct collapsing position, so the zoom is not initialized and the process branches to step S1391. In step S1371, if the ZMPR 172 signal is "H", it is found that it is in the range of (WiDE-1) to (TELE-1), so the zoom position searching process is not performed. It branches to step S1394. If the ZMPR172 signal is "0", (collapsed position) to (WIDE-1)
And (TELE-1) to (stopper position).

[0556] Step S1372 to Step S1383
In (Collapse position) ~ (WiDE-1) or (TEL
In order to determine which of E-1) to (TELE end), the pulse number of (stopper position)-(TELE-1) is once moved in the collapsing direction and the change in the ZMPR172 signal is checked to determine which. However, when it is in the vicinity of the retracted position, it is moved to a position deeper than the retracted position, and there is a risk of hitting the lowered mirror. Therefore, processing for lowering the drive voltage of the motor and slowly moving it is performed.

Step S1372 to step S1384
At, the (stopper position) data is put in the zoom pulse. In steps S1375 to S1376, the brake start target position is set to (TELE-1).
In steps S1377 to S1380, the motor drive voltage is set to a voltage applied to the collapse. In step S1381, the zoom is driven to the target position. Steps S1382 to S1383 The changed voltage data is restored to the original data.

[0558] In step S1384, ZMPR1
If the 72 signal is "H", the zoom pulse is (TE
It is set to the data of LE-1), and the position is known. It branches to step S1394. If the zoom PR is "L", the zoom position is the retracted position (WiDE-
Since it is in the position range of 1), the zoom is extended and the rising signal of the zoom PR is detected. Step S138
5. In step S1386, the zoom pulse is set to "0".

[0559] In step S1387, the zoom is set to W.
Drive towards IDE. In step S1388, the zoom pulse is converted into a zoom encoder value. In step S1389, the maximum aperture value is calculated from the zoom encoder value. In step S1390, the number of lens drive pulses from the infinite mechanical stopper position of the lens to the optical infinite position is obtained from the zoom pulse. Jump to step S1394.

If the lens retracted position flag F-LNSSNK is "1" in step S1391, it means that the battery is removed in the power-off state of the camera, and the process branches to step S1404.

[0561] In step S1392, it is not possible in the sequence to set the zoom retracting flag F-ZMSNK to "1" and the lens retracting flag F-LNSSNK to "0".
(See Table 11 shown in FIG. 28) The zoom damage flag is set to "1", and in step S1393, damage processing is performed and release lock is performed.

[0562] In step S1394, the mechanical processing of the mirror and shutter is performed. Step S139
In 5a to 5c, the first group lens is once attached to the infinite mechanical stopper, and the first group lens is extended to a position where the first group lens and the second group lens do not interfere with each other when retracted. Step S1
396a, b The lens retractable flag is set to "1", the zoom retract position flag is set to "0", and step S139 is performed.
At 7, the data is written in the EEPROM 135.

[0563] Steps S1398 to S1400
In, data of (TELE end) is put in the zoom pulse, and in step S1401, the zoom is driven toward the retracted position. In step S1402, the zoom retracted position flag is set to "1" and step S1403E.
Write data to EPROM. Step S1404
And return.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 137 will be described. This flow chart is a mechanical of a mirror and a shutter.

First, in step S1405, if the mirror-up switch 157 is "0", it means that the mirror is up, so the process branches to step S1407. If the shutter charge switch 156 (SCSW) is "0" in step S1406, it means that the shutter charge state is normal, and thus step S14
Jump to 17. Shutter charge switch 15
When 6 is "1", the mirror is down, but since the shutter charge is still in a state, the process branches to step S1414 to perform the shutter charge.

In step S1407, if the shutter charge switch 156 is "1", the mirror-up state is still maintained, so the flow branches to step S1409 to perform mirror-down. Shutter charge switch 156
Is "0", the mirror up switch 157 (MUS
W) and the shutter charge switch 156 are not possible combinations due to the configuration, so the mirror damage flag FD
Set MGMiR to "1" to go to damage processing and lock the operation of the camera.

If it is determined in step S1409 that the initial position of the sequence clutch has not been driven,
In step S1410, the initial position of the sequence clutch is driven.

[0568] Steps S1411 to S1413
In step S1413, the F-UTY3 and F-UTY4 flags are set to "1" and "0", respectively, so that only the mirror-down operation is performed. In step S1414, if the initial position drive operation of the sequence clutch is not performed,
In step S1415, the initial position of the sequence clutch is driven. In step S1416, shutter charging is performed. Step S1417
And return.

As described above, if the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is used, in the single-lens reflex camera, the mechanical drive in the body, which normally uses two motors and a complicated clutch mechanism, is performed. This is possible with a small clutch that uses only the motor and the single sensor. This can greatly contribute to downsizing and cost reduction of the entire camera.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment of the present invention will be described.

171 to 173 are timing charts for explaining the operation of the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment, and FIGS. 138 to 156 are flow charts showing the same operation. Further, Table 1 shown in FIG.
2 is a table showing the drive processing of the second embodiment.

[0572] In the first embodiment, LE of SCPi147 is used.
The position detection is performed by changing the D current to change the initial position drive, the mirror drive system, the winding drive system, and the rewind drive system and the output signal of the SCPi 147, but in the second embodiment, the LED of the SCPi 147 is used. This is a method in which the position is detected only by changing the output signal while keeping the current constant.

First, the timing chart shown in FIG. 171 will be described.

FIG. 171 shows a sequence of the signal output after adjusting the LED current of the SCPi 147 so that the output signal of the SCPi 147 becomes ideal, the initial drive of the sequence clutch, the position drive of the winding drive system, and the initial position drive. 6 is a time chart when the drive of the sequence clutch is switched.

In the figure, GPSiNi is the power SW (PWR
This is a process that is always performed once when the switch (SW) is turned on, and after the sequence motor 144 is started to rotate in the drive system switching direction,
After about 100 msec to stabilize the motor rotation, SCP
The output signal of i147 is A / D converted in a cycle of about 300 to 500 μsec to obtain a low signal level (“L” level),
Three types of thresholds, an intermediate level (“M” level) and a high level (“H” level), are detected and stored in the memory.

Thereafter, the change in the output signal of the SCPi 147 to the "L" level is detected, the sequence motor 144 is braked, and the initial position drive is ended.

In GPSWD, the driving is started from the initial position, and the first fall from the "H" level to the "M" level is detected, and the position detection of the hoisting drive system is completed.

The driving to the rewinding drive system is called GPSRW, and the driving is started from the initial position of the sequence clutch similarly to the position drive of the winding drive system, and the second fall from the "H" level to the "M" level. When the sequence motor 144 is detected, the sequence motor 144 is braked, and the rewinding drive system position drive ends.

GPSMiR is the initial position drive of the sequence clutch, GPSWD, or the initial position drive after executing GPSRW, the number of falling pulses to the initial position is known in advance (for example, after GPSWD, the falling position to the initial position falls). The pulse number becomes "2" and becomes "1" after GPSRW), and the driving is performed by the falling pulse number. Of course, the sequence motor 144 may be braked and stopped only by the fall from the “M” level to the “L” level.

Next, the timing chart shown in FIG. 172 will be described.

This timing chart shows that the initial drive GPSiN of the sequence clutch is at "L" level,
It is a figure explaining the process at the time of detecting the threshold level of "M" level and "H" level, and storing it in memory.

The EEPROM 135 is provided with judgment levels 0 and 1 for allocating A / D converted values to "L", "M" and "H" in advance.

When the sequence motor 144 is driven, and about 100 msec after the start of driving, the output signal of the SCPi 147 is A / D converted after the motor becomes stable, and if it is lower than the determination level 0, it is judged as "L" level. If it is higher than level 0 and lower than judgment level 1, it is classified as "M" level, and if higher than judgment level 1, it is classified as "H" level. The distributed A / D values are sequentially stored in the memory, and when the respective A / D values are sampled 8 times, the respective average values AVE0, AVE1, AVE2 are obtained.

Next, based on the following equation, the threshold level 0
Ask for ~ 3.

Threshold level 0 = AVE0 + His width 0 (5) Threshold level 1 = AVE1-His width 1 (6) Threshold level 2 = AVE2 + His width 2 (7) Threshold level 3 = AVE3-His width 3 (8) His Width 0 to 3 is about 0.17V, and AD value is 1 in hexadecimal.
It is 0H.

The threshold levels 0 to 3 are stored in the memory. After that, the GPSWD, GPSRW, and GPSMiR are driven by SCPi using these threshold levels 0 to 3.
The output signal of 147 is determined.

As a judgment method, the change from the "L" level to the "M" level is judged at the threshold level 1. The change from the “M” level to the “H” level is judged by the threshold level 3. The change from the “H” level to the “M” level is judged at the threshold level 0. The threshold level 0 is used for the determination from the "M" level to the "L" level. In order to select each judgment level, remember which level it was in before. "0" when at "L" level,
When it is at the "M" level, "1" is stored, and when it is at the "H" level, "2" is stored.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 138 to 142 will be described. This flow chart is
It shows the initial position drive of the sequence clutch.

First, in step S1418, the flags F_UTY0 to 7 used in the program are cleared to "0". In step S1419, initialization necessary for driving the sequence clutch is performed (see the flowchart shown in FIG. 156).

Next, steps S1420 to S1.
At 424, the work area required for driving the initial position is cleared to "0". In Step S1425, A /
Set the channel for D conversion. Step S1426
At, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the clutch switching direction.

[0591] Steps S1427 to S1430
At, the process waits for 100 msec during which the rotation of the sequence motor 144 stabilizes. In step S1431, the start address of the area for sequentially storing A / D values is set to 1
× Store in register. In steps S1432 to S1436, a timer for detecting an abnormality is set and started. This timer value is about 1 second.

[0592] Next, in step S1437, it is checked whether the abnormal processing detection timer has overflowed. If it overflows, it is abnormal and the process branches to step S1500. In step S1438, the output signal of SCPi 147 is A / D converted.
In step S1439, the result of the A / D conversion is never "0", so when it is "0", the process returns to step S1437 to redo.

[0593] In step S1440, the A / D conversion result is compared with the determination level 0. If the determination level is higher than 0, the level is "M" or "H", and thus step S1447.
Processing will be performed later.

If in step S1441 eight "L" level A / D values are sampled, step S1
It branches to 462. In Step S1442, A /
The address of the area to which the D value is added is set in the EP register. In step S1443, the A / D values are stored in order. Processing for adding A / D values is performed (see FIG. 143).
Refer to the flowchart shown in.).

In step S1444, the R0 register for counting the "L" level A / D value is incremented. Step S1445 If the R0 register is less than 8, the process branches to step S1462. If the R0 register becomes 8 or more, the sampling of the "L" level is completed in step S1446, so the F-UTY0 flag is set to "1".

[0596] Steps S1447 to S1448
In, if the AD value is the determination level 0 or more and less than the determination level 1, to step S1449, otherwise,
It branches to step S1455. If the “M” level sampling is completed in step S1449, the address of the area to which the AD value of step S1450 is added is set in step S1462.

[0597] In step S1451, the AD value is stored and added. In step S1452,
The R1 register that counts the "M" level A / D value is incremented. In step S1453,
When the A / D value is counted 8 or more, step S1454
, The "M" level sample end flag F-UT
Set Y1 to "1". In Step S1455, A
If the / D value is less than the determination level 1, step S146
Branch to 2.

[0598] If the sampling at the "H" level is completed in step S1456, the process branches to step S1462. In step S1457, an address to which the A / D value is added is set. In step S1458, the A / D values are stored and added. In step S1459, the R2 register that counts the “H” level is incremented. Step S1460: The count value is 8
When the above is reached, in step S1461 "H"
The level end sample flag F_UTY2 is set to "1". In step S1462 to step S1464, if all the sample end flags of "L", M ", and" H "are" 1 ", step S1465.
If at least one is "0", the sample has not been completed, and the process branches to step S1437.

Steps S1465-S1467
In, the average of the "L" level A / D values is calculated.
The result of adding the "L" level A / D values is divided by 8 to obtain the average. In step S1468, the average value is ZR
Store in 0 register. In step S1470,
The threshold level is calculated by adding the hysteresis width to the average value.
In step S1471, the obtained threshold level 0 is stored in the RAM area D-GPSTH0.

Steps S1472 to step S1475
In, the average value of the “M” level is calculated. The obtained result is stored in the ZR1 register. In steps S1476 to S1478, the hysteresis width is subtracted from the average value of the "M" levels to obtain threshold level 1, and D_GPS
Store in TH1. Step S1479 to Step S1
In 482, the threshold value 2 is obtained by adding the hysteresis width to the average value of the “M” levels to determine the RAM area D.D. GPST
Store in H2.

[0601] Steps S1483 to S1489
At, the average value of "H" level is calculated and the result is stored in the ZR2 register. The hysteresis level is added to the obtained average value to obtain a threshold level 3, and the threshold level 3 is stored in the RAM area D-GPSTH3. In step S1490, SCPi14
The output signal of 7 is read once. Previous data is created to avoid erroneous determination (see the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 151 to 154).

In step S1491, an overflow of the timer for detecting an abnormality is detected, and if it is an overflow, the process branches to step S1500. Step S149
2, the A / D conversion cycle is about 250 μs
The software timer of ec is executed (see FIG. 165).

[0603] In step S1493, SCPi1
The change in the output signal of 47 is detected, and if the change is the fall,
The fall flag F-GPi is set to "1". Further, set level data. Step S1494, Step S
At 1495, the falling flag F-GPi is "1".
Then, if the level at that time is “0”, it means the reset position, so to apply the brake, the process branches to step S1496. Otherwise, the reset position is not detected.
The process branches to step S1491 to form a processing loop.

In step S1496, the brake is applied. The brake is short brake for 200μsec, then reverse reverse brake for 10msec, then 5
0msec Short brake is applied to finish.

[0605] Steps S1497 and S1498
In, the position data of the sequence clutch is set in the RAM area D-GPS. In step S1499, the flag F-GPSiNi indicating that the initial drive of the sequence clutch is finished is set to "1". It branches to step S1502.

[0606] In step S1500, abnormality processing is performed. Turn off the sequence motor. Step S1
At 501, the sequence clutch abnormality flag F-
Set DMGGPS to "1" and branch to the damage processing,
Lock camera operation. The process returns in step S1502.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 143 will be described. This flowchart is a subroutine for sequentially storing A / D values in the work area and further adding A / D values.

First, in step S1503, ix
The A / D value is stored in the area indirectly addressed by the register. In step S1504, the ix register is incremented by "1". In steps S1505 to S1510, the data in the area indirectly addressed by the EP register is read, the A / D value is added, and the data is stored in the area indirectly addressed by the EP register. In step S1511, the process returns.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 144 to 147 will be described. This flow chart is
Sequence clutch, mirror drive system drive position (also reset position) GPSMiR, hoist system drive position GPS
7 is a flowchart of a subroutine for driving to WD and rewind system drive position GPSRW.

First, steps S1512 to S1.
At 514, data is stored in the R0 register in order to distinguish the driving target position by the R0 register. The mirror drive system position drive is "1", the winding drive system position drive is "2", and the rewind system drive position drive is "3".

Next, in step S1515, initialization necessary for driving the sequence clutch is performed (FIG. 1).
56).

[0612] In step S1516, SCPi1
The output of 47 is A / D converted and the current position is confirmed. If the R0 register is "1" in step S1517, the reset position confirmation process is not performed, and the process branches to step S1521. In step S1518,
As a result of the A / D conversion, it is judged whether it is at "L" level, and "L"
If it is in the level, the process branches to step S1521, and if it is not, the reset position drive is performed in step S1519 (see the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 148 to 149). When abnormal, the F-UTY0 flag is set to "1".

In step S1520, F-UTY
If the 0 flag is "1", it is abnormal, so step S1.
It branches to 547. Step S1521 to Step S1
At 523, the target position data (R0 register) and the current position data (D-GPS) are compared. If the target position data and the current position data are the same, the process does not move and the process branches to step S1549. If the target position data is larger than the current position data, in order to subtract the current position data from the target position data in a later process, step S1524
In step S1527, “3” is added to the target position data in advance. If the target position data is smaller than the current position data, the process branches to step S1528.

[0614] Steps S1528 to S1529
In, the current position data (D-GPS) is subtracted from the target position data (R0 register) to obtain the driving pulse number. The calculated driving pulse number is stored in the R1 register. In step S1530, the output signal of SCPi 147 is read once in advance. In step S1531, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the clutch switching direction.

[0615] Steps S1532 to S1536
At, a timer for about 1 second for detecting an abnormality is set and the timer is started. Step S1537
When the overflow of the abnormality detection timer is detected, the process branches to step S1547 because it is abnormal. In step S1538, a software timer of about 250 μsec is executed.

In step S1539, SCPi1
A change in the output signal of 47 is detected. Step S1540
Flag F_GP with change in SCPi 147
If i is “0”, branch to step S1537, F_GPi
Is "1", the rising flag F-GPSUP flag is checked in step S1541, and if "1" is rising, branch to step S1537. If "0" is falling, the driving pulse number (R1 register) is determined in step S1542. Reduce the content by "1".

[0617] In step S1543, step S15 is performed until the number of drive pulses (R1 register) becomes "0".
The process branches to 37 to form a processing loop. Step S1
At 544, the target position is reached, so the sequence motor 144 is braked.

[0618] Step S1545 to Step S1546
In, the target position data (R0 register) is stored in the current position data (D-GPS). Step S1549
Branch to. In step S1547, the sequence motor 144 is turned off in the abnormal process. Step S1
At 548, the flag F-DMGGPS indicating the abnormality of the sequence clutch is set to "1" and the processing branches to the abnormality processing to lock the camera operation. The process returns in step S1549.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 148 to 149 will be described. This flow chart is
6 is a flowchart of a process of driving the sequence clutch to the initial position when the sequence clutch is not initially at the initial position when driven to the winding / rewinding drive system position.

First, in step S1550, the flag F-UTY0 indicating an error is cleared to "0".
In step S1551, the output signal of SCPi is read and the previous data is initialized. In step S1552, sequence motor 144 is driven in the clutch switching direction. Steps S1553 to S1557
Set a timer for about 1 second to detect an abnormality and start it.

[0621] In step S1558, if an abnormality detection timer overflow is detected, it is abnormal, so the flow branches to step S1564 to set the flag F-UTY0 indicating the error in step S1564 to "1", and then step S1564.
Branch to 1564. In Step S1559, A
A software timer of about 250 μsec is executed in order to create the cycle of D / D conversion.

In step S1560, SCPi1
A change in the output signal of 47 is detected. Step S1561
In Step S1563, a change in the output signal of the SCPi 147 is detected, and it is still falling, and
If it is at "L" level, it is determined that the reset position is reached, and in step S1564, the sequence motor is braked. Otherwise, the process branches to step S1558 to form a processing loop.

[0623] Steps S1565 and S1566
Now, because it is the mirror drive system position, the current position data (D-
"1" which is mirror position data is set in GPS).
In step S1567 the process returns.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 150 will be described. This flowchart is a flowchart of a subroutine for A / D converting the output signal of SCPi.

First, in step S1568, the signal of the preset A / D conversion channel is A / D converted. Next, in step S1569, the first A / D result is saved in the R3 register. Step S15
At 70, a software timer of about 100 μsec is executed to remove noise. Step S1571
In, the second A / D conversion is performed. Step S1
At 572, the second A / D result is saved in the R4 register.

[0626] Steps S1573 to S1577
In, the absolute value of the difference between the first and second A / D conversion results is obtained. Steps S1578 to S1581
In, if the absolute value of the difference between the A / D conversion results is within a predetermined value, the first A / D value is set in the accumulator. If it is larger than the predetermined value, "0" is set in the accumulator. In step S1582, the process returns.

Next, the flow charts shown in FIGS. 151 to 154 will be described. This flow chart is
7 is a flowchart showing a process of detecting a signal change from the result of A / D conversion of the output signal of SCPi147.

[0628] First, steps S1583 and S1.
At 584, the flag F_GPi indicating that the SCPi 147 signal has changed is cleared to "0", and the rising flag F_GPSUP indicating the rising change is set to "0".
clear. Next, step S1585 and step S1
At 586, D_GPSOLD indicating the previous level
Data in the R7 register. Step S158
7, the channel for A / D conversion is SCPi
The port to which the output signal of 147 is connected is selected.
In step S1588, the signal of SCPi147 is A / D converted.

In step S1589, if the A / D conversion result is "0", the A / D conversion could not be performed correctly, or if the result was buried in noise.
Since the signal may be in a transient state, the process is interrupted and the process returns to step S1605.

[0630] In step S1590, the A / D value is compared with the threshold level 0. When A / D value <threshold level 0, the range is A in FIG. 149. In step S1591, "L" level data is set in the R6 register. In step S1592, when the previous level (R7 register) is equal to or higher than the “M” level, it is determined to be the fall. Step S
Branch to 1601. If the previous level is less than the "M" level, it is determined that there is no change and the process branches to step S1605 and returns.

[0631] In step S1593, the A / D value is compared with the threshold level 1. When A / D value <threshold level 1, it means that it is in the range of (B) in the diagram shown in FIG. 172, so the process branches to step S1604 and the data OFFH that cannot be included in new level data in processing
To set.

[0632] In step S1594, the A / D value is compared with the threshold level 2. When A / D value <threshold level 2, it is in the range (C) shown in FIG. 172.

In step S1595, "M" level data is set in the R6 register. Step S159
6, the previous level (R7 register) is "M"
If it is higher than the level, it is determined to be a fall and the process branches to step S1601. If it is smaller than the “M” level, there is no change and the process branches to step S1605 and returns. If it is smaller than the "M" level, it is determined to be a fall and the process branches to step S1600.

In step S1597, the A / D value is compared with the threshold level 3. When A / D value <threshold level 3, it means that the value is in the range (D) in FIG. 172, and therefore the process branches to step S1604, and data OFFH which is impossible in processing is set as new level data.

In step S1598, the A / D value is at "H" level, so "H" level data is set in the R6 register. If the previous level (R7 register) is higher than the “M” level in step S1599, it is determined that there is no change and the process returns to step S1605. If it is lower than the "M" level, it is determined to be a fall, and the process branches to step S1601.

[0636] In step S1600, this is the place where the process branches at the start determination. F_GPSUP, a flag indicating a change in rising edge, is set to "1". Step S160
1, the flag F_GPi indicating that there is a change is set to "1".
To In steps S1602 to S1603, the new level data (R6 register) is stored in the area (D_GPSOLD) for storing the previous level data. In step S1604, data OFFH, which is impossible in processing, is stored in new level data (R6 register). The process returns in step S1605.

Next, the flowchart shown in FIG. 155 will be described. This flowchart shows a flowchart of the brake processing. The following is a sequential description according to the flowchart.

First, at step S1606, the short brake is applied to the sequence motor. Next, in step S1607, a software timer of about 200 μsec is executed. In steps S1608 to S1612, the sequence motor 144 is reversely braked. The sequence motor 144 is reversed for 10 msec by counting the software timer of about 2 msec 5 times.

[0639] Steps S1613 to S1617
At, the short brake is applied to the sequence motor 144. Software timer of about 10 msec 5
By counting the number of times, the short brake is applied to the sequence motor 144 for 50 msec. Step S1
At 618, sequence motor 144 is turned off. The process returns in step S1619.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 156 will be described. This flow chart is a flow chart showing the processing for performing the initial setting required for the sequence clutch switching drive. The following is a sequential description according to the flowchart.

First, in step S1620, interrupts are prohibited so as not to be interrupted during motor driving.
Next, in step S1621, port setting is performed. In step S1622, the interface I
Set the mode of C138. In step S1623, all motors are turned off.

[0642] Steps S1624 to S1625
, The data stored in the EEPROM 135 (the drive voltage of the sequence motor 144, the SCPi 147
LED current of) is read. RAM for each data
Expand to the top. Steps S1626 to S162
8, the LED current XR0 register of SCPi 147 is stored. Step S1636 to Step S163
8, the drive voltage of the sequence motor 144 is set to XR
2 Store in register.

Steps S1639 to S1640
At, the judgment levels 0 and 1 are read from the EEPROM 135. In steps S1641 to S1650, the judgment level 0 data is multiplied by 16 to XR4.
It is expanded and stored in the XR5 register. Step S1651
In step S1661, the judgment level 1 data is multiplied by 16 and expanded and stored in XR6 and XR7.

[0644] In steps S1662 and 1663,
Interface current to the LED current value of SCPi147
138. In step S1664, the SC
Turn on the Pi 147 LED. Step S166
5, in step S1666, the sequence motor 1
The drive voltage of 44 is set. In step S1667, a software timer for about 10 msec during which the light amount of the LED of the SCPi 147 stabilizes is executed. In step S1668, the flag F_DMGGPS indicating the abnormality of the sequence clutch is cleared to "0". The process returns in step S1669.

By using this embodiment as described above,
Since the position can be detected while the current supplied to the photoelectric element is constant, the control can be simplified.

Further, for example, by turning on the power SW, the clutch can be initialized and the judgment level can be determined each time. Therefore, the temperature environment of the operating environment and the deterioration of the element itself with time are affected. It is possible to detect the position stably.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the third embodiment of the present invention will be described.

FIG. 174 is an enlarged view of the essential parts showing the clutch lever in the driving force transmission mechanism of the third embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, the lever for locking the clutch cam and the detecting portion thereof are shown as an integrally molded member, but the lever can be formed separately.
4, an example will be described. In this embodiment, the clutch cam portion and each drive system are equivalent to those in the first embodiment, and only the clutch lever portion will be described in FIG. 174 as an example in which the configuration of only the clutch lever is changed.

The clutch lever 201 is a member biased by a spring in the direction of the arrow, and a clutch cam (not shown) abuts on a part of the clutch lever 201, the locking portion 201a. Two pins are arranged on the upper surface of the clutch lever, and the detection plate 202 is adhesively fixed to the clutch lever 201 via the pins. The detection plate 20
Reference numeral 2 denotes a plate molded by a mold, and the detection unit SE point is monitored by a detection photo interrupter (PI) (not shown). The detection plate moves by the swinging motion of the clutch lever 201, and the SE point corresponds to the range of Xg to Xh to Xi.

Now, the range of Xg to Xi will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 175 shows a cross section taken along the line α-α ′ in FIG. Therefore, the thickness of the mold detection plate is X
It is clear that the g part is L1, the Xh part is L2, and the Xi part is a hole.

A material having a certain degree of light blocking property is used as the material of the detection plate 202, and the transmittance is controlled to be about 25% at the thickness L2. Further, the transmittance becomes almost 0 at the thickness of L1 and the transmittance becomes 100% at the i portion which is the hole portion. That is, the detection unit S changes the PI output to 0% or 25% or 100% depending on the lift state of the clutch lever. Since the method of detecting the absolute position and the like is the same as that of the first embodiment, it will be omitted here.

As described above, it is described that the same result as that of the first embodiment can be obtained by constructing the clutch lever and the detecting portion separately, but if this configuration is used, the detecting plate is directly connected to the clutch lever. Since it is not related, it is possible to metalize the clutch lever where stress concentrates on the locking part or to use a reinforced material, and since there is no place where stress occurs in the detection plate itself, dispersion of transmittance Also, considering only the moldability, the strength of the material is not required, so that it is possible to supply a stable detection unit at low cost.

Next, referring to FIGS. 176 to 177, a modified example in which the detector is provided separately will be described.

FIG. 176 is an enlarged view of essential parts showing a clutch lever in a driving force transmission mechanism which is a modification of the third embodiment.

In FIG. 176, the clutch lever 203
174 is equivalent to FIG. 174, and the portion not shown is the first
It is equivalent to the embodiment.

The detection plate 204 is positioned and fixed to the clutch lever 203 by the pin portion, but at the detection portion SE point, in this embodiment, the detection element is not the PI but the photo reflector (PR). FIG. 178 shows a perspective view of a main part, and a certain clearance is designed and arranged on one side of the detection plate 204. The terminal portion of the photo reflector is input to the processing circuit by a member (not shown).

The range monitored by the detection unit depending on the lifted state of the clutch lever 203 is Xj to X in FIG.
It varies in the range of k to XL. FIG. 177 shows a β-β ′ cross section in order to show the configuration of the Xj to XL portions.

As is clear from FIG. 177, the thickness L of the detection plate 204 is uniform in this example, and the PR 205 is arranged at an appropriate distance x from one end thereof.

The output of the PR (photo reflector) changes depending on the difference in reflectance of the object to be detected.
Therefore, if Xj, Xk, and XL have the same reflectance, it is impossible to detect the position of the detection plate. Therefore, the present detection plate is printed in the range of Xj to XL, and the Xj portion has a reflectance of about 10%, the Xk portion has a reflectance of about 50%, and the XL portion has a reflectance of about 90%. . Of course, if a metal having a smooth surface is used as the material of the detection plate 204, printing is not required in the XL portion, and if the Xj portion is used as a hole and a clearance is secured so that there is no reflecting member behind it, Printing of the Xj part is also unnecessary. Further, the method of controlling the reflectance is not limited to printing, and it is also possible to obtain the effect by attaching a tape-shaped member or by molding the detection plate itself in multiple colors with a mold.

As described above, according to this embodiment,
Since the reflectance of the detection part can be controlled by means such as printing or tape sticking, the material of the detection plate can be set arbitrarily, and PR can be configured by using only the space on one side of the detection plate. , Which can contribute to miniaturization of the mechanism.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, an example in which the absolute position is detected only in the initial position is given, but in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the drive system, the shutter / mirror system, and the hoist are wound. It is the same that three types of power systems are arranged around the clutch part for the purpose of a clutch for switching to three types of system and rewinding system. However, in this embodiment, not only the initial position,
It is an object of the present invention to provide a method capable of detecting absolute positions of all three types of drive positions.

FIG. 179 is an enlarged view of essential parts showing a clutch lever in the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment.

In FIG. 179, the clutch cam 211 is
Similar to the first embodiment, it is a main part of the clutch part that is switched in one direction and driven in the other direction. The planetary gears, which are the planets, and the first-stage gears of each drive system are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment, although not shown. ing.

The clutch lever 212 is urged by a spring (not shown) in the direction of the arrow, whereby the engaging portion 212a.
However, it contacts the clutch cam and enables switching and locking. A point SE point monitored by a sensor (not shown) is provided at the tip of the clutch lever, and the sensor output corresponding to the point is input to the processing circuit. The clutch lever 212 is lifted by the cam surface when the cam rotates to the right, and is switched sequentially. However, in order to clarify the relationship between the cam and the lever, FIG.
This will be described with reference to 80.

FIG. 180 shows the lifted state of the cam unfolded in the circumferential direction, and the state of FIG. 179 shows the state where the locking surface at the shutter / mirror position is locked. That is, the maximum lift position (outer circumference) of each cam is the same R,
The clutch lever 212 corresponds to a position down by the lift amount h3 from the outer circumference. By the way, the amount of down from the outer circumference was the same at other locking positions in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the down amount at the winding position is set to h1 and the down amount at the rewinding position is set to h2, and the three locking positions are different.

Therefore, in FIG. 179, the detected portion at the tip of the clutch lever is Xn with respect to the detection point SE.
Although the surfaces correspond to each other, the locking state changes, and the Xq surface corresponds to the SE point in the h1 down winding state and the Xp surface corresponds to the h2 down rewinding state. Further, in the maximum lifted area, the Xr plane corresponds to the SE point.
To clarify the structure of the Xn to Xr planes in the lever,
FIG. 181 shows a γ-γ cross section.

Xn to Xr with respect to the clutch lever thickness L
The ranges are set to have different thicknesses, the Xn range is set to L1, the Xp range is set to L2, the Xq range is set to L3, and the Xr range is formed to be a hole.

Here, L1 to L3 are constructed so that L1>L2> L3, and in this embodiment, L is 0.8 mm.
L1 is 0.7 mm, L2 is 0.4 mm, and L3 is 0.
Each is set to 2 mm.

Although it has been described in the first embodiment that the clutch lever is molded by the molding member and the transmittance thereof is controlled by the thickness, here, the transmittances at four locations are as follows. It is set.

Xn: 0%, Xp: 30%, Xq: 60
%, Xr: 100% Therefore, the output values of PI are different for the three driving positions, and the absolute position can be detected in any driving state.

182 to 184 and FIG. 230
Table 13 shows SCPi147 in the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of switching and controlling the LED current by driving each drive system.

Also in the fourth embodiment, the control method is the same as the method described in the first embodiment, but the hoisting system driving position and the rewinding system driving position can be discriminated. Therefore, the LED current of the SCPi 147 is also three types as compared with the two types of the first embodiment. Similarly, the judgment level is 3
It has become a kind.

FIG. 182 shows the output signal waveform of the SCPi 147 when the sequence motor 144 is driven in the switching direction when the LED current of the SCPi 147 is small. It is a figure showing the judgment result of ".

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the output signal waveform of the SCPi 147 in the same manner as above when the LED current of the SCPi 147 has an intermediate value.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing the output signal waveform of the SCPi 147 in the same manner as above when the LED current of the SCPi 147 is large.

Table 13 shown in FIG. 230 shows large, medium, small and initial positions of the LED current of the SCPi 147, a hoisting system position, a rewinding system position, and "H", "L" after judgment of the signal output of the SCPi 147. It is a table showing the relationship with.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 157 will be described. This flowchart is based on SCPi147
7 shows a processing flow of a subroutine at the time of driving to the initial position (mirror drive system position) in the LED current switching method of FIG. In the following, description will be given step by step according to the flowchart.

In step S1670, initialization necessary for driving the sequence clutch is performed. EEPRO
Expansion of adjustment data stored in M135 to RAM, setting of drive voltage of sequence motor 144, SCP
The determination of the output signal of i147, the setting of the AD channel, etc. are performed.

[0682] Next, in Step S1671, the SC
The LED current value of Pi147 is set to a value of "small". In step S1672, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the sequence clutch switching direction. In step S1673, the output signal of the SCPi 147 is set to A /
D conversion is performed, and the falling change of the signal is detected. Step S
In 1674, if a fall of the output signal of the SCPi 147 is detected, the process branches to step S1675, otherwise to step S1673, and continues until a fall is detected. In step S1675, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. Step S
Return at 1676.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 158 will be described. This flowchart is based on SCPi147
7 shows a process of a subroutine at the time of driving to the position of the hoisting drive system in the LED current switching system of FIG. The following is a sequential description according to the flowchart.

In step S1677, the process shown in FIG.
Similar to step S1670 in 7, initial setting is performed. In step S1678, L of SCPi147 is set.
Set the ED current value to a "medium" value. Step S167
At 9, the falling edges are counted. Set the "falling counter" to "1". It shows the number of falling edges from the initial position to the position of the hoisting drive system. In step S1680, sequence motor 144 is driven in the sequence clutch switching direction.

[0685] In step S1681, SCPi1
The output signal of 47 is A / D converted, and the falling change of the signal is detected. If there is a change in the falling edge in step S1682, the process branches to step S1683, and if there is no change in the falling edge, the process branches to step S1681. In step S1683, the falling counter is decremented by "1". If the value of the falling counter is "0" in step S1684, the process proceeds to step S1685, otherwise, the process branches to step S1681.

[0686] In step S1685, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. In steps S1686 to S1688, SCPi1
The LED current value of 47 is set to a "small" value, and SCPi147
Detect the output signal of.

As shown in Table 13 shown in FIG. 230, "H" is shown when in the winding position. If "H" is not shown here, the drive may be abnormal.
In step S1689, initial position (mirror position)
After driving, the process branches to step S1678 again to drive the winding position. In step S1689a, if the abnormality is the second one, the drive is interrupted and the process branches to damage. In step S1690, the process returns.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 159 will be described. This flowchart shows a subroutine for driving to the position of the rewinding drive system.

First, in step S1691, initialization is performed as in step S1670. Next, in step S1692, the LED current of the SCPi 147 is set to a “large” value. Next, step S1693.
At, the counter value for counting the falling edges is set to "2". Next, in step S1694, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the sequence clutch switching direction. Next, in step S1695, the signal output of the SCPi 147 is A / D converted, and the change in the falling edge is detected. If a fall change is detected in step S1696, the process branches to step S1697; otherwise, the process branches to step S1695.

[0690] In step S1697, the "falling counter" for counting the falling edges is decremented by "1". If the content of the "falling counter" is "0" in step S1698, the process branches to step S1699; otherwise, the process branches to step S1695. In step S1699, the sequence motor 144 is braked. Steps S1700 to S1702
At, the LED current of SCPi 147 is set to a value of "medium".

According to Table 13 in FIG. 230, the output signal of SCPi 147 becomes "H" at the rewinding drive system position.
If it does not become "H", it is determined to be abnormal and step S1703
Branch to.

[0692] In step S1703, initial position driving is performed once. In step S1703a, if the abnormality is the second one, the process branches to abnormality processing. If not, the process branches to step S1692 to drive the rewinding drive system position again. The process returns in step S1704.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the relationship between the output signal when the sequence motor 144 is driven in the switching direction of the sequence clutch and the drive position and level when the LED current of the SCPi 147 is constant.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 160 will be described. This flowchart shows the initial position drive processing of the sequence clutch. The following is a sequential description according to the flowchart.

In step S1705, initial settings necessary to drive the sequence motor 144, such as motor drive voltage setting, A / D channel setting, SCPi
The output signal of 147 is A / D converted and the storage area is cleared. The judgment levels 0 to 2 stored in the EEPROM in advance are expanded in the RAM.

Next, in step S1706, SC
The LED current of Pi147 is read from the EEPROM and set. In step S1707, the sequence motor 144 is driven in the sequence clutch switching direction. In step S1708, the output signal of the SCPi 147 is A / D converted.

[0697] Steps S1709 and S1710
In, if the A / D converted value is smaller than the determination level 0, it is set to the “L” level, and only the “L” level data is added. In steps S1711 and S1712, if the A / D conversion value is smaller than the determination level 1, it is set to the "M1" level, and only the "M1" level data is added. In steps S1713 and S1714, if the A / D converted value is smaller than the determination level 2, the level is set to "M2" level, and only "M2" level data is added.

In step S1715, it is determined that the data is the "H" level data, and only the "H" level data is added. In step S1716, "L", "M1",
When the predetermined number of "M2" and "H" level data are respectively sampled, the tumbling ends, but when the predetermined number is not sampled, step S170 is performed.
Branch to 8 and continue processing.

[0699] Steps S1717 to S1724
In, the total sum of "L", "M1", "M2", and "H" levels is divided by the number, and the average value of each is obtained. The threshold levels 0 to 5 are calculated by the following equations (9) to (14).

Threshold level 0 = “L” level + hiss width 0 …………………… (9) Threshold level 1 = “M1” level−hiss width 1 ……………… (10) Threshold level 2 = "M1" level + hiss width 2 ......... (11) Threshold level 3 = "M2" level-His width 3 ........... (12) Threshold level 4 = "M2" level + Hiss width 4 ……………… (13) Threshold level 5 = “H” level-His width 5 ……………… (14) Each threshold level is stored in RAM.

[0705] In step S1725, SCPi1
The 47 signal output is A / D converted, and a signal change is detected based on the threshold levels 0 to 5 obtained above. Fall detection and level detection of the signal at that time "L" is level 0, "MI" is level 1, "M2" is level 2, "M"
3 "is set to level 3.

Steps S1726 and S1727
Then, in step S1725 described above, the SCPi14
As a result of detection of the signal of No. 7, when the signal is rising and the level is “0”, the process branches to step S1728. Otherwise, the process branches to step S1725 to continue the process. In step S1728, since the initial position of the sequence clutch is detected, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. The process returns in step S1729.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 161 will be described. This flowchart shows the process of driving the sequence clutch to the mirror drive system position.
The steps will be described below in order.

First, in step S1730, initialization necessary to drive the sequence clutch is performed.
In step S1731, the LED of SCPi147
Set the current. In step S1732, the sequence motor 144 is driven. In step S1733, the SCPi147 signal output is A / D converted, and the change and level of the signal are detected. In steps S1734 and S1735, when the signal of SCPi147 is the falling edge and the level is "0", step S17
If not, the process branches to step S1733 and the process is continued. In step S1736, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. In step S1737, the process returns.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 162 will be described. This flowchart shows the processing when the sequence clutch is driven to the position of the hoisting drive system. The steps will be described below in order.

First, steps S1738 to S1740 are the same as steps S1730 to S1732. In step S1741, the SCPi147 signal is A / D converted, and the change and level of the signal are detected. In step S1742 and step S1743, when the signal of SCPi147 falls and the level is "1", step S1
744, otherwise branches to step S1741 to continue processing. In step S1744, the sequence motor 144 is braked and stopped. Step S
Return at 1745.

Next, the flow chart shown in FIG. 163 will be described. This flowchart shows the processing when the sequence clutch is rewound and driven to the position of the drive system. The following will be described step by step.

First, steps S1746 to S1.
748 is the above step S1730 to step S173.
Same as 2. In step S1749, the SCP
The i147 signal is A / D converted to detect the signal change and level. Steps S1750 and S1751
At the falling edge of the SCPi 147 signal and the level is "2", the process branches to step S1752.
Otherwise, the process branches to step S1749 to continue the process. In step S1752, the sequence motor 1
Brake 44 and stop. Step S175
Return with 3.

By using this embodiment as described above,
Since the absolute position of 3 or more driving positions can be detected only by the output of one sensor, the cam moves due to vibration while the power SW is off, or the battery is removed while the motor is being driven. Even in the abnormally stopped state due to this, the absolute position is immediately detected at the time of re-driving, so that it is possible to provide an inexpensive yet extremely safe clutch mechanism.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

When the construction as shown in FIG. 13 is adopted as in the first embodiment, the transmittance of the clutch lever 1 is high,
When the amount of transmitted light is large, the photocurrent becomes large, the VCE of the phototransistor Q1 becomes small, and the phototransistor Q1 becomes saturated, so that the response speed of the phototransistor Q1 decreases, which is not suitable when a response speed is required. Is.

FIG. 186 is an electric circuit diagram showing the structure of the detection circuit unit of the photo interrupter in the fifth embodiment.

This circuit is a modification of the configuration of the photointerrupter (PI) detection circuit section in the first embodiment.

In FIG. 186, reference numeral I1 is a current source for controlling the LED: D1 in the photo interrupter PI509. The light emitted from the LED: D1 passes through the clutch lever 511 and reaches the phototransistor Q1.
Then, a current corresponding to the amount of light received flows through the phototransistor Q1 and is input to the PTR terminal of the IFIC 520. A waveform shaping circuit is built in the IFIC 520.
This circuit adds a hysteresis characteristic to the current input from the PTR terminal, converts it into a voltage waveform, and outputs it from the PIOUT terminal.

Now, the operation of the waveform shaping circuit section will be described.
First, the current IIN input from the PTR terminal flows through the transistor Q5. Then, a current of IIN / 2 tends to flow in Q4. On the other hand, the current IREF is flowing in the D / A converter, and the transistor Q3
Also, the current IREF is about to flow. The current source I3 is I
3 = IREF / 3 current source.

For the sake of clarity, first, SW1 is turned off to proceed with the discussion. When IIN = 0 [A], Q4 to Q
Since 3 has a larger ability to flow current, the potential at the point VA rises and becomes "H" level. Therefore, the inverted output "L" of PIOUT is output. If IIN is increased from this state and IIN> 2IREF, then Q4 has a greater ability to flow current than Q3. Then point V
The potential of A becomes "L" level and "H" from PIOUT.
Is output. Thus, at I3 = 0 [A], P
IOUT has a threshold value of IIN = 2IREF and IIN <2IRE.
PIOUT = “L” in F, PIOUT in IIN> 2IREF
= “H”.

However, in this state, for example, IIN
If noise is added to IIN for some reason when is close to 2IREF, PIOUT will chatter. To prevent this, PIOUT has a hysteresis characteristic. Specifically, I3 = IREF / 3 is set, and SW1 is turned on only when PIOUT = “L”.

In this way, the threshold value in the direction of decreasing current (Lo-Going) is 2IREF because it is not affected by I3. Direction of increasing current (H
Since the threshold value of i-Going) is equal to or lower than the threshold value, PIOUT = “L”, SW1 is turned on. Therefore, the threshold value is 2IREF + 2 / 3IREF = 8 / 3I.
It becomes REF and can have a hysteresis width of 2/3 IREF. Since IREF can be adjusted stepwise by the D / A converter, the threshold value and hysteresis width can be set according to the current value used. In addition, in this waveform shaping circuit, the PTR terminal for current input is GND.
To about 0.7 [V]. By connecting the waveform shaping circuit of the IFIC520 described above to the output of the PI509, the output PIOUT of the IFIC520 is set to the CPU1.
The fifth embodiment is configured so that the signal is input to the CPU 20 and the signal is read by the CPU 120.

With this structure, the output current of the phototransistor is directly processed in the IFIC, and the VCE of the phototransistor is kept constant.
Since there is no saturation, the response delay of the phototransistor due to saturation is eliminated.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing a schematic structure of the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

The sixth embodiment has a mechanism for switching the drive system, which was switched to the three systems in the first embodiment, to the four systems.

The configuration from the motor 401 to the sequence clutch 403 via the speed reduction system 402 is the same as that of the first embodiment. This embodiment is also applied to a single-lens reflex camera having a focal plane shutter, and the system driven by the motor 401 is a shutter / mirror system 404, a hoisting system 405, a rewinding system 406, and a screen switching system 40.
7

The screen switching system means, for example, switching between a normal screen and a panoramic screen, or switching between a normal screen and a half screen.

As in the first embodiment, the shutter / mirror system 404 uses a cam to perform mirror up / down and shutter charge.

FIG. 188 is an explanatory view of the essential parts of the sequence clutch.

In the figure, reference numeral 411 is an output end of the speed reduction system 402, which is a sun gear capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions in association with the rotation direction of the motor 401. The clutch cam 413 is a cam having a shaft portion that holds the clutch gear 412 while applying friction, and four locking portions for restricting the stop position of the clutch gear are provided on the outer circumference thereof.

A clutch lever 414 corresponds to the locking portion, and the lever is biased in the direction of the arrow by a spring (not shown). The clutch lever 414 is integrally provided with a detection unit 420 having three kinds of transmittances, and a PI 419 which is a photointerrupter for detection is provided at the position. As the lever 414 is lifted by the cam and the switching progresses, the detection unit 420 reciprocates in the slit portion of the PI 419. In the state of FIG. 188, the clutch is switched to the initial position (shutter / mirror system), and the first gear 415 of the shutter / mirror system can be driven by rotating the sun gear 411 in the direction of the arrow.

Here, a circumferential cam development view of the clutch cam 413 is shown. It shows the relationship between the lift amount and the rotation angle. The cam is h2 down from the outer circumference only at the initial position. Further, the other locking positions are cams down from the outer periphery by h1, and the revolution of the clutch cam is restricted by the clutch lever at each locking position. In FIG. 188, as in the first embodiment, the detection unit 420 has three types of regions having transmittances of approximately 0, 25%, and 100%, and the transmittance corresponds to 0 at the initial position. At other locking positions, the clutch lever is stopped at a position corresponding to the transmittance of 25%.

FIG. 191 shows simply the output of the PI 419 when the clutch is switched in the above-mentioned mechanism.

When the sun gear in FIG. 188 is rotated in the direction opposite to the arrow direction, the cam can be continuously switched, but the output at that time is 0 from the PI because the initial position has a transmittance of 0. Output is at a low level and is at a high level in the 100% transmission area corresponding to the top dead center of the cam.

Further, the locking positions other than the initial position each output between H and L, and if the intermediate level (1) is detected in FIG. 191, the screen switchable position,
If (2) is detected, the hoisting possible position can be detected, and if (3) is detected, the rewinding possible position can be detected.

FIG. 189 shows a state in which the cam is being switched, and shows a state in which the lever is lifted against the spring force (detection section omitted).

In the above configuration, reference numerals 404 to 406
Since the configurations of the shutter / mirror system, the hoisting system, and the rewinding system in FIG. 187 are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The screen switching mechanism will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, the screen switching principle will be described with reference to the internal perspective view of the present camera with reference to FIG.

The main body 427 has a mask portion corresponding to a photographing screen (normal size) in the central portion and a cartridge chamber and a spool chamber on both sides thereof. A focal plane shutter 430 is arranged on the front surface (subject side) of the main body 427.

In the first embodiment, there is nothing interposed between the main body and the shutter, but in this camera, a mask 428 and a mask 429 which are thin plates are arranged. The two masks 428 and 429 are held slidably in the vertical direction with respect to the main body by a guide member (not shown).
Further, the masks 428 and 429 are provided with cam portions 428a and 429a that are substantially parallel to the optical axis, respectively. As a result, by applying a driving force from the cam portion, both the masks 428 and 429 move up and down within a limited range.

Various methods are known as so-called panorama switching for obtaining a horizontally long screen (about 13 mm × 36 mm) by shielding the upper and lower parts of a normal photographing range (24 mm × 36 mm). Here, the roles of the masks 428 and 429 are similar to those of the panorama switching. The purpose is to block a part of the screen and obtain a horizontally long screen only when the masks 428 and 429 move inward, respectively. It is what

Actually, the above-mentioned cam portions 428a and 429a are actually used.
It has been described that the masks 428 and 429 are moved up and down by driving the. The driving mechanism will be described below.

FIG. 192 is a development view of the above-mentioned screen switching series, and is constructed such that adjacent gears mesh with each other.

The gear 419 is the first stage flat gear of the screen switching system, and corresponds to the gear 418 in FIG. 188. The gear 420 is a two-stage gear having a flat gear and a bevel gear, and the bevel gear portion meshes with the bevel gear portion of the gear 421. As a result, it becomes possible to use it as an output obtained by rotating the rotation direction of 419 by 90 °. The spur gear portion of the gear 421 meshes with the gear 422. The gear 422 has pins 425 on both sides,
A pin 426 is provided vertically and rotates integrally with the gear 422. Here, the pins 425 and 426 are provided at positions facing each other by 180 ° with respect to the center of the gear 422. The diameters of the pins 425 and 426 are configured to be slidably movable in the cam portions 428a and 429a provided on the masks 1 and 2.

FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 are the main part configuration diagrams showing the actual screen switching from the front of the camera.
Is in a normal state. In this state, the masks 428, 4
Both 29 are retracted from the opening of the main body, and the photographed range is not affected by the mask.

The masks 428 and 429 are provided with a bent portion having a cam as shown in FIG. 194. When both masks are attached to the main body, the bent portions have a distance L as shown in FIG. Has a space.

A gear 422 is rotatably held in the space L by a member (not shown), and pins 425 and 426 provided on both sides are fitted to cam portions 428a and 429a of the mask, respectively. The gear 422 is the gear 421,
The gears 420 and 419 are sequentially meshed with each other, and each gear is also rotatably held by a member (not shown). Further, the gear 421 and the gear 422 are configured with the same number of teeth, and the phases that are once combined do not shift.

Further, in this embodiment, as a means for detecting the state of the mask, the detecting element 431 is provided on the side surface of the gear 421.
(Photo reflector) is arranged to monitor the state of the gear 421.

FIG. 193 shows the state in which the gear 421 is viewed from the detection element side.

The gear 421 is a gear molded by a black molding member, and has a glossy part and a semi-glossy part of 18 parts.
Tape members are attached so that they are located at 0 ° opposite positions. Except for the glossy part and the semi-glossy part, the reflectance is much lower than that of the semi-glossy part.

Of course, it goes without saying that the detecting element shown in FIG. 195 is arranged at a position where the tape portion can be detected.

From FIG. 195, it is apparent that the gear 422 is rotated when the gear 419 is rotated, and the mask change at that time will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 199.

FIG. 197 is a side view of the essential parts of the pin and the cam, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 195. Now, now
It is assumed that a screen switching instruction is given by an operation member (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 188, the sun gear 411
Since the power can be transmitted by the left rotation of the gear, when the clutch is switched to the screen switching system and the drive is started, the gear 42
2 rotates in the direction of the arrow in FIG. Since the cam and the pin are slidably fitted to each other, the mask 428 moves downward and the mask 429 moves upward in both masks (see FIG. 198).

When the rotation further advances from the state of FIG. 198, the state of FIG. 199 is reached. At this position, the mask 428 is the most lowered position, and the mask 429 is the most raised position. FIG. 196 shows this state.

[0754] Aperture of camera body (up and down 24mm)
Of this, about 9 mm is blocked by the masks 428 and 429, and only the central portion of about 13 mm can be exposed. In this state, the gear 421 is not shown in FIGS.
° It is stopped at the rotated position, and the glossy part corresponds to the detection element.

[0755] That is, the photo reflector P in the middle of switching.
By detecting the photoreflector PR output corresponding to semi-gloss or gloss from the level where the R output is Low and stopping the gear train, the state of FIG. 195 or 196 can be created alternately. Of course, there is some overrun from the detection by the photoreflector PR until the motor actually stops, but it goes without saying that the detected surface of the gear 421 is provided at a position in consideration of the overrun.

Further, in the present embodiment, the drive system is divided into four series and each is selected, so that the clutch always passes through the screen switching system during the sequence of one frame. When the clutch revolves, the clutch is provided with friction, and the revolution force is obtained by this, so if the screen switching system is unloaded, the gear 422 can rotate, although only slightly. There is a nature. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gear 420 or the gear 421 is provided with a friction for preventing movement, which prevents the power from being transmitted to the mask even if the gear 419 receives a force from the clutch during revolution.

Although the operation of the screen switching system has been described above, the screen can be switched by the common motor by using the clutch of this embodiment.

A modification of the sixth embodiment will be described next.

First, the concept of the drive system of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

The motor 463 built in the camera body drives the sequence clutch 465 via the speed reduction system 464, which is the same as the above-described configuration. The sequence clutch 465 also has the same configuration in which the drive system can be selected by the clutch cam and the clutch lever, so the details will be omitted.
In this embodiment, there are three types of drive systems that can be switched.
Seeds are hoisting system 466, rewinding system 467, screen switching system 46.
8

In this embodiment, the shutter has a so-called lens shutter type structure built in the photographing lens, and is driven by a power source different from the motor 463 on the body side.

FIG. 200 is a sectional view of the essential part of the central portion of the present camera.

The main body 452 is provided with an opening for limiting the exposure range, and two masks 4 are provided in front of it (on the side of the subject).
55,456 are provided. A lens frame 451 including a taking lens is arranged in front of the mask, and a shutter is provided inside the lens frame together with a plunger (not shown) to control the exposure. A cartridge chamber 454 for holding a cartridge and a spool 453 for winding the film are provided at both ends of the main body 452, and the film is appropriately moved to the opening. A mask 4 is placed between the cartridge chamber 454 and the lens frame 451.
55, and pins for restricting the positions of the mask 456 are configured.

FIG. 201 is a front view of the mask driving section.
Pins that fit into the mask (462a, 4 in FIG. 200)
The gear that rotates together with 62b) is the gear 462. The gear 462 includes gears 461 to 458.
Idle gears sequentially mesh with each other to connect a gear 457 and a gear 462 which are two stages of a flat gear and a bevel gear. The gear 457 is provided to rotate the rotation direction by 90 °, and a bevel gear portion and a not-shown bevel gear from the sequence clutch side mesh with each other. The power system from the clutch (not shown) is equivalent to the above-mentioned example, that is, when the drive system is selected, the gear 462 can continuously rotate in one direction.

Next, the relationship between the mask portion and the gear 462 will be described. The gear 462 is rotatably held together with other gear trains by a holding member (not shown), and pins 462a and 462b are provided on the subject side and the film side, respectively.
Are configured integrally. The pin 462a is fitted into a cam portion provided on the mask 455 located on the film side, and the pin 462b is fitted into a cam portion provided on the mask 456. Further, both masks are provided with cams so that bosses provided integrally with the main body can be fitted from the main body side, and the relative position with respect to the opening is regulated by these cams.

Next, the relationship between the mask 455 and the gear 462 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 204.

FIG. 202 shows a normal photographing state, and the position corresponding to the opening 440 of the camera body is shown by a chain double-dashed line. The gear 462 has a pin 46 on the back side.
2a is provided, but the mask 455 has
A cam 455a corresponding to the pin 462a is provided. Further, two bosses 452a and 452b are provided from the main body, and the cam 45 serving as a cam corresponding to the bosses is provided.
5b and 455c are located above and below the cam of 455a. Therefore, the mask 1 by these three bosses
The position is restricted, and the mask 455 moves with respect to the opening 440 by rotating the only movable pin 462a.

The gear 462 can be rotated only in one direction by the power of the motor, and when the motor power is transmitted in the screen switching direction, the gear 462 rotates in the direction of the arrow in FIG. The mask 455 moves along with the rotation of the gear 462, and when the pin 462a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 203, the mask 455 moves to the rightmost position.
At this position, as shown by the diagonal lines, the left side of the opening 440 is partially blocked, and this amount is equal to the total opening (24 × 3).
6 mm) and about 9 mm in the lateral direction. Gear 462
When is further rotated, the pin 462a is rotated to the position shown in FIG.

In this state, the mask 455 is at the lowest position. Similar to FIG. 203, the hatched portion is shielded, but in this state, about 5.
The area of 5 mm is blocked.

When the gear 462 further rotates from the state of FIG. 204, the mask 455 returns to the state of FIG. 202,
The mask 455 is completely retracted from the opening 440.

205 to 207 are for explaining the movement of the mask 456, and FIG. 205 is the same as FIG. 202.
The mask is completely retracted. Of course, in this state, the gear 462 is in the same position as in FIG.

The mask 456 has a cam 456a fitted to a pin 462b which is integral with the gear 462, and two cams 456b and 4 fitted to bosses 452a and 452b which are integral with the main body.
56 c is provided and the position is regulated by these three members, which is the same as the mask 455.

As for the shape of the mask itself, the portion turned to the right side of the opening is larger than the mask 455, and as is clear from the sectional view of FIG.
In order to dispose 2 inside the masks 455 and 456, the mask 456 is provided with a bent portion on the lower side. When the motor power is transmitted to the screen switching system, the gear 462 rotates in the direction of the arrow. When the gear 462 rotates to the state shown in FIG. 206, the mask 456 moves to the leftmost position.

[0774] The gear 462 further rotates, and
When the mask 456 is rotated to the state of 7, the mask 456 moves to the uppermost side.

The rotation angle of the gear 462 from FIG. 205 to FIG. 206 is the same as the rotation angle from FIG. 202 to FIG. 203, and in the case of FIG. 206 to FIG. 207, FIG. Similarly, when returning to 205, the rotation angle of the gear 462 is the same. Further, in FIG. 203 and FIG. 206, and in FIG. 204 and FIG.

As is clear from the above, in this embodiment, it is possible to select three kinds of screen sizes by selecting the position of the gear 462 at three positions. Here, the three places mean that three types of so-called half state and so-called panoramic state can be selected from the normal time. Of course, if the gear position can be stopped at a position other than these three positions, it can also be used with a mask size of intermediate level between normal and half, normal and panorama, and a screen switching mechanism with an extremely wide range of use is possible. It becomes possible to provide.

Next, the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described.

This embodiment is an embodiment in which the driving force transmission mechanism of the present invention is applied to another camera. At present, various patrones having a so-called feeding mechanism have been proposed in order to eliminate the complexity of setting the patrone.

Usually, these films are automatically sent out by rotating the shaft in the patrone that is rotated during rewinding in the opposite direction, and the user "draws and sets the film to the required length. It is possible to eliminate the series of operations described above.

However, when using a patrone of such a type, a member for driving the shaft of the patrone (hereinafter referred to as a fork gear) must be rotated in both directions, so that a dedicated motor is used on the fork gear side, It required a complicated clutch mechanism.

In view of the above, the present embodiment will explain that the power system in the camera can be constructed with an extremely simple construction by using the planetary gear type clutch described above.

FIG. 209 is a conceptual diagram showing a schematic structure of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied, and showing only the main part of the internal layout of the top and front of the camera. Is.

This camera is a so-called lens shutter type camera, and a lens frame 323 enclosing the taking lens 320 is arranged in the center of the body. On both sides of the lens frame 323, a cartridge 31 that can be inserted / removed by an opening / closing part (not shown).
8 and a spool 319 for winding the film. In addition, the viewfinder 3 is provided above the lens frame 320.
22 and a distance measuring unit 321 for detecting the distance to the subject by a so-called infrared active method.

FIG. 210 is a conceptual diagram of the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment.

The point that power is transmitted from the motor to the sequence clutch 301 via the reduction gear system is the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment, but in this embodiment, the motor is arranged inside the spool.

In this embodiment, the sequence clutch 301 can switch the power from the motor to four types of power systems. Here, the four types are used to extend the photographic lens for focusing. The lens drive system 302, the spool is rotated to wind the film, the winding system 303 is rotated, the fork gear is rotated in the feeding direction, and the feeding system 304 for preparing the film winding is rotated, and the fork gear is rotated in the rewinding direction. These are drive systems for the rewinding system 305.

FIG. 211 shows the upper surface of the main part of the driving force transmission mechanism in this embodiment, showing the arrangement of the gears.
The sun gear 316 is a gear that is directly rotated in the forward / reverse direction from the motor, and the clutch gear 317 is supported by a clutch cam (not shown) to perform revolution and rotation. Of course, the clutch cam is regulated by a lever (not shown) as in the above-described example.

The state of FIG. 210 is a state in which the clutch gear 317 meshes with the first stage gear of the lens drive system and the AF 311 can be rotated via a gear train (not shown). A first stage gear of the hoisting system, a sending gear 313, and a rewinding gear 314 are also arranged on the revolution locus of the clutch gear. The sending system means that the rewinding system is rotated in the opposite direction. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sending gear and the rewinding gear are connected by the idle gear 338 and the idle gear 339 to enable the fork gear to rotate in both directions. Here, it goes without saying that the two idle gears are sufficiently retracted from the revolution locus of the clutch gear.

FIG. 213 is a development view of the cam portion of the clutch cam that supports the clutch gear.

In this embodiment, only one position has the smallest lift amount so that the lens driving position can be the initial position. The other three hoisting systems, delivery systems, and rewinding systems have the same lift amount and are controlled by counting the number of pulses from the initial position.

Next, the film feed detection mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. This figure also shows only the layout of the main part, but this figure is when the camera is viewed from the subject side, and the central photographing range (mask) 324 is actually exposed 24 ×
The range is 36 mm. On the lower right side of the mask, a feeding detection element 325 capable of monitoring the film moving behind the mask is arranged.

Although the film is not shown in this example, a case of a type having eight perforations per frame will be described as an example. The element 325 is composed of a photoreflector, and the sensor unit faces the perforation. As a result, as the film moves, an output corresponding to perforation is obtained from the element 325.

Next, the configuration of the lens driving system will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216.

FIG. 214 is a sectional view showing the main part in the vicinity of the lens frame.
Although the taking lens 320 and the shutter 335 are shown as a pair for convenience, the number of lenses is plural, and the shutter is not limited to the rear of the lens, and the type provided between the lenses is the same. Now, the lens frame 331 including the lens and the shutter can be guided and moved in the optical axis direction by the guide shaft 333 and the guide shaft 334.

The lens frame 331 is urged toward the film side (imaging surface side) by an autofocus spring 337. A cam gear 332 is provided on the opposite side biased by the autofocus spring 337, and the cam gear 332 is provided with a cam surface 332a as shown in FIG. 215. The protrusion of the lens frame abuts on the cam surface, whereby the feeding position of the lens is regulated by the cam.

Next, the cam surface will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216.

As a feature of this embodiment, since power is transmitted to each drive system only in one direction, the lens drive system is also kept rotating in one direction so that the feeding operation from infinity to the closest distance can be repeated. It is configured.

FIG. 216 is a development view of the cam surface portion, and the initial position of the camera is the infinite position, that is, the state where the lens frame is not lifted by the cam at all. The cam surface is smoothly lifted from the initial position and reaches the closest position. The contact position of the lens frame protrusion changes due to the rotation of the cam, and the lens is extended. However, the contact part lifts by the cam rotating 360 ° from the initial position.
It goes down from the x position and returns to the initial position.

As described above, by rotating the cam gear, the lens drive system can perform the feeding operation and the reset operation.

Although the cam control will not be described in detail, a necessary feeding amount is calculated based on the data from the distance measuring section, and the cam gear is stopped and controlled by a sensor (not shown) to a predetermined position and reset after exposure. Needless to say.

Next, the auto-loading operation when setting the film (patrone) in this camera will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 217.

The greatest feature of this camera is that it uses a patrone having a feed-out mechanism. However, since this camera has a feed-out mechanism in the patrone itself, it has a large rear lid like an existing camera. You do n’t have to
There is a small opening / closing part required for inserting the cartridge.

A switch (hereinafter referred to as BKSW34) is provided in the opening / closing section.
8) is provided, and the switch is configured to be turned off in the closed state and turned on in the open state.

The release SW 341 is a two-stage type switch, and the 1st. Distance measurement, photometry, and lens extension with the release 2nd. It is a type that performs exposure lens resetting and winding at release.

The motor 342 is the only motor used in this camera, and is configured so that clutch rotation can be performed by CCW rotation and power transmission can be performed by CW rotation.

[0806] The clutch cam 343 is a cam locked by a clutch lever having a developed shape shown in Fig. 213, and also a cam for supporting a clutch gear. The clutch lever 344 is biased by the spring toward the cam surface of the clutch cam, and is lifted following the cam. Clutch PI3
45 is a sensor for monitoring the detected portion of the clutch lever, as in the first embodiment.

The spool 346 is of a type having a built-in motor 342, and a protrusion (claw) for holding perforations is provided on the outer periphery of the spool 346.
The feeding PR 347 corresponds to the element 325 described in FIG. 213. The autofocus cam 349 is shown in FIG.
15, as described in FIG. 216, the lift min
Corresponds to the infinite initial position.

The autofocus pulse 350 is a pulse output from a sensor provided in a lens feeding system (not shown) and is a pulse that is interlocked with the rotation of the cam.
The AFSW 351 is a cam position detection switch, and detects the initial position and the pulse count start position during feeding by turning the switch on and off. The fork gear 352 is a gear that is normally and reversely rotated by the above-described sending system and rewinding system.

Now, a series of auto-loading operations from the insertion of the cartridge to the camera until the photographing becomes possible will be described step by step.

First, by closing the lid of the cartridge section, the BKSW 348 changes from on to off (T
101). In response to this, the control circuit CCWs the motor 342.
Rotate in the direction. That is, in the initial state, the sequence clutch meshes with the lens drive system, so the clutch gear is revolved in order to switch the clutch to the delivery system.

[0811] The clutch PI is almost 100% in the initial position.
The light-shielded detected portion corresponds, and the output is at the low level. As the cam revolves, the clutch shifts to the hoisting system. As a result, the lever 344 is lifted, and becomes a lift max region before the hoisting system. PI345 here
Output corresponds to the 100% transparent part of the lever,
High level.

For the switching, since it is necessary to feed the film in the cartridge, the clutch cam is further continuously rotated. That is, the clutch cam is performed until it corresponds to the delivery system, but in this camera, the time T102 when the PI 345 outputs the second trailing edge is the time when the switching to the delivery system is completed, and the motor is immediately stopped upon receiving T102. To be done.

By the way, although it has been described with reference to FIG. 212 that the lift amount of the lever can be stopped at the most lowered position only in the initial position, the level of the detected portion at the other three lift amounts has a transmittance of about 25%. Is configured to correspond to PI345. Therefore, the output of PI does not shift from H to L at the second fall at T102, but falls to an intermediate level between H and L as shown in FIG. 217. By rotating the motor CW in the state of T102, the delivery system can be rotated.

[0814] After the motor is stopped by T102, T103
This is the point at which the CW rotation is started, and the clutch cam, which was slightly overrun due to the rotation, starts the engagement mesh transmission to the delivery system. The feed PR 347 is configured to output High in the absence of the film. Therefore, in the perforation portion, the output of H is repeated at the hole portion and the output of L is repeated at the other base portion.

Explaining in combination with FIG. 213, when the fork gear starts to rotate in the feeding direction, in the configuration shown in FIG. 213, the film moves from left to right as seen from the subject side. Therefore, even if the film moves to the spool side, no PR34
No pulse is output from 7.

The point where the leading edge of the film reaches the detection portion of PR325 is T112. As a result, the PR output shifts from H to L. Furthermore, the pulse corresponding to the perforation is output according to the movement.

By the way, the purpose of the main feeding is to guide the film to a position where it can be held by the tabs of the spool. Therefore, in this camera, the fall of the output of PR347 is counted from the timing of T112.

[0818] With this camera, it is about 5 from PR347.
/ 8 frames, the state in which the film is sent to the spool side is the optimal state for holding by the spool, so the CW rotation of the motor is continued until the pulse is counted 5 times. When the fifth trailing edge is detected at T104, the motor immediately stops, and the feeding is completed. Next, after the motor stops at T104, the motor is rotated by CCW again (T105) and the clutch is switched to the hoisting system. When switching from the delivery system to the hoisting system, the rewinding system and the autofocus system (lens feeding system) are passed. Therefore, the output of the PI 345 falls to the intermediate level at T113 and to the Low level at T114, respectively, but these are points that do not need to be stopped, and fall at the next intermediate level of T114 and T106.
At, it is judged that the clutch has moved to the hoisting system and the motor is stopped. After stopping at T106, the motor starts CW rotation at T107. When the clutch meshes with the winding system at T107, the spool starts rotating in the winding direction.

However, the film and the spool are not wound yet at the initial stage of the rotation of the spool, and when the claw portion of the spool is rotated to the film perforation locking position, the film and the spool are integrally moved for the first time. That is, with respect to the rotation of the spool, the output of the feeding PR 347 takes a little time, is held by the claws, and then outputs a pulse.

If the output linked to the motor by the feed PR is obtained, the film is surely wound up, and if the film is fed by a necessary amount and stopped, the camera can stand by in the shooting state of the first frame. Become. In this camera, the amount of blank feed is set to 4 frames. That is, by counting the feeding PR pulse from (1) 32 times, T1
The motor is stopped by 08, and the four-frame jump feed is completed.

By the way, in this camera, since the cartridge has a type in which its central axis is interlocked with the film and may rotate, the fork gear 352 in FIG. 217 rotates in the feeding direction during film winding. In FIG. 217, the fork gear is in a state of being rotated via the shaft of the cartridge at T115 to T116 indicated by broken lines in the fork gear.

[0821] T115 to T11 are shown on the timing chart.
Since the portion 6 is not transmitted from the clutch side but is rotated by the film, it is shown by a broken line for the sake of distinction.

When the motor is stopped in response to T108, the film stands by at the photographing position.

[0824] Finally, the motor starts CCW rotation from T117 in order to put the autofocus system in the standby state. Since the sequence clutch is currently a hoisting system, it is necessary for the autofocus system to pass through the sending system and the rewinding system. Therefore, after confirming the intermediate level at two locations, the motor is immediately stopped by the Low level determination at T109.

[0825] The autofocus system needs to be on standby at a surely meshed position in order to shorten a time lag in actual photographing. Therefore, in this camera T1
Although the clutch cam is stopped by the autofocus system by 19, the AF cam reset operation is performed to obtain a normal state from a slightly overrun state.

That is, the motor is again C by T110.
Start W rotation. The AF pulse 350 outputs a pulse accompanying the rotation of the autofocus system. AFSW351
Is on at the initial position, but is turned off immediately before the lift of the AF cam (T118). The motor continues to rotate, and when it passes through the top dead center of the AF cam 349, it stops at almost the same time as the AFSW off timing T111.

[0827] Of course, the AF pulse 350 up to this point
Is outputting continuous pulses. Since the purpose of this reset operation was to make the AF cam stand by in the initial state, the AF pulse is not used, but in the actual shooting, the necessary number of feeds calculated from the distance measurement data from the OFF timing T118 of the AFSW 351 is used. The corresponding number of pulses is counted, the motor is stopped, the exposure is performed, and then the reset operation is performed.

[0828] Since the motor is stopped by T111, the clutch cam is stopped in a state where it is surely meshed with the autofocus system, and all the autoloading is completed.

[0829] In normal shooting, 1st. , 2nd.
Shooting is performed by the release, but the sending system is not required. Therefore, after the clutch is switched from the autofocus system to the hoisting system, the output system and the rewinding system are passed, and the AF cam is reset again by the autofocus system to perform a series of one-frame shooting. . The rewinding can be similarly realized by detecting the film end by a known method and rewinding, or rewinding midway by the operation member, or by switching the clutch in any state.

As described above, according to this embodiment, even in a camera using a cartridge having a feeding mechanism,
Since it can be realized by a single motor without the need to add a dedicated motor or a clutch mechanism to operate the delivery mechanism, it is possible to provide an extremely small and inexpensive camera.

As described above, by using the above-described embodiments, the power of a single motor can be transmitted to three or more drive systems with a simple structure in which the rotation direction of the motor is switched and controlled. Moreover, since the switching state can be detected by a single detection member, it is possible to provide an extremely small and inexpensive clutch mechanism.

Further, since the absolute position can be detected with a single detecting member, it is possible to provide a mechanism with extremely high safety.

Also, depending on the embodiment, there are three types of drive systems and four drive systems.
Although an example of switching to a different type has been disclosed, as is clear from the characteristics of the camera, there is no limit to the switching position and the number can be increased or decreased as necessary, so this mechanism is extremely versatile.

Although each of the above embodiments discloses an example applied to a camera, the mechanism is widely applicable to fields other than a camera driven by a motor.

[0835]

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a driving force transmission mechanism capable of surely detecting an absolute position with a single sensor.

[Brief description of drawings]

FIG. 1 is a top view of a camera to which a driving force transmission mechanism according to a first embodiment of the present invention is applied.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the camera shown in FIG.

FIG. 3 is a bottom view of the camera shown in FIG.

4 is a right side view showing a state in which a strobe is housed in the camera shown in FIG.

5 is a rear view of the camera shown in FIG.

FIG. 6 is a right side view showing a state in which stroboscopic photography is performed in the camera shown in FIG.

7 is an enlarged top view of a main part showing a mode setting member in the camera shown in FIG.

8 is a central cross-sectional top view of the camera shown in FIG.

FIG. 9 is a WIDE end of a photographing optical system in the camera,
That is, it is a side view showing a state in which the focal length f = 28 mm.

FIG. 10 is a side view showing a standard state of a photographing optical system in the camera, that is, a state in which a focal length f = 70 mm.

FIG. 11: TELE of a photographing optical system in the camera
It is a side view showing a state where an end, that is, a focal length f = 110 mm.

FIG. 12 is a side view showing a retracted state of a photographing optical system in the camera.

FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the inside of the camera.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing power distribution in a power unit in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing the principle of a sequence clutch in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 16 is a model diagram showing a clutch portion in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 17 is a model diagram showing a clutch portion in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 18 is a model diagram showing a clutch portion in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a model diagram showing a clutch portion in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 20 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a planetary gear in the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is an enlarged sectional view showing another example of the planetary gears in the first embodiment.

FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of a gear train from the motor to the clutch portion in the first embodiment.

FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view showing a gear train of the shutter / mirror system in the first embodiment.

FIG. 24 is a side view showing the SM cam gear in the first embodiment. 58b is a cross-sectional view showing 58b.

FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view showing a cam for driving the mirror, taken along the line AA ′ in FIG. 24.

FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view showing the shutter charging cam, taken along the line BB ′ in FIG. 24.

FIG. 27 is a normal stop position (mirror down position) between the SM cam gear and the mirror lever in the first embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship when

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship when the SM cam gear and the mirror lever in the first embodiment are in the mirror-up position.

FIG. 29 is a perspective view of a main part of a mirror system in the first embodiment.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram of the mirror operation of the mirror system in the first embodiment, in which each lever is modeled.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram in which each lever is modeled as a mirror operation of the mirror system in the first embodiment.

32 is a schematic view of the focal plane shutter used in the camera shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from the subject side.

FIG. 33 is a top view of the vicinity of the BB ′ cross section in FIG. 24 seen from above the camera.

FIG. 34 is a top view of the vicinity of the BB ′ cross section in FIG. 24, viewed from the upper side of the camera.

FIG. 35 is a bottom view of the timing board in FIG. 23 as viewed from the bottom surface side.

FIG. 36 is a developed perspective view showing a gear train of the hoisting system in the first embodiment.

FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing a gear train of the rewinding system in the first embodiment.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever in the first embodiment.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever in the first embodiment.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever in the first embodiment.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the clutch cam and the clutch lever in the first embodiment.

42 is a sectional view showing a CC ′ section of the clutch lever shown in FIG. 38. FIG.

FIG. 43 is a developed view of the circumference including the cam surface of the clutch cam in the first embodiment.

FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a clutch lever and a photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an application example of the position detection device in the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment.

FIG. 46 is a view showing the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment,
6 is a timing chart illustrating a clutch mechanism during a shooting operation.

FIG. 47 is an electric circuit diagram showing a configuration of an electric circuit of the position detection mechanism in the camera.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an output signal waveform of the photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an output signal waveform of the photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an output signal waveform of the photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an output signal waveform of the photo interrupter SCPI in the first embodiment.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

71 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

72 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a part of a main flow operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 77 is a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied, where the aperture is narrowed down from the mirror up, the shutter release mirror is down, the aperture is opened, and the film is wound up.
It is a flowchart which shows a part of subroutine which comprises a series of shutter release sequences of shutter charge.

FIG. 78 is a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism according to the first embodiment is applied, where the aperture is narrowed down from the mirror up, the shutter release mirror is down, the aperture is opened and the film is wound up.
It is a flowchart which shows a part of subroutine which comprises a series of shutter release sequences of shutter charge.

FIG. 79 is a view showing a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.
It is a flowchart which shows a part of subroutine which comprises a series of shutter release sequences of shutter charge.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a part of shutter release processing operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a part of shutter release processing operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a part of shutter release processing operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a part of shutter release processing operation of the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

85 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a part of the autofocus operation of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

[Fig. 94] Fig. 94 is a flowchart showing a prohibition processing operation of all interrupts in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a part of interrupt branch processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a remote controller signal processing operation at a destination to which an interrupt is branched by a remote controller signal in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an integration time detection processing operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

103 is a flowchart showing a threshold level adjustment processing operation at the time of position detection in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

104 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a winding drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

FIG. 105 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a winding drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

FIG. 106 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a winding drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

FIG. 107 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a hoist drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

108 is an initial drive of a sequence clutch, drive of a sequence clutch to a mirror drive system position, drive to a hoist drive system position, and rewind drive system in a camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of each processing operation for driving to a position.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a part of an initial setting processing operation for driving the sequence clutch mechanism in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a part of an initial setting processing operation for driving the sequence clutch mechanism in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

111 shows a part of a subroutine for A / D converting the SCPi signal at the time of the sequence clutch switching drive in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied to detect the trailing edge of the signal. It is a flowchart.

FIG. 112 shows a part of a subroutine for A / D converting the SCPi signal at the time of the sequence clutch switching drive in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied to detect the trailing edge of the signal. It is a flowchart.

113 shows a part of a subroutine for A / D converting the SCPi signal at the time of the sequence clutch switching drive in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied to detect the trailing edge of the signal. It is a flowchart.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the brake processing operation of the sequence clutch drive motor in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a processing operation for averaging sorted A / D values in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom drive processing operation in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom drive processing operation in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom drive processing operation in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine for driving zoom from an arbitrary position to an optical wide position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

120 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine for driving zoom from an arbitrary position to an optical wide position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a subroutine used at the time of adjustment in the process of driving the zoom to an arbitrary position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a subroutine for zoom driving to a brake start position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a process of driving zoom from an arbitrary position to a retracted position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom motor braking process in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a part of a zoom motor braking process in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a part of processing for initializing zoom driving in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a part of processing for initializing zoom driving in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a part of processing of ZMPi output signals and ZMPR output signals in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a part of processing of the ZMPi output signal and the ZMPR output signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a part of processing of ZMPi output signals and ZMPR output signals in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

131 is a flowchart showing ZMPR determination processing in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a process of detecting a rising edge and a falling edge of a ZMPi signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a part of processing relating to mechanical in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing a part of processing relating to mechanical in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a part of processing relating to a zoom initial in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a part of processing relating to a zoom initial in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a process regarding initials of a mirror and a shutter in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing a part of a sequence clutch initial position driving process in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism according to the second embodiment of the present invention is applied.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a part of an initial position drive process of the sequence clutch in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a part of the initial position drive processing of the sequence clutch in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a part of a sequence clutch initial position driving process in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a part of a sequence clutch initial position driving process in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process of sequentially storing A / D values in a work area and adding the A / D values in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied. Is.

[FIG. 144] FIG. 144 is a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied, in which a sequence clutch is used as a mirror drive system drive position GPSMiR and a hoist system drive position GPSW.
8 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine process of driving to D, the rewind system drive position GPSRW.

[FIG. 145] FIG. 145 is a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied, in which a sequence clutch is used as a mirror drive system drive position GPSMiR and a hoist system drive position GPSW.
8 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine process of driving to D, the rewind system drive position GPSRW.

146] In the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied, the sequence clutch is used as a mirror drive system drive position GPSMiR and a hoist system drive position GPSW.
8 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine process of driving to D, the rewind system drive position GPSRW.

FIG. 147 is a sequencer clutch mirror drive system drive position GPSMiR, hoisting system drive position GPSW in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.
8 is a flowchart showing a part of a subroutine process of driving to D, the rewind system drive position GPSRW.

148] FIG. 148 is a process to drive the sequence clutch to the initial position when the sequence clutch is not at the initial position at the time of driving to the winding / rewinding drive system position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied. 3 is a flowchart showing a part of FIG.

[FIG. 149] FIG. 149 is a process of driving a sequence clutch to an initial position when the sequence clutch is not at the initial position at the time of driving to the winding / rewinding drive system position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied 3 is a flowchart showing a part of FIG.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process of A / D converting the output signal of SCPi in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a part of a process of detecting a signal change from the result of A / D conversion of the SCPi output signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a part of a process of detecting a signal change from the result of A / D conversion of the SCPi output signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing a part of a process of detecting a signal change from a result of A / D conversion of an output signal of SCPi in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a part of a process of detecting a signal change from the result of A / D conversion of the SCPi output signal in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing a braking process in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a process of performing initial setting necessary for sequence clutch switching drive in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process at the time of driving to an initial position in the LED current switching system of SCPi in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment of the present invention is applied.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process at the time of driving to a hoisting drive system position in the SCPi LED current switching system in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing a subroutine process for driving to a rewinding drive system position in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an initial position drive process of the sequence clutch in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a process when the sequence clutch is driven to the mirror drive system position in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a process for driving the sequence clutch to the position of the hoisting drive system in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a process when the sequence clutch is rewound and driven to the position of the drive system in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of a sounding cycle of PCV in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing another example of the sounding cycle of PCV in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing another example of the sounding cycle of PCV in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 167 is a graph showing an output voltage of SCPi in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.
FIG. 6 is a diagram in which the vertical axis represents the result of D / D conversion and the horizontal axis represents the rotational position of the sequence clutch cam.

168] FIG. 168 is a graph showing an output voltage of SCPi of the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.
FIG. 6 is a diagram in which the vertical axis represents the result of D / D conversion and the horizontal axis represents the rotational position of the sequence clutch cam.

169] FIG. 169 is a lens frame cam rotation angle driven by a zoom motor in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied, and ZM output in accordance with rotation of the lens frame.
It is a diagram showing PR output signal and ZMPi output signal, and also a retracted position, a wide angle, a tele position, and other relations.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing how the output signal of the ZMPR is A / D converted and “H” or “L” is determined in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 171 is a timing chart explaining the operation of the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 172 is a timing chart explaining the operation of the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment.

FIG. 173 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the driving force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment.

FIG. 174 is an enlarged view of a main part showing a clutch lever in the driving force transmission mechanism of the third embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 175 is a sectional view showing an α-α ′ section in FIG. 174.

FIG. 176 is an enlarged view of a main part showing a clutch lever in a driving force transmission mechanism of a modified example of the third embodiment.

FIG. 177 is a sectional view showing a β-β ′ section in FIG. 176;

FIG. 178 is a perspective view showing a photo reflector in the driving force transmission mechanism of the third embodiment.

FIG. 179 is an enlarged view of essential parts showing a clutch lever in the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth example of the present invention.

FIG. 180 is a development view of the lifted state of the cam in the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment, which is developed in the circumferential direction.

181 is a cross-sectional view showing a γ-γ ′ cross section in FIG. 179. FIG.

FIG. 182 is a LE of SCPi in the fourth embodiment.
It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of switching and controlling D current by drive for every drive system.

FIG. 183 is a LE of SCPi in the fourth embodiment.
It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of switching and controlling D current by drive for every drive system.

FIG. 184 is an LE of SCPi in the fourth embodiment
It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of switching and controlling D current by drive for every drive system.

FIG. 185 is an LE of SCPi in the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a relationship between an output signal when the sequence motor is driven in the switching direction of the sequence clutch, and a drive position and a level when the D current is constant.

FIG. 186 is an electric circuit diagram showing a configuration of a detection circuit unit of the photo interrupter in the fifth example of the present invention.

FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a driving force transmission mechanism of a sixth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 188 is an explanatory view of essential parts of a sequence clutch in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 189 is an explanatory view of a main part of a sequence clutch in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 190 is a development view of the lifted state of the cam in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment, which is developed in the circumferential direction.

FIG. 191 is a diagram simply showing the output of the photo interrupter when the clutch is switched in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 192 is a development view of a screen switching series in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 193 is a side view showing a state in which the gear 421 in the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment is viewed from the detection element side.

FIG. 194 is an internal perspective view of a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the sixth embodiment is applied.

195 is a main-part configuration diagram showing a normal state of the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194;

196 is a main-part configuration diagram showing a small screen state of the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194;

197 is an enlarged side view of an essential part showing the mask in the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194;

FIG. 198 is an enlarged side view of an essential part showing the mask in the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194.

FIG. 199 is an enlarged side view of an essential part showing the mask in the screen switching mechanism in the camera shown in FIG. 194;

[FIG. 200] FIG. 200 is a cross-sectional view of main parts of a central portion showing a camera to which a driving force transmission mechanism of a modified example of the sixth embodiment is applied.

201 is a front view of the mask driving section in the camera shown in FIG. 200. FIG.

202 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 455 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

203 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 455 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

FIG. 204 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 455 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

205 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 456 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

206 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the mask 456 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

207 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the mask 456 and the gear 462 in the camera shown in FIG. 200.

FIG. 208 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a drive system of a drive force transmission mechanism of a modified example of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 209 is a conceptual diagram showing a schematic configuration of a camera to which a driving force transmission mechanism of a seventh embodiment of the present invention is applied.

FIG. 210 is a conceptual diagram of the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 211 is a top view of essential parts of the driving force transmission mechanism in the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 212 is a development view of a cam portion of a clutch cam that supports a clutch gear in the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 213 is an explanatory diagram of a film feeding detection mechanism in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 214 is a main-portion cross-sectional view near a lens frame in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 215 is an enlarged perspective view showing a cam gear in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 216 is a development view of a cam surface portion of a cam gear in a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 217 is a timing chart explaining an automatic loading operation at the time of loading a film cartridge in the kamera to which the seventh embodiment is applied.

FIG. 218 is a table 1 for explaining flags F_TSYS0, 1 and operating states of the camera in the camera to which the driving force transmitting mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

219 is a table 2 for explaining flags F_CNDT0, 1 and the state of the film inside the camera in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

[FIG. 220] A mirror F / U subroutine and a flag F_U for controlling the subroutine in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.
Table 3 for explaining the relationship between TY3 and TY4, mirror, and diaphragm drive
Is.

[FIG. 221] FIG. 221 is a table 4 for explaining interrupt factors and factors permitted depending on the state of the camera in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

222 is a bit map showing interrupt factors in Table 4 in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied. FIG.

FIG. 223 is a bit map showing interrupt factors in Table 4 in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 224 is a table 7 showing internal flag settings at the time of a sequence clutch switching operation in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 225 is a table 8 showing the relationship between changes in the zoom photo reflector and zoom photo interrupter during zoom driving and the zoom pulse counter in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

FIG. 226 is a table 9 showing the relationship between changes in the zoom photo reflector and zoom photo interrupter during zoom driving and the zoom pulse counter in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied.

227] In a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied, a retracted position in which a lens is housed in the camera, a state in which the lens is extended to a wide position during shooting, and a flag F
13 is a table 10 showing the relationship between _ZMSNK and flag F_LNSSNK.

228] In a camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the first embodiment is applied, a retracted position in which a lens is housed in the camera, a state of being extended to a wide position at the time of shooting, and a flag F
13 is a table 11 showing the relationship between _ZMSNK and flag F_LNSSNK.

[FIG. 229] FIG. 229 is a table 12 illustrating a sequence clutch drive process in the camera to which the drive force transmission mechanism of the second embodiment is applied.

FIG. 230 is a table 13 for explaining a method of switching the LED current of SCPi in the camera to which the driving force transmission mechanism of the fourth embodiment is applied.

[Explanation of Codes] 1 ... Shooting lens 2 ... Release button 11 ... Mirror frame 12 ... Mirror box 13 ... Shutter unit 14 ... Motor 15 ... Patron 16 ... Spool chamber 22 ... Power unit 26 ... Shutter charge lever 27 ... Mirror drive lever 31 , 41 ... Sun gear 32, 43 ... Planetary gear 33, 45 ... Shutter / mirror drive system first stage gear 34, 46 ... Winding drive system first stage gear 35, 44 ... Rewind drive system first stage gear 36, 42 ... Clutch cam 37, 47 … Clutch lever

[Procedure Amendment 2]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 17

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 17

[Procedure 3]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 18

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 18

[Procedure amendment 4]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 19

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 19

[Procedure Amendment 5]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 38

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 38

[Procedure correction 6]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 39

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 39

[Procedure Amendment 7]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 40

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 40

[Procedure Amendment 8]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 41

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 41

[Procedure Amendment 9]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 45

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 45

[Procedure Amendment 10]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 46

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 46

[Procedure Amendment 11]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 52

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 52

[Procedure Amendment 12]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 53

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 53

[Procedure Amendment 13]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 56

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 56

[Procedure Amendment 14]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 57

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 57

[Procedure Amendment 15]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 58

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 58

[Procedure Amendment 16]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 59

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 59

[Procedure Amendment 17]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 61

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 61

[Procedure 18]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 62

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 62

[Procedure Amendment 19]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 63

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 63

[Procedure amendment 20]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 64

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 64

[Procedure correction 21]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 65

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 65

[Procedure correction 22]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 66

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 66

[Procedure amendment 23]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 67

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 67

[Procedure correction 24]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 68

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 68

[Procedure correction 25]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 70

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 70

[Procedure Amendment 26]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 71

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 71

[Procedure Amendment 27]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 72

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 72

[Procedure correction 28]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 73

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 73

[Procedure correction 29]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 74

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 74

[Procedure amendment 30]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 75

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 75

[Procedure correction 31]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 76

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 76

[Procedure correction 32]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 77

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 77

[Procedure amendment 33]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 78

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 78

[Procedure amendment 34]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 79

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 79

[Procedure amendment 35]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 80

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 80

[Procedure correction 36]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 81

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 81

[Procedure amendment 37]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 82

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 82

[Procedure amendment 38]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 84

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 84

[Procedure amendment 39]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 87

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 87

[Procedure amendment 40]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 92

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 92

[Procedure Amendment 41]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 93

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 93

[Procedure amendment 42]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 95

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 95

[Procedure amendment 43]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 96

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 96

[Procedure correction 44]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 97

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 97

[Procedure amendment 45]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 104

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 104

[Procedure correction 46]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 105

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 105

[Procedure amendment 47]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG.

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 106

[Procedure correction 48]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 108

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 108

[Procedure correction 49]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 109

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 109

[Procedure amendment 50]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 110

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 110

[Procedure correction 51]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 116

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 116

[Procedure amendment 52]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 117

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 117

[Procedure amendment 53]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 118

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 118

[Procedure Amendment 54]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 119

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 119

[Procedure Amendment 55]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 120

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 120

[Procedure Amendment 56]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG.

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 122

[Procedure amendment 57]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG.

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 124

[Procedure correction 58]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 125

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 125

[Procedure correction 59]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 129

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 129

[Procedure Amendment 60]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 130

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

[FIG. 130]

[Procedure correction 61]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 133

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 133

[Procedure correction 62]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG.

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 134

[Procedure amendment 63]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 136

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 136

[Procedure correction 64]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 137

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 137

[Procedure correction 65]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 138

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 138

[Procedure Amendment 66]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 139

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 139

[Procedure Amendment 67]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 140

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

[Fig. 140]

[Procedure correction 68]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 142

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 142

[Procedure correction 69]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 146

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 146

[Procedure correction 70]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 147

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 147

[Procedure correction 71]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 148

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 148

[Procedure correction 72]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Name of item to be corrected] Fig. 150

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

[Fig. 150]

[Procedure amendment 73]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 156

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 156

[Procedure Amendment 74]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 158

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 158

[Procedure amendment 75]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 159

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 159

[Procedure Amendment 76]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] Fig. 160

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

[Fig. 160]

[Procedure amendment 77]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG.

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 214

[Procedure amendment 78]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 217

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 217

[Procedure amendment 79]

[Document name to be corrected] Drawing

[Correction target item name] FIG. 218

[Correction method] Change

[Correction content]

FIG. 218

Claims (3)

[Claims] 1. A sun gear, which is driven by a single drive source to rotate in forward and reverse directions, a planetary gear which constantly meshes with the sun gear, and a gear connecting member which connects the central axes of the sun gear and the planetary gears. And allowing the revolution of the planetary gear by one direction rotation of the sun gear, restricting the revolution of the planetary gear by the other direction rotation, and enabling rotation of the planetary gear at a predetermined position on the revolution locus. A revolution control member, and a plurality of driven gears which, when the planetary gear is positioned at the rotation position defined by the revolution control member, mesh with the planetary gear at the rotation position to obtain a driving force, , The position of the revolution restricting member with respect to the sun gear is changed between the first rotation position and the second rotation position of the planet gear, and the change is detected to detect the planet gear. Driving force transmission mechanism and detecting translocation. 2. The driving force transmission mechanism according to claim 1, wherein the first rotation position of the planetary gear is an initial position on the revolution locus of the planetary gear. 3. The driving force transmission mechanism according to claim 1, wherein the restricted position of the revolution restricting member is detected by a non-contact means.